JP2022140783A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving interest of a game.

SOLUTION: A game machine can display reservation display corresponding to reservation memory, and can operationally display the reservation display in a second cycle. A first cycle and the second cycle have each different time, and a performance pattern is stop displayed at a timing before elapse of a prescribed time, after finish of the last cycle variation in variable display of a special pattern.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 81

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In a gaming machine, for example, Patent Literature 1 describes that pending images corresponding to the number of pending items stored in a storage unit are displayed in a pending image display area.

JP 2016-140643 A

However, in the gaming machine as described in the above patent document, there is room for further improvement in the presentation of the game in terms of enhancing the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

The present invention, which achieves the above object, is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes main control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control for controlling production according to commands transmitted from the main control means. Means (for example, production control section 300), and the main control means includes determination means (for example, special symbol determination section 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the starting condition. , storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing judgment information based on the judgment as a reserved memory, and a fluctuation display that stops and displays the special symbols for a predetermined time after performing cycle fluctuation in the first period as a fluctuation display of the special symbols. means (for example, a special symbol variation control unit 233), and the effect control means executes a variable effect that causes the effect symbol to be variably displayed and then stopped in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the special symbol. A pending display corresponding to the pending storage can be displayed, the pending display can be displayed in a second cycle, and the first cycle and the second cycle are different times. , the performance symbols are stopped and displayed at a timing after the end of the last cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbols and before the predetermined time elapses.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned reference numerals in this column are given for illustrative purposes when describing the present invention, and the present invention is not limited by these reference numerals.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest in the production using the production image or the like.

1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. (a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display device arranged at the lower left of the game board, (b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko game machine, and (c) is arranged at the lower left of the game board. FIG. 10 is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the control unit of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an image/sound control unit and a lamp control unit according to the embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the game control part of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows operation|movement of the basic process by a game control part. It is a flow chart showing the operation of the power-off processing by the game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of a game control part. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a starting opening switch process. 4 is a flowchart showing the details of gate switch processing; It is a flow chart which shows the contents of special design processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a jackpot determination process. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of processing during suspension. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a customer waiting setting process. It is a flow chart showing the contents of normal design processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a special winning opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of an electric tulip process. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of the random number used in the present embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot random number, (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot pattern random number, (c) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reach random number, and (d) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a winning random number. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. It is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM of the game control unit, (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit shown in (a) is. It is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM of the effect control unit, (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a reserved storage area, (b) is a block showing the configuration of each of the storage unit shown in (a) It is a diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a prior determination process. It is a flow chart which shows operation of a production control part, (a) is a figure showing main processing, and (b) is a figure showing interruption processing. 4 is a flowchart showing the contents of command reception processing; 27 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process and the effect selection process of FIG. 26. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process of FIG. 26; FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process of FIG. 26; FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the contents of a customer waiting command reception process of FIG. 26; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of production|presentation button processing. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display device in each game area. It is a figure which shows the main process of an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process of a lamp|ramp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process of a lamp control part. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a board role initial motion pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a frame role initial motion pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated while settings are being changed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources after setting change; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirmation of settings; It is a variation performance pattern table for big hits in a low probability time saving non-playing state. A variable effect pattern table for small hits and losses in a low probability time saving non-game state is shown. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is explanatory drawing of each production|presentation in example 1 of variation production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing of each production|presentation in example 1 of variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in the example of variation|variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in the example of variation|variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in the example of variation|variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in the example of variation|variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in the example of variation|variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the variable display of a special design with a special design indicator. It is a figure which shows the example of a display production|presentation for every production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the display production example of the number of reservations. It is a timing chart when the variable production starts from the customer waiting state. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 76; FIG. 77 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 76; It is a timing chart in the case of starting winning during the variable production. 80 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 79; FIG. It is a timing chart in the case of continuously executing the variable effect. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 81; FIG. 82 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 81; It is a timing chart when a variable effect is started without being able to receive the command at the time of stop normally. 85 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 84. FIG. It is a timing chart when the normal fluctuation performance ends and the customer waits. 87 is a diagram showing an example of effects at various timings in FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of effects at various timings in FIG. 86; FIG. It is a timing chart when the stop time command cannot be received normally and the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 89; It is a timing chart in the case of ending the losing normal reach fluctuation effect and entering a customer waiting state. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 91; FIG. 92 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 91; It is a timing chart when a variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP ready-to-win effect ends. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 94; FIG. 95 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 94; It is a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 97; FIG. 98 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 97; It is a timing chart in the case of recovering from the power cut that occurred during the fluctuation production. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 100; FIG. 101 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 100; FIG. 101 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 100; It is a timing chart when the start time command cannot be received normally during the look-ahead effect. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 104; FIG. 105 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 104; 10 is a timing chart when a power-on designation command is received while a menu image is being displayed; 108 is a diagram showing an example of effects at various timings in FIG. 107; FIG. It is a figure which shows the design variation action production example of a decorative design. It is a figure which shows the design variation action production example of a decorative design. It is a figure which shows the design variation action production example of a decorative design. It is a figure which shows the design variation action production example of a decorative design. It is a figure which shows the design variation action production example of a decorative design. It is a figure which shows the design variation action production example of a decorative design. (a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the relationship between an event when a command cannot be received and a chance eye lighting effect. (a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the relationship between an event when a command cannot be received and a ready-to-win effect. (a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the timing relationship between an event when a command cannot be received and a lighting effect using decorative symbols.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[First embodiment]
[Basic configuration of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment.
A pachinko gaming machine 100 as an example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is configured to pay out prize balls when a game ball hit by a player's instruction operation wins. This pachinko game machine 100 comprises a game board 110 on which game balls are launched, and a frame member 150 surrounding the game board 110.例文帳に追加The game board 110 is detachably attached to the frame member 150 .

The game board 110 has a game area 111 for playing games with game balls, a rail member 112 forming a passage for the game balls shot from below to rise to an upper position of the game area 111, and a game board 110. A guide member 113 for guiding game balls is provided on the right side of the area 111 .
In the present embodiment, an image display section 114 for displaying various images for presentation is arranged at a position of the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 has a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and displays, for example, decorative symbols for informing the player of the symbol lottery result (symbol fluctuation result) as the player progresses the game, An effect image due to the appearance of a character or an item, or an effect image using a hold display, which will be described later, is displayed.
In addition, a movable accessory 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects are provided on the front surface of the game board 110 . The movable accessory 115 performs various effects by operating on the game board 110, and the board lamp 116 performs various effects by emitting light.

The game area 111 is provided with game pegs, windmills and the like (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game ball falls. Also, in the game area 111, various accessories related to prize winning and lottery are arranged at predetermined positions. In addition, the game area 111 is provided with a discharge port 117 for discharging out of the game area 111 those game balls that have hit the game area 111 but have not entered the winning opening. The pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an out ball detection switch (SW) 227 (see FIG. 3 described later) for detecting an out ball consisting of game balls flowing into the discharge port 117 .

In this embodiment, as various accessories related to winning and lottery, when a game ball wins, a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) starts 121 and 2nd start port 122, and when a game ball passes through, normal A starting gate (hereinafter simply referred to as a gate) 124 for starting a symbol lottery (opening/closing lottery) is arranged on the game board 110 . In FIG. 1, the gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 111, respectively, the left gate 124 is described as 124L, and the right gate 124 is described as 124R. Further, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 referred to herein refer to a prize winning port that triggers the operation of one predetermined special symbol display device. Specifically, the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 are provided with switches (first start port switch 211 and second start port switch 212, which will be described later) that detect the passage of game balls at the time of winning. It is When the game ball enters the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the activation of the special symbol display.

The second starting port 122 is provided with an electric tulip (opening/closing member) 123 as a normal electric accessory, in which a pair of tulip-shaped blades are opened and closed by an electric solenoid and lighted. In the electric tulip 123, when the blades are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 122, but when the blades are opened, the entrance of the second start port 122 expands and the game ball enters the second start port 122. Designed for easy access. When the electric tulip 123 wins the normal pattern lottery, the wings open for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds to 1.8 seconds) and for a specified number of times (for example, 1 time to 3 times) while lighting or blinking.

A pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, a low-probability state with a low winning probability and a high-probability state with a higher winning probability than the low-probability state, based on the winning probability of a jackpot lottery. Then, the state is controlled to either the low probability state or the high probability state based on a predetermined condition.
In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 has, as a game state, an electric sapo state in which there are few winning opportunities to the second starting port 122 and an electric sapo state in which there are more winning opportunities to the second starting port 122 than in the electric sapo no state. have. Then, for example, under a predetermined condition such as triggered by the number of lotteries of a big hit or a special symbol lottery, it is controlled to be in either the state of no power supply or the power supply state. The electric sapo state is, for example, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, or increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. It is a game state controlled by combination.
In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, a time-saving no state with a long special symbol variation time and a time-saving state with a shorter special symbol variation time than the no time-saving state.
In addition, in this Embodiment, an electric support state and a time saving state shall be controlled simultaneously. Further, in the following description, the electric sapo state and time saving state are simply referred to as the time saving state, and the electric sapo no state and no time saving state are simply referred to as no time saving state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as other accessories related to winning and lottery, there is a large winning opening 125 as a special electric accessory that is opened according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and a lottery is performed even if the game ball wins. A normal prize winning port 126 is provided on the game board 110.例文帳に追加A large winning opening door 125D for opening and closing the large winning opening 125 is provided in the large winning opening 125. - 特許庁In the following description, the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the big winning opening door 125D may be referred to as the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 125 for convenience.
In this embodiment, a display 130 for displaying the lottery results and the number of pending games is arranged at the lower left position of the game board 110 .

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 , the second starting opening provided with the electric tulip 123 and the big winning opening 125 are arranged in the right area of the game area 111 . Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 100 of the present embodiment, when trying to win the second start opening 122 or the big winning opening 125, the game ball is made to flow down to the area on the right side of the game area 111. .

In addition, on the back side of the game board 110, there are a game control board for determining the winning of special symbols, etc., an effect control board for comprehensively controlling effects, an image control board for controlling effects by images and sounds, various lamps and Various substrates (not shown) such as a lamp control substrate for controlling the performance by the movable accessory 115 are attached. A switching power supply (not shown) that converts the supplied 24V AC power into DC power and outputs the DC power to various substrates is arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110 .

When the player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 clockwise, the frame member 150 shoots game balls at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 balls per minute) with a hitting force corresponding to the operation angle. Equipped with a launcher (not shown) that fires electrically. In addition, the frame member 150 includes a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls to the shooting device one by one at a timing interlocked with the operation of the lever 152 by the player, and a game ball that the supply device supplies to the shooting device. and a plate 153 for temporarily storing. To this plate 153, balls to be paid out by a payout unit are put out, for example.
In this embodiment, the plate 153 is integrated with the upper and lower plates. A configuration example in which the handle 151 of the launcher emits light under predetermined conditions is also conceivable.

The frame member 150 also includes a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the shooting of game balls even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the shooting device, and a game ball accumulated in the tray 153. and an eject button 155 for dropping it into a box (not shown) and ejecting it.
The frame member 150 also includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 for announcing the game state and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and performing various effects. The speaker 156 performs various productions using music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a luminous body such as an LED, and performs various effects with light, such as a pattern of lighting and blinking, a difference in emission color, and the like. As for the frame lamp 157, a configuration example is conceivable in which it is possible to perform an effect of changing the irradiation direction of light.
The frame member 150 also has a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2(a) is an enlarged view showing an example of the display 130 arranged at the lower left of the game board 110. FIG. 2B is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and FIG. 2C is an enlarged view showing an example of the sub-information display 80 arranged at the lower left of the game board.
The indicator 130 of the pachinko game machine 100, as shown in FIG. A second special symbol display 222 that operates correspondingly and a normal symbol display 223 that operates corresponding to the passage of the gate 124 are provided. The first special symbol display device 221 variably displays the special symbols based on the winning of the first starting port 121, and then stops the display to display the lottery result. The second special symbol display device 222 variably displays the special symbols based on the winning of the second starting port 122, and then stops the display to display the lottery result. As will be described in detail in the second embodiment, the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 have a plurality of cycle variations (cycle display) with a change in display mode as one cycle (= 256 ms). It is performed twice, and when the fluctuation time of the special pattern has passed, it is stopped and displayed.
The normal symbol display device 223 variably displays the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 124, and then stops the display to display the lottery result. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode. Similarly, the normal symbol display device 223 is also composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed according to the lighting mode thereof.

In addition, the display device 130 is a first special symbol reservation display device 218 that operates in response to the suspension on the first special symbol display device 221, and a second special symbol display device 218 that operates in response to the suspension on the second special symbol display device 222. A 2 special design reservation display 219 and a normal design reservation display 220 which operates corresponding to the reservation by the normal design display 223 are provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol reservation display device 218, the second special symbol reservation display device 219 and the normal symbol reservation display device 220 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of reservations is determined by the lighting mode. Is displayed.

Here, the hold will be explained. When the game ball enters the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbols (while the variable display for one prize is being performed), the special symbols are changing. Secondly, it is not possible to start the variable display operation of the special symbols based on the subsequent prize winning. Therefore, subsequent winnings are stored up to a specified number (for example, 4), and the right to start the special symbols for the winning game ball is not retained until the variable display operation for the first winning game ball is completed. Reserved.
It should be noted that the same processing as that for the special symbols is performed for the normal symbols. The fact that such a reservation is made and the number of reservations (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218, the second special design reservation display 219 and the normal design reservation display 220.

Furthermore, the indicator 130 has a status indicator 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . In this embodiment, the status indicator 224 is composed of a display device in which three LEDs are arranged. One of the three LEDs lights to notify whether the state of the pachinko game machine 100 is a high probability state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high. In addition, the other one is for notifying by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a time-saving state with a short special symbol variation time. Still another one is to notify by lighting whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by hitting to the right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

In addition, the indicator 130 has a round number indicator 225 for displaying the number of rounds when the big winning opening 125 is activated in the big winning game performed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. Incidentally, the jackpot game will be described later. The round number indicator 225 is composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of operation rounds of the big winning opening 125 in the jackpot game is displayed according to the lighting mode thereof.

The indicator 130 also includes a status confirmation indicator 226 . The status confirmation display 226 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. Lighting of the LED is started, and the LED is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. Since the state confirmation display 226 is provided on the front (surface) of the game machine in this way, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. . The installation position of the status confirmation display 226 may be the front (surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and may be installed in other places.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. can be displayed if possible. For example, the state confirmation display 226 may be illuminated in the setting change mode, and the state confirmation display 226 may be blinked in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 226 is provided as a dedicated display for indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display device 221, the second special symbol display device 222, the first special symbol reservation display device 218, the second special symbol reservation display device 219, the round number display device 225, status indicators 224, etc. are off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be illuminated.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an input device for the player to make an input for the performance. As shown in FIG. 2B, in the present embodiment, as an example of an input device, a production button 161, a production key 162 adjacent to the production button 161 and composed of a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape, are arranged on the frame member 150 . In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect for accepting an operation of selecting one image from among a plurality of images is performed. In this case, for example, the player operates a production key 162 consisting of four keys arranged in a cross to designate one of a plurality of images displayed on the image display section 114 and press the production button 161. By operating it, it is possible to perform an effect such as selecting the instructed image. As for the form of the input device, in addition to the production button 161 and production key 162 shown in the drawings, various input forms such as levers and handles can be adopted according to the contents of production.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment has a sub-first variable display 81, a sub-second variable display 82, a sub-first suspension display 83, and a sub-second suspension display 84 inside the game area 111. , a sub-normal map fluctuation display 85, a sub-normal map holding display 86, and a sub-right hitting display 87.
The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of an LED, and is dynamically illuminated. The sub-information display 80 is not provided with a display such as the status confirmation display 226 that indicates that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and the second sub-variation display 82 is for variably displaying the second special symbol. It is for displaying (announcing) whether or not it is inside, and each is configured by one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (0.5 seconds on → 0.5 seconds off), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, it lights up. do. In other words, the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82 repeatedly perform cycle display in which one flashing is one cycle (=1 second), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, Light.

It should be noted that the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82 may be used to notify the result of the special symbol jackpot determination. In this case, it is preferable that the LED is turned on in the case of a big win, and the LED is turned off in the case of a loss.

The sub-first pending display 83 is for displaying the number of first pending information (first pending number) described later, and the second sub-holding display 84 is for displaying the number of second pending information ( second pending number), each consisting of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, and when the number of reservations is "2" The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks and the right LED blinks when the number of reservations is "3", and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of reservations is "4".

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning, light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed fluctuating can be grasped, it blinks during the normal pattern fluctuation display, and when it is stopped, it lights up or turns off. may

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation memories (normal pattern reservation number), and is composed of two LEDs. Then, the left and right LEDs are turned off when the number of normal figure reservations is "0", and when the number of normal figure reservations is "1", the LED on the left side lights up and the LED on the right side goes out, and the number of normal figure reservations is When the number is "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up.

The sub-right-handed display 87 is for prompting the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 111 (so-called right-handed hitting), and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED lights during the jackpot state (special game) and the time-saving game state, and the LED turns off during the other game states.

[Configuration of control unit]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an image/sound control section and a lamp control section according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control unit includes, as main control means, a game control section 200 for determining whether a special symbol is won or the like. In addition, as a sub-control means, it is provided with an effect control unit 300 that controls the effect in general, and a payout control unit 330 that performs payout control of the payout balls.

[Structure and function of the game control unit]
The game control unit 200 includes a CPU 201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining winning of special symbols, a ROM 202 that stores programs executed by the CPU 201, various data, etc., and a working memory for the CPU 201. and a RAM 203 .

The game control unit 200 controls the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in either a high probability state or a low probability state, or in either a no time saving state or a time saving state. As a result, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a high probability state and time saving state high probability time saving game state, a low probability state and time saving state low probability time saving game state, a high probability state and no time saving state high It becomes one of the low probability time saving non-gaming state, the low probability state and the low probability time saving non-gaming state which is the non-working time saving state. And the game control part 200 switches a high probability state and a low probability state based on a predetermined|prescribed condition, and switches a time saving no state and a time saving state. In addition, the game control unit 200, in the time saving state, controls such as making the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery higher than in the time saving state, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, etc. I do.

The game control unit 200 performs a special symbol lottery when a game ball has entered the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 . Then, a special game such as a jackpot game is performed according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery. In the special game, the game control unit 200 performs a predetermined number of rounds to maintain an open state until the large winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 game balls have been won). control to repeat only Then, the game control section 200 controls the opening/closing operation interval when the big winning opening 125 is opened.

In addition, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 124 . Then, the operation of the electric tulip is controlled according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200 is controlled by the suspension caused by the game ball entering the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during the special symbol variation, and the game ball passing through the gate 124 during the normal symbol variation. Set the hold that occurs due to
In addition, the game control unit 200, the determination result of the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery, the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state, the change information of the time saving no state and the time saving state, the setting information of the reservation, etc. accompanying the game control Information is sent to the effect control unit 300 by a command to be described later.

Furthermore, the game control unit 200, when the game ball wins the first start port 121, the second start port 122, the large winning prize port 125 and the normal winning prize port 126, one game ball hit according to the place where the game ball has won The payout controller 330 is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121, three prize balls are awarded, when a game ball enters the second start port 122, four prize balls are awarded, and when a game ball enters the big prize winning port 125, thirteen prizes are awarded. When a game ball wins in a ball or a normal winning hole 126, an instruction command (command) is sent to a payout control unit 330 so as to pay out 10 prize balls respectively. Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out the prize balls associated therewith.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out the prize balls according to the instruction of the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 acquires information on the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330. Thereby, the number of awarded balls is managed.

The game control unit 200 includes, as detection means, a first start opening detection unit (first start opening switch (SW)) 211 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the first start opening 121, as shown in FIG. , a second starting opening detection unit (second starting opening switch (SW)) 212 that detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 122, an electric tulip opening and closing unit 213 that opens and closes the electric tulip 123, and a gate 124 A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 for detecting passage of a game ball is connected.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a large winning opening detection unit (large winning opening switch (SW)) 215 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the large winning opening 125, and a large winning opening door 125D of the large winning opening 125. A large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216 that is set to a closed state and a protruding inclined open state, and a normal winning opening detection unit (normal winning opening switch (SW)) 217 that detects the winning of a game ball into the normal winning opening 126. , are connected.

In addition, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol holding display 218 that displays the unvaried pending number of winnings in the first start port 121 during the variation of the special symbols, and a second special symbol during the variation of the special symbols. A second special symbol reservation display 219 for displaying the unvaried reserved number of winning prizes in the starting port 122, and a normal symbol reservation display for displaying the unvaried reserved number passed through the gate 124 during normal symbol fluctuation. 220 and are connected.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol display 221 for displaying the fluctuation display of the special symbols and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by winning the game ball to the first starting port 121, and a second starting port. A second special symbol display 222 for displaying the variable display of special symbols and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the winning of the game ball to 122, and the normal symbol display for displaying the variable display of the normal symbols and the result of the normal symbol lottery. A device 223 and a state display device 224 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are connected.

Detection signals detected by the first start switch 211 , the second start switch 212 , the gate switch 214 , the big win switch 215 and the normal win switch 217 are sent to the game controller 200 . In addition, the control signal from the game control unit 200 is the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, the large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216, the first special symbol reservation display device 218, the second special symbol reservation display device 219, and the normal design reservation display device 220. , the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol indicator 223 and the state indicator 224. Thereby, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the above-described number of awarded balls to be paid out.

In addition, on the surface side of the game control board, a signal for clearing the stored contents of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 or updating the set value (probability of being judged as a big hit), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is input. A RAM clear switch 228 for clearing a RAM, a setting key switch 229 for inputting a signal for shifting to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, by operating a setting key, and performance information and settings for grasping the actual performance of the gaming machine. An information display 230 for displaying values, other electronic components, etc. are mounted.

The information display 230 is composed of four 7-segment displays (230a to 230d, see FIG. 39 described later) arranged in the horizontal direction. The two 7-segment displays 230a and 230b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information, and the two 7-segment displays 230c and 230d from the right constitute setting. A numeric segment is configured to display numeric information indicating numeric values of values and performance information (see FIG. 38). Note that static lighting is performed when setting values are displayed, and dynamic lighting is performed when performance information is displayed.

Further, the game control unit 200 is connected with a board external information terminal board 350 for transmitting various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. Then, the game control unit 200 transmits information about the number of paid out prize balls and information indicating the state of the game control unit 200 acquired from the payout control unit 330 to the host computer via the board external information terminal board 350. do.

[Configuration and function of payout control unit]
The payout control unit 330 includes a CPU 331 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the payout of balls, a ROM 332 that stores programs executed by the CPU 331 and various data, and a RAM 333 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 331. and has.
Then, the payout control section 330 controls the payout of the payout balls based on the command sent from the game control section 200 .
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 acquires a command to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game control unit 200 according to the location (first start port 121, etc.) where the game ball has won. Then, the payout drive unit 334 is controlled so as to pay out the number of prize balls specified by the command. The payout drive unit 334 here is configured by a drive motor for sending out game balls from a game ball storage unit.

The payout control unit 330 also includes a payout ball detection unit 335 for detecting the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, and a game ball storage unit (not shown). A ball presence detection unit 336 for detecting whether or not the balls are stored, and a tray 153 for holding game balls used when a player plays a game and paid-out prize balls are in a full tank state. The full-tank detector 337 is connected. The payout control unit 330 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing according to these detection signals.
Further, the payout control unit 330 is connected with a frame external information terminal board 340 for transmitting various kinds of information to a host computer installed in the hall. The payout control unit 330 provides, for example, information on the number of prize balls instructed to be paid out to the payout drive unit 334, information on the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, and the like. is transmitted to the host computer via the frame external information terminal board 340 . In addition, similar information is transmitted to the game control unit 200 as well.

[Configuration and functions of production control unit]
The effect control unit 300 includes a CPU 301 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effect, a ROM 302 that stores programs executed by the CPU 301 and various data, a RAM 303 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 301, and a date and time and a real-time clock (RTC) 304 that measures the
The effect control unit 300 sets the content of the effect based on the result of determination as to whether or not the special symbol lottery is won or not sent from the game control unit 200 and the variation pattern, for example. At that time, an operation input from the user using the effect button 161 or the effect key 162 may be received, and the effect contents corresponding to the operation input may be set. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to an operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the production button 161, and the operation content identified by this operation signal is reflected in the setting of production.
Further, when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period, the effect control unit 300 instructs setting of a screen display for customer waiting as one of the effects.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 sets the content of effect based on the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state and the change information of the no time saving state and the time saving state received from the game control unit 200 .
In addition, effect control section 300 sends a command instructing execution of the set effect content to image/sound control section 310 and lamp control section 320 .

Further, the production control unit 300 is connected to an image/sound control unit 310 that controls production using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls production using various lamps and movable accessories 115. It is

[Structure and function of image/sound control unit]
As shown in FIG. 4, the image/sound control unit 310 stores a CPU 311 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the image and sound representing the content of the effect, and a program that is executed by the CPU 311, various data, and the like. A ROM 312 , a RAM 313 used as a work memory for the CPU 311 , a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314 , a CGROM 315 , and an SNDROM 316 are provided.

The image/sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300 .
Specifically, the CGROM 315 stores pattern images and background images to be displayed during the game on the image display unit 114, decorative patterns for notifying the player of the lottery result, characters and characters for displaying the advance notice effect to the player. Image data such as items are stored. The SNDROM 316 also stores various audio data such as music, voice, and effect sounds such as jingles to be output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data.
Based on the pending number command or the variable effect start command sent from the effect control unit 300, the CPU 311 analyzes the animation pattern, creates a display list that summarizes commands related to drawing, and transmits the display list to the VDP 314. conduct.

Based on the display list received from the CPU 311, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data stored in the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, respectively. Furthermore, the VDP 314 uses the read image data to perform background image display, pattern image display, pattern image variation, drawing processing for character/item display, etc., and audio processing using the read sound data. . Then, the VDP 314 controls screen display on the image display unit 114 based on the rendered image data. Also, the VDP 314 controls the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the sound-processed sound data.
In this embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform audio processing in addition to drawing processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a processor dedicated to audio processing may be provided separately.

[Structure and function of lamp controller]
The lamp control unit 320 stores a CPU 321 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable accessory 115, and the programs and various data that are executed by the CPU 321. A ROM 322 and a RAM 323 used as a work memory for the CPU 321 are provided.
Then, the lamp control section 320 controls the lighting/blinking of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, the emission color, etc. based on the command sent from the effect control section 300. FIG. Also, it controls the operation of the movable accessory 115 .

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores lighting/blinking pattern data and emission color pattern data (emission pattern data) are stored. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322 corresponding to the command sent from the effect control section 300 . Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
Further, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores operation pattern data of the movable accessory 115 corresponding to the content of the effect set by the effect control unit 300 . The CPU 321 controls the motion of the movable accessory 115 based on the read motion pattern data.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 are each provided on the rear surface of the game board 110. A game control board as a sub-board, an effect control board as a sub-board, an image control board, a lamp control board, and a payout control board are individually configured.
In addition, in the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 4, the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 are connected to the effect control unit 300 and controlled by the effect control unit 300, but are not limited to this. The effect button 161 and the effect key 162 may be connected to the lamp control section 320 and controlled by the lamp control section 320 .

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control section 200 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the game control section 200. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, and a special symbol determination unit 234 as functional units that execute various lottery processes. , and a normal symbol variation control unit 236.
In addition, the game control section 200 includes a variation pattern selection section 235 as a functional section that executes processing associated with special symbol variation.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a large winning opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, and a prize ball processing unit 239 as functional units that perform operation control of various accessories and data processing related to prize balls. , an output control unit 240 and a random number control unit 241 .

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used for the special symbol lottery and a random number value used for the normal symbol lottery. In the case of the random number used for the special symbol lottery, specifically, on the condition that the game ball has won the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, for each type of random number, a numerical value within a predetermined range One numerical value (random value) is selected (acquired) from among them. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination unit 234 . Although details will be described later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot, a pattern random number indicating the type of jackpot, a variation pattern random number, a reach random number, and the like.
In addition, in the case of the random number used in the normal symbol lottery, specifically, one number (random number) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numbers on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 124. ) is done. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the normal symbol determination unit 232 . In addition, as the random numbers used in the normal symbol lottery, in addition to the winning random numbers indicating whether or not winning, there are cases where the symbol random numbers indicating the type of winning, the variation pattern random numbers, and the like are set.
The special symbol variation control section 233 controls the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222 according to the lottery result when the special symbol lottery is performed.

The special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. type”, and “whether it is a small win or not when the big win is not won”. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which is the detection means, and determines the special symbol. The unit 234 determines whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game, etc.) advantageous to the player based on the obtained random number value. It should be noted that the aforementioned lottery for the special symbol (big hit lottery) refers to processing in the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234 .

Here, the "jackpot" is classified into a plurality of types according to the game state that occurs after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, the type of jackpot is determined by a combination of no time-saving state or time-saving state, and a high-probability state or a low-probability state. That is, as the type of jackpot based on the gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game, after the end of the jackpot game, a jackpot that becomes a high probability time saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a high probability time saving game state jackpot), a low probability time saving game state A jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a low-probability time-saving game state jackpot), a high-probability time-saving no-game state jackpot (hereinafter, a high-probability time-saving no-game state jackpot), a low probability time-saving no-game state jackpot (hereinafter, low There can be a jackpot in a probability time-saving non-playing state). These jackpots are associated with individual special symbols, respectively, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the type of special symbols won in the special symbol lottery.

Also, the "jackpot" may be divided into a big win in which the jackpot game time is long and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out, and a jackpot game in which the jackpot game time is short and almost no game balls can be expected to be paid out. The former is called "long hit" and the latter is called "short hit". For example, in the "long win", a round is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) until the open state of the big prize opening 125 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 game balls have won a prize). be In addition, in the "short hit", a round in which the big winning opening 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In addition, the "small win" when the big win is not won is a small win game in which the big winning port 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). done. When the small prize is won, the game state before winning the small prize is continued even after the small prize is finished. That is, when the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the high probability time saving game state, the high probability time saving game state is continued even after the small win game ends, and the game state does not shift. Similarly, when the game state at the time of winning the small win is the low-probability time-saving no-game state, the low-probability time-saving no-game state is continued even after the small-win game ends, and the game state does not shift.
In addition, "minor win" is a kind of "lose", and none of the above game states that are advantageous to the player are set.

The variation pattern selection section 235 selects a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 . Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 is a variation pattern (for example, 13.5 seconds or more ), the variation pattern is determined based on the determination result of whether or not. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbols. Details of the operation of the variation pattern selection section 235 and the special symbol variation control section 233 will be described later.
Here, "ready-to-win" is an effect for making the player expect a big win in decorative symbols, which will be described later.

The normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol is “whether or not” using a random number table as shown in FIG. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening and closing the electric tulip 123 based on the random number value for the normal symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 . Also, when a plurality of types of hits are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "win type" when the determination result is a hit. The normal symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the normal symbol determination unit 232 .
The normal symbol variation control section 236 controls the normal symbol variation by the normal symbol display device 223 according to the lottery result when the normal symbol lottery is performed.
The electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times when the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines that the normal symbol lottery is “hit”, and the game ball enters the second start port 122. A state in which it is easy to win a prize is generated. Further, when it is determined that the tulip is "off", such an open state of the electric tulip 123 is not generated. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 will be described later, but there are, for example, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds and an operation pattern that opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol determination unit 234 determines "big win" in the special symbol lottery, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 performs a big winning opening with an operation pattern specified based on the type of the big winning as a big winning game. 125 to control the opening operation. In addition, when the special symbol determination unit 234 determines "small hit" in the special symbol lottery, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 opens the big winning opening 125 for a specified time and specified number of times as a small winning game. .
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets commands for managing the number of prizes won to various accessories related to prizes and lotteries, and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prizes.
The output control section 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300 and the payout control section 330 .
The random number control unit 241 updates various random values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at predetermined timings.

[Basic operation of game machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko game machine 100 performs initialization and initial setting of various devices as basic processing at startup. After performing the basic processing, the game control section 200 repeatedly executes the main control processing, which is a series of processing relating to the progress of the game. Moreover, when shutting off the power, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power shut-off processes.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG.
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the game control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) (step (hereinafter, step is described as "S") 601). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S602).
When the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S602), next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the backup flag regarding the operation at the time of power shutdown is ON (S603).
When the backup flag is ON (Yes in S603), next, the game control unit 200 determines whether the checksum created at the time of power shutdown is normal (S604).
If the checksum is normal (Yes in S604), then the game control unit 200 executes return processing (S605). In this return process, the game control unit 200 sets the sub-control means such as the effect control unit 300 when returning from the power-off state. Specifically, the game control unit 200 controls the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether the jackpot game is in progress, either the high probability state or the low probability state, the time saving state and the time saving non-state). (either) is output to the effect control unit 300 to set the sub-control means. Also, in this return process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes at S602), the backup flag is OFF (No at S603), or the checksum is abnormal (No at S604), then the game control unit 200 is initialized. As processing, the stored contents of the RAM 203 are cleared (S606), and the work area of the RAM 203 is set (S607). Then, the game control unit 200 outputs a command for setting (initializing) the sub-control means to the effect control unit 300, and sets the sub-board (sub-control means) (S608). Setting the sub-board includes clearing the RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S605) ends, or after the setting of the sub board (see S608) ends, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S609). Then, the game control unit 200 allows interrupts (S610), disables interrupts (S611), designs random number control processing (S612), initial value random number update processing (S613), and determines whether or not the power shutdown flag is ON. (S614) is repeatedly executed as a loop process.
Here, interrupt permission (S610) and interrupt prohibition (S611) are provided to enable execution of interrupt processing during execution of this loop processing (S610 to S614). In this embodiment, the main control process in the game control is executed by this interrupt process. Details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S612), the game control unit 200 updates the variation pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S613), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random numbers used in game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, if the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S614), the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is not cut off, the game control unit 200, loop processing (S610 ~ S614) and main control by interrupt Execute the process repeatedly. On the other hand, if the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S614), the game control unit 200 starts processing for cutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (power cutoff processing).

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the operation of the power-off processing by the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG.
In the power-off processing, the game control unit 200 first clears the setting of the output port for performing various outputs (S701). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S702). Next, the game control unit 200 turns ON the backup flag (S703), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S704), and shifts to an infinite loop.

[Main control processing of game machine]
Next, the main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko game machine 100, instructs the effect control unit 300, which is a sub-control means, to control the effect, and issues a prize ball to the payout control unit 330. to control the payout of

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the main control process of the game control section 200. As shown in FIG.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in the game control, and is repeatedly executed every preset constant time (for example, 4 milliseconds). In this embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at predetermined intervals, and when the interrupt is permitted (see S610) in the loop processing shown in FIG. 6, the main control as the interrupt processing Execute the process. As shown in FIG. 8, in the main control process, a random number update process, a switch process, a symbol process, an electric accessory process, a winning ball process, and an output process are sequentially executed (S801 to S806).

In the random number update process (S801), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241, and updates the values of various random numbers used in game control by the game control unit 200. The details of setting the random number and updating the random value will be described later.

As the switch process (S802), a starting port switch process and a gate switch process are performed.
In the starter switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the states of the first starter switch 211 and the second starter switch 212 in FIG. When it becomes, the processing for the special symbol lottery is executed. In addition, although it will be described in detail later, when the preliminary determination processing is performed in the first start opening switch 211 and the second start opening switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235 is called. Execute processing for prior determination.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in FIG. Execute the process.
Details of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S803), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol variation control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol variation and the processing accompanying this symbol variation. do.
In the normal design process, the game control section 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal design determination section 232 and the normal design fluctuation control section 236, and executes the normal design fluctuation and the process associated with this design fluctuation.
Detailed contents of these symbol processing will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S804), the big winning opening processing and the electric tulip processing are performed.
In the big winning opening process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the big winning opening operation control unit 237, and controls the opening operation of the big winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
In the electric tulip process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238, and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123 which is a normal electric accessory based on predetermined conditions.
The detailed contents of these electric accessory processes will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S805), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239, and sets a command for controlling the number of prizes won and the payout of prize balls according to the prize.

In the output process (S806), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for effect control to the effect control unit 300, and outputs a command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. Output. The effect control command is generated in each process from S802 to S804 and stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in the RAM 203 . The payout control command is generated in the process of S<b>805 and stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in the RAM 203 . A storage area is set in the RAM 203 for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the control command storage areas of the RAM 203, and if control commands are stored in the individual storage areas (that is, control commands are generated in the processing of S802 to S805). ), the control command is read out and output to the output destination (effect control unit 300 or payout control unit 330).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, output processing is performed at the end of a series of main control processing. That is, the commands generated in each process of S802 to S805 by each function as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 in each process. After these processes, the output control unit 240 as a second processing means collectively outputs the commands generated in each process accumulated in the storage area of the RAM 203 . In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control process is executed for one cycle, the commands generated during the execution of the one cycle are output after the final command generation during the execution of the one cycle.

[Modification of Basic Operation of Gaming Machine]
In the operation examples described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, interrupts are permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and main control processing consisting of a series of processing is executed as interrupt processing. However, the main control process only needs to be configured to be repeatedly executed at fixed time intervals, and the specific implementation means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 6 to 8. FIG. For example, the main control process may be incorporated into a series of operations of the basic process, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the main control process may be returned to at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). In addition, while incorporating the main control process into the series of operations of the basic process, an interrupt is generated at regular time intervals in the same manner as the operations described with reference to FIGS. It may be configured to return to the main control process incorporated during the basic process.

When outputting a command generated by the basic processing, in principle, each time a command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203, and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called. Output. The basic process is different from the main control process related to the progress of the game, and is a special process such as an initial operation that is performed only when the power is turned on. In addition, since the basic processing may change due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, the generated commands are output promptly so that there is no omission in the output processing. processing. In the case where commands are continuously generated by a plurality of related processes, a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and collectively output according to a request for specific processing. can be

[Random Number Update Processing by Game Control Unit]
A random number as determination information used for various lotteries in game control such as a special symbol lottery is counted by a counter, and starting from a predetermined initial value, the random number update process (S801) of the main control process shown in FIG. It is incremented by 1 each time. Then, the value at the time each lottery is performed is acquired by the starting port switch process (Fig. 9) and the gate switch process (Fig. 10), and is used in the special design process (Fig. 11) and the normal design process (Fig. 16). be. This random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number reaches the set maximum random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 20(a), which will be described later), , returns to the initial value again. Also, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, there is a risk that the winning value will be estimated based on the information on the update interval and the initial value. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 6, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process of S613.

[Starting port switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the contents of the starting opening switch process in the switch process shown in S802 of FIG.
In this start opening switch process, a process for winning at the first start opening 121 and a process for winning at the second start opening 122 are sequentially performed. Referring to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 121 and the first starting port switch 211 has been turned ON (S901). When the first starting port switch 211 is turned ON, next the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unvaried pending number U1 in the winning prize of the first starting port 121 is less than the upper limit (S902). . In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is four. If the pending number U1 has reached the upper limit (No in S902), the unvaried winnings cannot be held any longer, so the processing for winnings in the first start port 121 ends.

On the other hand, when the pending number U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S902), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for determination based on this winning prize, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S903). . Here, since the first starting port 121 wins a prize, a random number value for the special symbol lottery is obtained. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated by the random number update processing in S801. Then, the random number determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the later special symbol processing. The random number here refers to the jackpot random number that determines the jackpot, small hit or loss, the type of jackpot (time saving state or no time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, high probability state and low probability state, long hit, short Pattern random number value (jackpot pattern random number value) that determines the hit), variation pattern random number value for specifying the variation pattern in the pattern variation, change pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach production described later when losing Reach random values that determine whether or not, etc. are included.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination processing (S904). The pre-determining process is a winning ball (reserved ball) for which random numbers have already been acquired by winning at the start gate, but random numbers have not yet been determined by the special symbol processing described later. This is processing for judging the random number before it is judged (pre-judgment).

And, production control section 300 of form of this execution, random number is decided by special design processing on the basis of the decision result of the random number which is decided by previous decision processing (preliminary decision result), than the decision result is notified A notice effect suggesting the determination result can be performed before the game. This advance notice effect is, for example, in response to the occurrence of a winning ball (reserved ball) for which random numbers have already been acquired by winning at the start gate but random numbers have not yet been determined by special symbol processing, and the image display unit. This is performed using a pending display effect (described later) displayed in 114, or the like. The advance notice performance based on this advance determination suggests to the player the judgment result when the random number judgment by the special symbol processing is performed after that regarding the reserved ball corresponding to the advance judgment related to the notice performance. As a result, the player can play the game while having expectations for the reserved ball. The details of the advance notice effect based on the prior determination will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations U1 (S905).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S904 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S906).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a pending number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the pending number U1 by S905 in the RAM 203 (S907), and ends the processing for winning in the first start port 121. .

Next, a process for winning a prize at the second starting port 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 9, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 122 and the second starting port switch 212 has been turned ON (S908). When the second starting port switch 212 is turned ON, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unchanged pending number U2 in the winning prize of the second starting port 122 is less than the upper limit value (S909 ). In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is four. If the pending number U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S909), the unvaried winnings cannot be held any longer, so the processing for winnings in the second start port 122 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of reservations U2 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S909), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number for the lottery based on the winning this time, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S910). . Here, since the second start port 122 wins a prize, the random number for the special symbol lottery (jackpot random number, jackpot pattern random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number, etc.) is acquired in the same manner as in the above S903. be. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated by the random number update processing in S801. Then, the random number determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the later special symbol processing.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination processing (S911). The content of this preliminary determination process is the same as that of S904 described above.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations U2 (S912).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S911 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S913).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a pending number increase command for notifying the production control unit 300 of the increase in the pending number U2 by S912 in the RAM 203 (S914), and ends the processing for winning in the second start port 122. .

[Gate switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of gate switch processing when a game ball passes through the gate 124. As shown in FIG.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned ON (S1001). If the gate switch 214 is turned ON, then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unchanged pending number G is less than the upper limit (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is four. If the pending number G has reached the upper limit value (No in S1002), the gate switch process is terminated because the unvaried winnings cannot be held any longer.

On the other hand, when the number of reservations G is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery for this winning prize, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). . Here, since the gate 124 wins a prize, a random number (such as a winning random number) for the normal symbol lottery is obtained.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number G of reservations (S1004).
After the value of the number of reservations G is added in S1004, the game control unit 200 sets the number of reservations G increase command for notifying the production control unit 300 of the increase in the number of reservations G in S1004 in the RAM 203 (S1005), The processing for the winning at the gate 124 ends.

[Special symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol processing out of the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the jackpot game flag is turned on in the flag setting (hereinafter referred to as flag setting) set in the RAM 203 ( S1101). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

When the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already hitting the jackpot, so the special symbol processing is terminated without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S1101). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1101), then the special symbol variation control section 233 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during special symbol variation (S1102). If the special symbol is not fluctuating (No in S1102), then the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 performs processing regarding the reserved numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 9) of the unvaried special symbols (S1103 to S1106). In the present embodiment, since the reservation number U1 related to the winning of the first start opening 121 and the reservation number U2 related to the winning of the second start opening 122 are distinguished, this process is also performed individually for each corresponding start opening. .

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether or not the pending number U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is 1 or more (S1103). When the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1103), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U2 (S1104). On the other hand, when the number of reservations U2=0 (No in S1103), the special symbol variation control unit 233 next determines whether the number of reservations U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 is 1 or more (S1105). When the number of reservations U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1105), the special symbol variation control section 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U1 (S1106). On the other hand, if the pending number U1=0 (No in S1105), it means that there is no winning to start the special symbol lottery, so the special symbol variation is not started, and the customer waiting setting process of another routine is performed. is executed to terminate the process (S1116).
In addition, in the present embodiment, the processing relating to the pending number U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is given priority. That is, when the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more, the process for the number of reservations U2 is performed, and when the number of reservations U2=0, the process for the number of reservations U1 is performed (see S803 to S806). On the other hand, regardless of which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 wins, it is also possible to perform control such that the pending numbers U1 and U2 are subtracted in order of winning.

After subtracting the number of reservations U1 or the number of reservations U2 in S1104 or S1106, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns OFF the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1107). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1116, see FIG. 15 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a big hit determination process and a variation pattern selection process by separate routines (S1108, S1109). Although details will be described later, this jackpot determination process and fluctuation pattern selection process set information (jackpot pattern, game state, variation patterns, etc.) are determined. In addition, these information are included in the variation start command sent to the production control unit 300 .

After that, the special symbol variation control section 233 is displayed by the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 shown in FIG. Start the variation of the special design to be (S1110). Then, a variation start command including setting information (jackpot pattern, game state, variation pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1111). The variation start command set in S1111 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

When it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating in S1102 (Yes in S1102), or after the fluctuation start command is set in S1111, the special symbol fluctuation control section 233 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1112 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbols in S1110 has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process of S1109. If the variation time has not elapsed (No in S1112), the special symbol variation is continued, and the special symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation time has passed (Yes in S1112), the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 in the jackpot determination process of S1108. It stops at the pattern decided by (S1113). A fluctuation stop command for stopping the decorative symbols, which will be described later, is set in the RAM 203 (S1114). Then, a process during stop of another routine is executed (S1115). The contents of the processing during suspension will be described later. The fluctuation stop command set in S1114 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

[Jackpot determination processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot determination process (S1108 in FIG. 11).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the jackpot random number in the special symbol lottery of this time (S1201), and determines whether or not the jackpot or small hit is made (S1202). , S1205). Whether or not a big win or a small win is made is whether or not the value of the big win random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. (See FIG. 20(a)).

If the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a big hit (Yes in S1202), then the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a big hit symbol random number value (S1203). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of jackpot (high-probability time-saving gaming state jackpot, low-probability time-saving non-gaming state jackpot, etc.) is determined. Which jackpot will be won is determined by whether the value of the jackpot pattern random number obtained in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches with which of the values preset for each type of jackpot (FIG. b) see).

After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (jackpot symbol) representing the type of the jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1204).

If the result of the random number determination of S1201 is a small hit (No in S1202, Yes in S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 is a symbol representing a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a small hit symbol) as setting information. It is set in the RAM 203 (S1206).

If the result of the random number determination in S1201 is neither a big hit nor a small hit (No in S1202 and S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 stores a symbol indicating that the lottery has been lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203. (S1207).

[Variation pattern selection processing by game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1109 in FIG. 11).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (no time saving state or time saving state, and high probability state or low probability state). (S1301). Then, using the judgment result of S1202 of the big hit judging process (FIG. 12), it is judged whether or not the special symbol lottery of this time has made a big hit (S1302). If it is a big hit (Yes in S1302), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads a variation pattern table for big wins from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1303).

On the other hand, if there is no big hit (No in S1302), then the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines a random value for determining whether or not to perform a so-called ready-to-win effect to make the player expect a big win. (S1304). Whether or not to perform the reach effect is determined by determining whether or not the value of the reach random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches a preset value (see FIG. 20(c)). .
As a result of the determination using the random number value, if the reach effect is performed (Yes in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for reach from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1306). Also, when the ready-to-win effect is not performed (No in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for losing from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance (variation time 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) and fluctuation pattern random number values is a table that associates

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 uses the variation pattern random value obtained in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 and the variation pattern table set in S1303, S1306, and S1307 to determine the variation pattern random value (S1308 ). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern according to the random value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time saving state or no time saving state, and whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether it was a big hit or not , whether or not the ready-to-win effect is to be performed when the jackpot is not achieved), etc. Since the variation pattern table referred to differs depending on the difference, the determined variation pattern differs.

Thereafter, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1308 to the RAM 203 as setting information (S1309). The setting information of the variation pattern set in S1309 is included in the variation start command set in S1111 of FIG. 11, and is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG. Details of the variation pattern selected in the present embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Stopping process by game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the contents of the in-stop process (S1115 in FIG. 11).
In this stopping process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not a flag indicating a time saving state in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (hereinafter referred to as a time saving flag) is ON (S1401). When the time saving flag is ON (Yes in S1401), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (fluctuation number) J in the time saving state (S1402), and whether or not the lottery number J becomes 0. is examined (S1403). And if the lottery frequency J=0 (Yes in S1403), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S1404). The operation to turn on the time saving flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the later-described big winning opening process (FIG. 17).

If the time saving flag is OFF (No in S1401) or after the time saving flag is turned OFF in S1404, or if the value of the lottery number J after subtracting in S1402 is not 0 (No in S1403), then game control The unit 200 checks whether a flag indicating a high-probability state (hereinafter referred to as a high-probability flag) is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1405). In addition, when both this high probability flag and the previous time saving flag are ON, it is in a high probability time saving gaming state, and when the high probability flag is ON and the time saving flag is OFF, it is in a high probability time saving non-game state. be.

When the high probability flag is ON (Yes in S1405), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of times of lottery (number of fluctuations) X in the high probability state (S1406), and whether the number of times of lottery X becomes 0 It is checked whether or not (S1407). Then, if the lottery number of times X=0 (Yes in S1407), the high probability flag is turned OFF (S1408). The operation to turn on the high probability flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number X are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the big winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

If the high-precision flag is OFF (No in S1405) or after the high-precision flag is turned OFF in S1408, or if the value of the lottery number X after subtraction in S1406 is not 0 (No in S1407), then The game control unit 200 determines whether or not the special symbol lottery of this time has won a big hit (S1409). Then, if it is a jackpot (Yes in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines the type of jackpot (S1410). In addition, here, as an example of determination of the kind of jackpot, it is determined whether or not it is a long hit.

Here, the judgment as to whether or not it is a big win can be made based on the judgment result of the big win judging process (FIG. 12). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 20(b), which will be described later, is set, the answer is Yes in S1409. If the winning design or the small winning design is set in the RAM 203 by the big hit determination process, it is No in S1409.

When the type of jackpot is long hit (Yes in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the long hit game flag (S1411). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes a big win game state (long win game state) in which the kind of big win is a long win. It should be noted that here in the long hit, it does not distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. Whether the high-probability state or the low-probability state is established is specified by turning ON the corresponding flag in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the later-described large winning opening process (FIG. 17).

If the type of jackpot is not a long hit (No in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the short hit game flag (S1412). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes a big winning gaming state (short winning gaming state) in which the kind of big winning is a short winning. As in the case of long winning, there is no distinction between high probability state and low probability state in short winning.

After turning ON the jackpot game flag in S1411 or S1412, the game control unit 200 initializes the values of the lottery times J and X (S1413). Moreover, the game control unit 200 turns off the time saving flag when the time saving flag is ON in S1401 and the lottery number J is not 0 in S1403 (S1414). Similarly, when the high probability flag is ON in S1405 and the lottery number X is not 0 in S1407, the high probability flag is turned OFF (S1414).

After initializing the lottery numbers J and X in S1413, the game control unit 200 starts an opening operation (S1417). Here, the contents of the opening operation differ depending on which of S1411 and S1412 the winning game flag is turned ON. In other words, the opening operation is set according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery.
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing an opening operation effect corresponding to the jackpot game flag in the effect control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1418), and ends the stop processing. This opening command is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of this special symbol lottery is not a big win (No in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the result of this special symbol lottery is a small win (S1415). ). If it is not a small hit (No in S1415), the stop processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is a small hit (Yes in S1415), the game control unit 200 starts a small hit game (S1416). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes the small winning game state. In addition, in the small winning game, as described above, the big winning opening 125 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the game ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

[Customer waiting setting processing by game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1116 in FIG. 11).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1501). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag that is set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, so the process is terminated (Yes in S1501). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF, the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command, sets it in the RAM 203 (S1502), and turns on the customer waiting flag (S1503). The customer waiting command set in S1502 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG. It should be noted that the customer waiting flag is set in a state in which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and there is no reservation.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal design process among the design processes shown in S803 of FIG.
In this normal design process, the normal design variation control section 236 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when winning the normal symbol lottery. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip processing (FIG. 19) described later and it is easy to win the second start port 122 (auxiliary game state).

When the auxiliary game flag is ON, it is already in the auxiliary game state and the normal design is stopped, so the normal design process is terminated without starting the normal design fluctuation (Yes in S1601). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1601), then the normal symbol variation control section 236 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during normal symbol variation (S1602). If the normal symbol is not fluctuating (No in S1602), then the normal symbol fluctuation control section 236 determines whether or not the number G of reserved normal symbols (see FIG. 10) for the non-fluctuation is 1 or more (S1603). If the number of reservations G=0 (No in S1603), it means that there is no winning for starting the lottery of normal symbols, so the process is terminated without starting the normal symbol variation.

On the other hand, when the number G of reservations is 1 or more (Yes in S1603), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations G (S1604). Then, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in the current normal symbol lottery, and determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won (S1605). Whether or not the player has won the lottery is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number acquired in S1003 of FIG. 10 matches the value set as the winning value in a table or the like shown in FIG. It is determined.

Next, the normal design variation control unit 236 normally sets the design according to the result of the normal design lottery (S1606). That is, when winning the normal symbol lottery, the symbol representing the winning (hereinafter referred to as winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol indicating that the lottery is lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal design variation control section 236 sets the normal design variation time (S1607). This variable time is set based on the time saving flag set in the processes of S1404 and S1414 in FIG. 14 and S1804 and S1807 in FIG. 18 described later. That is, if the time saving flag is ON at the time of setting in S1607, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and if the time saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). be done. After this setting, the normal symbol variation control section 236 starts the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol display device 223 shown in FIGS. 2(a) and 3 based on the setting contents of S1607 (S1608). In addition, it is also possible to determine the variation pattern of normal symbols by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 normally acquires the fluctuation pattern random number value of the symbol, and in S1607, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 normally obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value of the symbol. The variable time is set by the determination.

After starting the variation of the normal symbol in S1608, or when it is determined that the symbol is normally varying in S1602 (Yes in S1602), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the variation time has elapsed (S1609 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the normal symbol variation in S1608 has reached the variation time set in S1607. If the variation time has not passed (No in S1609), the normal symbol variation is continued, so the normal symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation time has ended (Yes in S1609), the normal symbol variation control section 236 stops the normal symbol variation on the normal symbol display 223 (S1610). Then, the normal symbol variation control section 236 determines whether or not the determination result of S1605 is winning (S1611). If it is elected (Yes in S1611), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1612). On the other hand, if the lottery is lost (No in S1611), the normal symbol processing is terminated without turning ON the auxiliary game flag.

[Large winning opening processing by game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big winning opening process in the electric accessory process shown in S804 of FIG.
In this big winning opening process, the big winning opening operation control section 237 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the big winning game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). When the jackpot game flag is OFF, there is no winning to the big winning opening 125, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1701). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is ON (Yes in S1701), then the jackpot operation control unit 237 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 100 is stopped during the processing (FIG. 14) and the opening operation control during the jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is in the middle of an operation (S1702).

If the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the process of opening (Yes in S1702), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not a preset opening operation time (opening time) has elapsed. (S1703). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the big winning opening 125 is continued, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1703). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1703), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 sets the operation of the large winning opening 125 (S1704), and initializes the number of winning prizes C (C=0). Then (S1705), 1 is added to the value of the number R of rounds for operation of the large winning opening 125 from the current value (S1706), and the operation of the large winning opening 125 is started (opened) (S1707).

In the operation setting of S1704, the operation pattern of the big winning opening 125 and the number of rounds to be operated in the operation pattern (the number of operation rounds) are set. Examples of the case where the big winning opening 125 is activated include a case of a big win or a short win in a special symbol lottery, and a case of a small win. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are variously set according to the types of these wins. In addition, in the jackpot game, it is stipulated that the operation of the jackpot 125 is continuously performed a plurality of times (a plurality of rounds). As an example, in the case of a long hit, for example, 15 rounds (15R) are operated, and one opening of 29.5 seconds is performed in one round. In the case of a short hit, for example, two rounds (2R) are operated, and one opening of 0.9 seconds is performed in one round. To explain further, it opens for 0.9 seconds, closes for 1.0 seconds, and then opens for 0.9 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, for example, the door is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 seconds, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. Here, when the operation with a short hit and the operation with a small hit are compared in the above example, both are opened twice for 0.9 seconds. In other words, the action of the big winning hole 125 seen by the player is the same in the case of a short win and the case of a small win. you can't.

In addition, it is stipulated by law that the accumulated opening time of the big winning opening 125 must be set within 1.8 seconds at the time of the small winning. On the other hand, in the case of a big win (long win or short win), the big winning opening 125 must be opened continuously a plurality of times. Therefore, when trying to make it difficult to visually distinguish between the operation of the small hit and the operation of the short hit as described above, in the small hit, within the range where the open cumulative time in one operation is within 1.8 seconds, An operation mode is set in which the big winning opening 125 is opened two or more times, and in the short winning, the same number of rounds as the number of openings of the small winning is set.

Next, the big winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1704 has elapsed (S1708). If the open state of the large winning opening 125 has not passed the opening time (No in S1708), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines that the winning number C of the large winning opening 125 is a specified number (for example, 9). pieces) or more (S1709). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winning prizes C is less than the specified number, the operation state (open state) of the large winning prize port 125 is continued, so the large winning prize port processing is terminated (No in S1709). ). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1708) or if the number of winning prizes C has reached the prescribed number (Yes in S1709), the large winning prize gate operation control unit 237 ends the operation of the big prize winning gate 125 (closes). (S1710).

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the number of rounds R for operating the large winning opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1704 (S1711). Then, if the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1711).

If the number of rounds R for the operation of the large winning opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1711), then the large winning opening operation control section 237 starts the ending operation (S1712). Here, the content of the ending action corresponds to the state of the jackpot game flag among the ending actions set in each game of the long hitting game and the short hitting game.
After that, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command for performing an effect in the ending operation corresponding to the big winning game flag in the effect control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1713). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

Next, after resetting the number of rounds R for the operation of the big winning opening 125 to 0 (S1714), the big winning opening operation control unit 237 performs the ending operation in which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is set in advance. It is determined whether or not the required time (ending time) has elapsed (S1717). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation is continued, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1717). On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (Yes in S1717), then the big winning opening operation control section 237 turns OFF the jackpot game flag after the game state setting process by the game control section 200 (S1718). The big winning opening process is ended (S1719). The contents of the game state setting process will be described later.

In S1702, when it is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening (No in S1702), then the big winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the ending is in progress (S1715). Then, if the ending is in progress (Yes at S1715), the operations after S1717 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending state (No in S1715), then the large winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the large winning opening 125 is operating (opening) (S1716). If not in operation (No in S1716), the operations from S1705 onward are executed, and if in operation (Yes in S1716), the operations from S1708 onward are executed.
It should be noted that the effect performed in the small hit game described above is the same as the effect performed in the short hit game, and it is not possible to distinguish between the short hit and the small hit from the effect.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 18 shows the contents of the game state setting process (S1718) by the game control unit 200, which is executed when the ending time has passed (Yes in S1717).
When the game state setting process is performed, as a premise, the jackpot game flag is ON in S1701 of FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the game control unit 200 first determines the type of the jackpot (S1801, S1802, S1803, S1806). These judgments can be made, for example, based on the type of symbol set in the RAM 203 as setting information in the big hit judging process (FIG. 12). In addition, since these determinations are substantially the same as S1202, S1203, and S1205 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), the determination results of S1202, S1203, and S1205 may be used.

If it is a small hit (Yes in S1801), the game state setting process is terminated because the game state is not changed.
If the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving gaming state (No in S1801, Yes in S1802 and S1803), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1804). Thereby, the setting of the game state of RAM203 will be in a low probability time-saving game state. Also, the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the lottery number J (S1805), and ends the game state setting process. The initial value of the lottery number J is 100 times in the illustrated example. Therefore, if the lottery in the low-probability time-saving gaming state is performed 100 times, the low-probability time-saving gaming state ends and the low-probability time-saving no-game state is entered.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving no-game state (No in S1801, Yes in 1802, and No in S1803), the game control unit 200 performs processing without turning on both the time-saving flag and the high-accuracy flag. finish. Therefore, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 for the game after this big hit is a low probability time saving non-game state.

If the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801 and S1802, Yes in S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1807), and sets the initial value of the lottery number J. (S1808). The initial value of the lottery number J in this case is 10000 in the illustrated example. In addition, the game control unit 200 turns on the high probability flag (S1809), and sets the initial value of the lottery number X (S1810). The initial value of the lottery number X is 10000 in the illustrated example. Thereby, the setting of the game state of RAM203 will be in a high probability time-saving game state. Then, when the lottery in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is performed 10000 times, the high-probability time-saving gaming state ends, and the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state is entered.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving no-game state (No in S1801, S1802, and S1806), the game control unit 200 turns ON only the high-probability flag (S1809), and the initial value of the lottery number X (10000 times) is set (S1810). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes the high probability time saving non-gaming state. Then, when the lottery in the high-probability time-saving no-game state is performed 10000 times, the high-probability time-saving no-game state ends and the low-probability time-saving no-game state is entered.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric tulip process in the electric accessory process shown in S804 of FIG.
In the electric tulip processing, the electric tulip operation control section 238 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF, since the electric tulip 123 is not opened, the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), then the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether or not the electric tulip 123 is in operation (S1902).

If the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S1902), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S1903), and operates the electric tulip 123 according to the set operation pattern (S1904). . Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time saving flag set in the processes of S1404, S1414 in FIG. 14, S1804, S1807 in FIG. 18, and the like. For example, if the time saving flag is OFF at the time of setting in S1903, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds is set, and if the time saving flag is ON, 1.80 seconds open An operating pattern is set to open three times in time. Thus, normally, when the time saving flag is ON (when the time saving state), the electric tulip 123 is opened multiple times for a long time, and the winning support (electric chew support) that makes it easier to win the second start port 122 is done. It should be noted that the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 in the case of the time saving flag is ON or OFF (type of auxiliary game) is prepared a plurality, normal design process (see FIG. 16) according to the type of hit determined by the operation It may be configured to set a pattern.

When it is determined in S1902 that the electric tulip 123 is in operation (Yes in S1902), or after the electric tulip 123 is operated in S1904, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines that the opening time in the set operation pattern has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1905). If the open time has not elapsed, the electric tulip 123 continues to operate (open state), so the electric tulip process is terminated (No in S1905). On the other hand, if the opening time has passed (Yes in S1905), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 turns off the auxiliary game flag and ends the electric tulip processing (S1906).

[Method of judging by random numbers]
Here, a method of determination based on random numbers performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), variation pattern selection process (FIG. 13), normal symbol process (FIG. 16), etc. will be described in detail.
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of random numbers (decision table) used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery in the present embodiment.
Fig. 20(a) shows a configuration example of the jackpot random number used in the special symbol lottery, Fig. 20(b) shows a configuration example of the jackpot random number used in the special symbol lottery, and Fig. 20(c) shows a special symbol lottery. A configuration example of reach random numbers used, and a configuration example of hit random numbers used in the normal symbol lottery are shown in FIG. 20(d).

With reference to FIG. 20(a), as a determination value of the jackpot random number, a jackpot when the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of the jackpot determination is a low probability state and a jackpot when the game state at the time of the jackpot determination is a high probability state. 2 types and a small hit are set. The range of values of random numbers (random numbers for big hits) is 300 from 0 to 299. In the case of a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) in a low probability state, only one winning value is set and the winning probability is 1/300. In addition, in the case of the special symbol lottery in the high probability state, 10 winning values are set, and the winning probability is 10/300 (=1/30). That is, in the illustrated example, if a special symbol lottery is performed by winning the starting ports 121 and 122 in a high probability state, the probability of winning is ten times higher than when the special symbol lottery is performed in a low probability state. In addition, the winning value of the small win is set to three regardless of whether it is in a low probability state or a high probability state, and the winning probability is 3/300 (=1/100).
Here, a special symbol lottery in a low-probability state will be described as an example. It is determined whether or not the winning value of the jackpot lottery in the low-probability state in (a) matches "5". Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery in the high probability state and the special symbol lottery for the small hit.

Referring to FIG. 20(b), five types of jackpot symbols are prepared: low-probability symbol A, low-probability symbol B, high-probability symbol A, high-probability symbol B, and latent probability symbol. Here, the low-probability pattern A and the low-probability pattern B are patterns representing a low-probability state jackpot, among which the low-probability pattern A is a long hit (8 rounds) and a low-probability time-saving game state jackpot. indicates that there is The low-probability symbol B indicates that it is a long hit (4 rounds) and a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving game state. The high-probability pattern A and the high-probability pattern B indicate a long hit (15 rounds) and a high-probability time-saving game state jackpot. The high-probability symbol C and the high-probability symbol D indicate a long hit (8 rounds) and a high-probability time-saving game state jackpot. The high-probability symbol E indicates that it is a short hit (2 rounds) and a high-probability time-saving no-game state jackpot. The latent certainty pattern is a pattern representing a short hit (two rounds) and a high probability short time non-playing state jackpot. Therefore, the high-probability pattern B and the latent-probability pattern have the same game state after the jackpot game, but the latent-probability pattern is a condition for carrying out a latent performance that does not clearly notify the player of the high-probability state. Therefore, it is provided separately from the high probability pattern B. The range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249. In addition, in the jackpot symbol random number, a winning value is set for each of the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 that trigger the special symbol lottery.

In the low-probability symbol A, 35 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 . Therefore, the probability of winning the low-probability symbol A when winning the jackpot is 35/250 (=7/50).
In the low-probability symbol B, 15 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 . Therefore, the probability of winning the low-probability symbol B when winning the jackpot is 15/250 (=3/50).

In the high-probability pattern A, 20 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol A is 20/250 (=2/25) when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, 150 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol A is 150/250 (=15/25) when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122.例文帳に追加

In the high-probability pattern B, five values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol B when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 5/250 (=1/50).
On the other hand, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning the second starting gate 122 . Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol B when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 25/250 (=1/10).

In the high-probability symbol C, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol C is 25/250 (=1/10) when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol B when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 10/250 (=1/25).

In the high-probability pattern D, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol D when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 25/250 (=1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol D when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 10/250 (=1/25).

In the high-probability pattern E, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol E when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 25/250 (=1/10).
On the other hand, five values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol E when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 5/250 (=1/50).

In the latent probability pattern, 100 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, the probability of winning the latent probability symbol in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 100/250 (=2/5).
On the other hand, the second starting port 122 is not assigned a winning value in the latent certainty pattern, and when the second starting port 122 wins, the winning in the latent certainty pattern does not occur.

Here, taking the low-probability symbol A as an example, the jackpot symbol random number value (see S903 and S910) acquired with the opportunity of winning the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is shown in FIG. ), it is determined whether the winning value of the low-probability symbol A matches “0 to 34”. Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery such as the low-probability symbol B.

As described above, by differentiating the winning probabilities of the types of jackpots in the case of winning the first starting hole 121 and the winning of the second starting hole 122, various game characteristics can be provided. In addition, the arrangement of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 on the game board 110 is devised so that either one of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 can be aimed easily in a specific state (mode). , it is possible to encourage players to actively participate in games.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment is capable of setting a set value which is a stage of the degree of advantage of the game. In the pachinko game machine 100, the set value can be set to any of six levels, for example, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5" and "6".
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is the lowest when the set value is set to "1". For example, when the set value is "1" and the probability is low, the winning probability is 1/300. Also, when the set value is "1" and the state is high probability, the winning probability is 10/300.
Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is the highest when the set value is set to "6". For example, when the set value is "6" and the game is in the low-probability gaming state, the winning probability is 1/285. Also, when the set value is "6" and the state is high probability, the winning probability is 10/285.
In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is set to increase in the order of the set value "1"<"2"<"3"<"4"<"5"<"6".

Next, determination of reach random numbers will be described. In addition, the reach random number is set according to the number of reservations as described later. Here, as an example, the reach random number when the pending number is 0 will be described.
With reference to FIG. 20 (c), the range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249, and the variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach effect (for example, 13.5 seconds or more) lottery result ( 22 random numbers are assigned to "with reach", and 228 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (without reach) that does not make the ready-to-win effect a viable variation pattern (for example, less than 13.5 seconds). That is, in the illustrated example, if the special symbol lottery does not win big, the ready-to-win effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (=11/125). Here, the ready-to-win effect is a effect performed in the image display section 114 when special symbols are changed. Hereinafter, the production at the time of the special pattern fluctuation that does not make the reach production a variable pattern that can be executed is called a production without reach, and the production at the time of the special pattern fluctuation that makes the reach production a variation pattern that can be executed in response to this is a production with reach. call.

Here, if the reach is explained as an example, the reach random number (see S903, S910) acquired with the opportunity of winning the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is the reach in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value "0 to 21". Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery without reach.

In many cases, at the time of special symbol fluctuation, the display control of the first special symbol indicator 221 and the second special symbol indicator 222 (hereinafter referred to as special symbol indicators 221 and 222 when not distinguished) is interlocked. , the image display unit 114 performs an effect using decorative patterns. The decorative pattern is formed by displaying three lines of patterns each consisting of a series of numerals 1 to 9, for example, written in succession in the vertical direction. Then, at the same time when the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol displays 221 and 222 is started, the decorative symbols displayed on the image display section 114 start scrolling. Further, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the special symbols (start of scrolling of the decorative symbols), the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. In general, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the same three numbers are arranged in a horizontal or oblique straight line in the stationary display of the decorative symbols. The effect using the decorative design that is performed along with the variable display of this special design is called a variable effect.

In the ready-to-win production, the following operations are performed with respect to decorative symbols as a variable production. First, any two patterns (sequences) are temporarily stopped before the decorative patterns scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction are fixed and stopped. At this time, the same numbers are temporarily stopped on a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. To explain further, if the decorative symbols are scrolled in the vertical direction, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in one row in the horizontal direction.
Next, the scroll speed for the last line is gradually slowed down, giving the player a sense of anticipation that three identical numbers will line up on a straight line. After the last row is temporarily stopped, the three symbols are fixed and stopped.
Here, in the ready-to-win effect, there are cases where the SP ready-to-win effect or the SP/SP ready-to-win effect is performed before the three symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, the SP reach effect is generally called super reach or special reach, and is a production that makes you expect a bigger hit than reach, and is a moving image production in which various characters appear and a story develops. . In addition, SP and SP reach are generally called super super reach and special special reach, and are effects that make you expect a bigger hit than SP reach, and animation images in which various characters appear and stories develop. It is a production of
Further, as shown in FIG. 21, which will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the variation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), SP ready-to-win or SP/SP ready-to-win effects are set to be executed. . It should be noted that the above-mentioned variable production that is performed together with the ready-to-win production is also referred to as a ready-to-reach variable production.
On the other hand, in the non-reach production, until the decorative pattern that scrolls in the vertical (horizontal) direction is fixed and stopped, the production that gives the player a sense of expectation, such as the production with reach, is not performed. The symbols are determined and stopped in a state where the same numbers are not aligned on a diagonal straight line.

In this way, when the judgment result of the hit random number is a loss, the image display unit 114 performs a ready-to-win effect as a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect can be executed, or the ready-to-win effect can be executed. It is determined whether to perform a no-reach production that does not use a variation pattern. In addition, the ready-to-win random number changes the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect according to the number of reservations, thereby enabling efficient game progress and giving the player a moderate sense of expectation.
In addition, when a jackpot is won, a reach effect is performed, and finally, the decorative patterns are determined and stopped in a state where the same numbers are aligned on a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. can be done. On the other hand, in the ready-to-win effect in the case of winning a small win or losing, the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped in a state where the same numbers are not aligned on the straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the normal symbol lottery will be described.
Referring to FIG. 20 (d), the range of random number values is 10 from 0 to 9, one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is OFF, and the winning value when the time saving flag is ON Nine values are assigned. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed in the absence of time-saving state, the game is won with a probability of 1/10. On the other hand, if a game ball passes through the gate 124 in the time-saving state and a normal symbol lottery is performed, the player wins with a probability of 9/10.

Here, taking the time saving flag OFF as an example, the hit random value (see S1003) acquired with the passage of the game ball through the gate 124, the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is shown in FIG. It is determined whether it matches with "0" which is the winning value of the time saving flag OFF in d). Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the normal symbol lottery with the time saving flag ON.

In addition, although not particularly shown, it is possible to set a plurality of wins with different contents of the auxiliary game (opening pattern of the electric tulip 123) performed when a win is determined in the normal symbol lottery. In this case, for example, like the jackpot pattern random number (see FIG. 17(b)) specifying the type of jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the winning pattern random number for specifying the type of win in the normal symbol lottery is set. Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number of the winning random number and the random number of the winning symbol random number in the gate switch process (see FIG. 10) by the random number acquisition unit 231, and the normal symbol determination unit 232 acquires the random number of the winning symbol random number. Determine the type of win based on random numbers.
It should be noted that the range of random numbers, the percentage of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration examples of random numbers in FIG. 20 are merely examples, and are not limited to the illustrated values.

[Setting example of fluctuation pattern]
Next, a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a setting example of variation patterns and tables used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. In addition, FIG. 21 shows a setting example of the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state. Although illustration is omitted, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is separately provided for other game states such as the high probability time saving gaming state.
In addition, FIG. 21 shows a setting example when a game ball has entered the first starting port 121. As shown in FIG. Regarding the case where the game ball wins in the second start port 122, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process may be provided separately, or the game ball wins in the first start port 121. A table to be referred to in each case may be shared and referred to.

As shown in FIG. 21, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on the big winning symbol and the variation pattern random number when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big win (Yes in S1302 of FIG. 13). . Specifically, in the special symbol variation control unit 233, the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. determine the variation pattern based on whether For example, when the jackpot design is "high probability design A" and the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 69" allocated to "high probability design A" in FIG. Therefore, "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. In addition, the special symbol variation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

In addition, the special symbol variation control unit 233, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is lost (No in S1302 of FIG. 13), the number of reservations U1 of the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number determine the variation pattern. Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233, when the pending number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "0", the reach random number (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number by the random number acquisition unit 231 , determines whether it is assigned to the reach random number range "0 to 21" assigned to the pending number "0" of "missing" in FIG. 21 or to the reach random number range "22 to 249". Then, when the obtained reach random number is included in the reach random number range “0 to 21”, the variation pattern random number (see S903) obtained together with the jackpot random number by the random number obtaining unit 231 is the reach random number range “0 to 21”, the variation pattern is determined based on which of the variation pattern random values assigned to “21” matches. For example, when the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 89", so "PR4" is selected as the variation pattern.

As described above, the game control unit 200 controls the variation pattern random number value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired when the game ball enters the starting holes 121 and 122, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the reach A variation pattern of special symbols is determined based on conditions such as the presence or absence of performance and the number of reservations. Information on the determined special symbol variation pattern is included in the variation start command and sent from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300 . In the effect control unit 300, as will be described later, as the effect at the time of the special symbol variation, the effect corresponding to the variation time specified based on the information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command (executable in the variation time) is produced. is selected and executed.

[Configuration of RAM of game control unit and RAM of effect control unit for performing advance notice effect based on prior determination]
Next, the configurations of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the effect control unit 300 in the present embodiment for executing the notice effect based on the prior determination will be described.
FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) of the game control section 200 according to this embodiment. 22(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area 204, and FIG. 22(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 22(a).

As shown in FIG. 22(a), the RAM 203 has a storage area 204 as a special symbol holding storage area for storing the jackpot random numbers obtained by the jackpot random number lottery. This storage area 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum value of the number of reservations of the first start port 121 and the number of reservations of the second start port 122 (when the upper limit of each number of reservations is 4) . Specifically, the storage area 204 includes a first storage unit 204a, a second storage unit 204b, a third storage unit 204c, a fourth storage unit 204d, a fifth storage unit 204e, a sixth storage unit 204f, and a seventh storage. It has a section 204g and an eighth storage section 204h.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22(b), each of these storage units 204a to 204h is an area for storing information indicating whether the starting gate (first starting gate 121 or second starting gate 122) has won a prize. , an area for storing the acquired jackpot random numbers, an area for storing the pattern random numbers, an area for storing the reach random numbers, and an area for storing the variation pattern random numbers. That is, each of the storage units 204a to 204h stores a jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number.

Here, each random number is stored in order from the first storage unit 204a. More specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the obtained random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Further, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the obtained random numbers are stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3) of the effect control section 300 according to this embodiment. FIG. 23(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of reserved storage areas 305 and 306, and FIG. 23(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 23(a).
As shown in FIG. 23(a), the RAM 303 has a first reservation storage area 305 and a second reservation storage area 306 as reservation status storage areas for storing the status of the reservation ball. The first reservation storage area 305 and the second reservation storage area 306 correspond to the reservation of the winning to the first start opening 121 and the reservation of the winning to the second opening opening 122, respectively, and each store four storage units. have. Specifically, the first reserved storage area 305 has a first storage section 305a, a second storage section 305b, a third storage section 305c, and a fourth storage section 305d. The second reserved storage area 306 has a first storage section 306a, a second storage section 306b, a third storage section 306c, and a fourth storage section 306d.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(b), each of these storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d includes a hold flag storage area for turning ON/OFF the hold flag and a notification flag storage area for turning ON/OFF the notification flag. and a region. The reserve flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of a reserve ball for each of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d. That is, for example, when the number of pending prizes to the first starting port 121 is 3, the pending flags are turned ON in the three pending flag storage areas of the first to third storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform the notice effect based on the preliminary determination result for each reserved ball. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform the advance notice effect based on the result of prior determination according to the game state and effect situation. Therefore, the notification flag is turned ON when the announcement effect is performed, and the notification flag is turned OFF when the announcement effect is not performed. For example, when the notice effect is performed for the third held ball out of the three held balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage section 305c.

Although not shown, the RAM 203 has an area (hereinafter referred to as a prior determination information storage area) in which prior determination information is stored, in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 22(a). The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) based on the above random numbers. The content of the prior determination information is the same as the information obtained as various determination results in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 11), and specifically, whether or not the big hit (and whether or not the small hit), the big hit In the case of , it is information for indicating the type of the jackpot, whether the variation pattern (variation time) is a length capable of executing the ready-to-win effect, and the contents of the variation pattern. The pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination information storage area is stored together with information (hereinafter referred to as retention information) related to the hold corresponding to the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination process has been performed, or independently of this hold information. At the timing, it is included in the pre-determination result command and sent from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300. - 特許庁

[Pre-judgment processing]
Next, the advance determination processing (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) will be described in detail.
In the pre-determination process in the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs pre-determination as follows using a random number table similar to the random number configuration example described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21 .

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the details of the preliminary determination processing (S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) according to this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 24, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game state is a high probability state (S2401), and when it determines that it is a high probability state (Yes in S2401), A table is selected, and a jackpot random number and a jackpot pattern random number are pre-determined (S2402). On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2401, a table for low probability state is selected, and a jackpot random number and a jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined (S2403).

After the prior determination of the jackpot random number and the jackpot pattern random number of S2402 or S2403, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (S2404), and determines that it is the time saving state (Yes in S2404), The table for the time saving state is selected, and the reach random number is pre-determined (S2405). Furthermore, the table for time saving state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2406).
On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2404, the table for time saving non-state is selected, and the reach random number is determined in advance (S2407). Furthermore, the table for time saving no state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is determined in advance (S2408).

Thereafter, the game control unit 200, the result of the prior determination of the jackpot random number obtained as described above, the result of the prior determination of the jackpot pattern random number, the result of the prior determination of the reach random number, and the result of the prior determination of the variation pattern, It is stored in the advance judgment information storage area as advance judgment information (S2409). Furthermore, in order to transmit the preliminary determination information to the effect control section 300, the preliminary determination result command including the preliminary determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S2410).

Here, the above-mentioned preliminary determination is based on the random number value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122, and the determination table (see FIG. 20) used in the big hit determination process. ) and a decision table having the same structure as the one shown in FIG. That is, the judgment itself after selecting the judgment table to be used is the same as the judgment in the big win judgment process (see S1201 in FIG. 12). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the subroutine (see S1108 of FIG. 11 and FIG. 12) of the jackpot determination process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called to determine the random number in the prior determination.

With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, there is no need to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining random numbers in addition to the jackpot determination process in order to determine random numbers in the preliminary determination process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions and suppress an increase in the size of the program relating to the jackpot determination process and the advance determination process. Further, as described above, when the determination table used for the preliminary determination has the same configuration as the determination table used for the big win determination, the determination table used for the big win determination may also be used for the preliminary determination.

In addition, here only the prior determination (whether it is a big hit or not) on the special symbol lottery was described, but in the present embodiment, the variation pattern when performing the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol is also read ahead (preliminary determination). I do. The selection of the variation pattern in the special symbol lottery is a random number for variation pattern selection (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122 and the variation pattern table (FIG. 21 (see S1109 of FIG. 11 and FIG. 13). Therefore, even in the look-ahead of the variation pattern, using the random number value for selecting the variation pattern acquired at the time of winning and the look-ahead table of the same configuration as the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol process, it is selected. Fluctuation patterns can be read ahead.

In this case, in order to foresee the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process, the subroutine of the variation pattern selection process (see S1109 of FIG. 11 and FIG. 13) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called and used. be able to. Moreover, regarding the look-ahead table used for the look-ahead of the variation pattern selection, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol processing may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions related to prefetching of variation pattern selection and suppress an increase in program size.

It should be noted that, if the pre-determination process and the jackpot determination process at the time of special symbol variation are performed in the same subroutine using the same determination table group, the execution time of each process is different, so the pre-determination result and the special symbol variation There may be a case where the judgment result by the big hit judging process of (1) is different. That is, it is a case where the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, or whether it is a time saving state or a time saving no state) changes before the start of the special symbol variation after the execution of the preliminary determination process. In this case, since different types of determination tables are used according to the gaming state, the specific determination table used for determination differs between when the preliminary determination process is executed and when the big win determination process is executed. . Therefore, even if the same random number obtained at the time of winning to the starting ports 121 and 122 is used, the preliminary determination result and the determination result of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such a case, in the production control unit 300, after the execution of the preliminary determination process, if the game state changes before the start of the special symbol variation, the production based on the preliminary determination result is not executed (prohibition) control, etc. can be done.

In addition, according to the command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 as described above, the effect control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, the frame lamp 157, and the like. For example, when the effect control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of the door opening error, the effect control unit 300 displays a message such as "Please call a staff member" or an image indicating an abnormal state to the image display unit. 114 to display. In addition, the effect control unit 300 causes the speaker 156 to output an alarm or the like indicating an abnormal state, and restricts the output of music, voice, sound effects, and the like. Moreover, the production|presentation control part 300 lights the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 in red, for example as a mode which shows an abnormal state.

In addition, here, it was explained that the effect control unit 300 uses all of the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 to notify that an error has occurred. A mode using a part may be used. Also, the mode of notification may be switched according to the content of the error. For example, when a door open error occurs, all of the image display unit 114, board lamp 116, speaker 156, and frame lamp 157 may be used as described above. Also, when a payout error occurs, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 notify that the error has occurred. This makes it possible for a game parlor (pachinko hall) clerk or the like to easily determine the degree of urgency of an error that has occurred in a game machine.

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, the operation of the effect control section 300 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the operation of the effect control section 300. As shown in FIG.
The operation of the effect control section 300 consists of main processing shown in FIG. 25(a) and interrupt processing shown in FIG. 25(b). Referring to FIG. 25(a), the effect control unit 300 performs initial setting at the time of activation (S2501), and after performing cycle setting of CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) (S2502), according to the set cycle. , While updating the random number used in the effect control (S2503), interrupt processing is accepted.

Interrupt processing is performed periodically according to the cycle set in S2502. Referring to FIG. 25(b), in this interrupt process, the effect control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs command reception processing (S2511). In this command reception process, the effect contents (effect pattern) are selected. In addition, the effect control unit 300 performs effect button processing for accepting the player's operation of the effect button 161 or the like (S2512). Thereafter, the effect control section 300 performs command transmission processing for transmitting a command including information on the selected effect pattern to the image/sound control section 310 and the lamp control section 320 (S2513). As a result, effects such as image display and sound output on the image display unit 114, movement of the movable accessory 115, and light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 are performed.

[Command reception processing by effect control unit]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command reception process (S2511 in FIG. 25(b)).
In this command reception process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the pre-determination result command and the pending number increase command have been received (S2601). It should be noted that the pre-determined result command and the pending number increase command are set in the starting opening switch process shown in FIG. ) is a command transmitted to the effect control unit 300.
Then, when the effect control unit 300 determines that the pre-determination result command and the pending number increase command are received (Yes in S2601), 1 is added to the pending number value held in the RAM 303 (S2602). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 performs a pre-determination effect selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the reservation number increase command (S2603). The details of the pre-determination effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not the pre-determination result command and the pending number increase command (No in S2601), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the received command is the variation start command (S2604). This variation start command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 in the game control unit 200 (S1111) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
If the received command is the variation start command (Yes in S2604), the effect control unit 300 executes effect selection processing (S2605). In addition, when the fluctuation start command is received, a random number value for effect control used in the effect selection process is acquired. This random value is a random value that is periodically updated in S2503 of the main processing shown in FIG. 25(a). Details of the effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not the pre-determination result command, the hold number increase command and the variation start command (No in S2601 and S2604), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the received command is the variation stop command (S2606). This fluctuation stop command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 in the game control unit 200 (S1114) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing shown in FIG. 8 (S806).
When the received command is the fluctuation stop command (Yes in S2606), the effect control section 300 executes the process during the end of the fluctuation effect (S2607). In addition, in the processing during the end of the fluctuation production, the production control unit 300 analyzes the received fluctuation stop command, and sets the fluctuation production end command for instructing the end of the production of the pattern fluctuation in the RAM303.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a pending number increase command, a variation start command and a variation stop command (No in S2601, S2604 and S2606), the effect control unit 300 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game with the received command It is determined whether or not it is an opening command for opening (S2608). This opening command is a command that is set in the stopped process shown in FIG. 14 (S1418) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is an opening command (Yes in S2608), the effect control unit 300 executes a jackpot effect selection process (S2609). Details of the jackpot effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, a variation start command, a variation stop command and an opening command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606 and S2608), the effect control unit 300 determines that the received command is a jackpot game (S2610). This ending command is a command that is set in the big winning opening process shown in FIG. 17 (S1713) and transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
If the received command is an ending command (Yes at S2610), the effect control unit 300 executes ending effect selection processing (S2611). Details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a pending number increase command, a variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command and an ending command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, S2608 and S2610), then the effect control unit 300 , a customer waiting command reception process for shifting the received command to the customer waiting state is executed (S2612). Details of the customer waiting command reception process will be described later.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the contents of the preliminary determination effect selection process (S2603) and the effect selection process (S2605) of FIG.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S2801). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the pending number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S2802). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects the effect pattern (predetermined effect pattern) used in the predetermined effect based on the predetermination result command and the pending number increase command (S2803).

Here, as the pre-judgment performance pattern, various performance patterns can be provided that give advance notice of the random number determination result by the special symbol processing before the start of the variation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. For example, an effect such as a pending display effect or a continuous advance notice effect can be provided as a pre-determination effect pattern. In this embodiment, when a reserved ball is generated, a display representing the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218 and the second special symbol reservation display 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 2). At the same time, the image display unit 114 performs a hold display suggesting the occurrence of a hold or the number of holds (hold display effect). Therefore, in this holding display effect, by reflecting the preliminary judgment result in the display mode etc. of the holding display, the judgment result when the random number judgment by the special symbol processing is performed after that concerning the holding ball is sent to the player. It can be a pre-judgment production to suggest.

In addition, although the case where the pending display effect is used as a pre-determination effect is explained here, by reflecting it in the contents of various effects performed before the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result of the random number by the special symbol processing, various notice effects It becomes possible to do For example, production using the production image displayed on the image display unit 114, production by light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, production by the movement of movable accessories, production by sound output such as music and sound effects, etc. It can be set as a judgment production pattern.

In addition, the pre-determination effect is executed along with the symbol variation for the other winning balls performed prior to the symbol variation for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination has been performed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of holding balls is four per starting port (first starting port 121 or second starting port 122) (see FIG. 9). Moreover, priority is given to digestion of the ball held in the second starting port 122 . In this case, for example, if the preliminary determination is made for the held ball with the second starting port 122, before the pattern fluctuation for the held ball is performed, including the fluctuation currently fluctuating (referred to as the fluctuation), Symbol variation is performed for a maximum of four winning balls. In the notice effect related to the reserved ball that has been pre-determined, if multiple pattern changes are performed before the pattern change is performed for the reserved ball, the notice effect that spans the multiple pattern changes (continuous notice effect ).

Then, the effect control unit 300 sets the pending number command including the value of the added pending number and the information of the pre-determined effect pattern selected in the pre-determined effect selection process to the RAM 303 (S2804). In order to notify the CPU 311 of the image/sound control unit 310 of the selected pre-determined effect pattern, the number-of-holds command includes information indicating the pattern. By receiving the pending number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for causing the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected pre-determined effect pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data for representing the selected pre-determination effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and expresses the pre-determination effect using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156. .

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received variation start command (S2811). Also, 1 is subtracted from the number of reservations held in the RAM 303 (S2812). Then, the effect control unit 300 displays on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (information such as the type of jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game, and the fluctuation pattern) obtained from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command. A variation production pattern for symbol variation by image is selected (S2813).

Finally, the production control unit 300 sets a variable production start command for instructing the execution start of the selected production in the RAM303 (S2814). The variable effect start command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected variable effect pattern. When the CPU 311 receives the variable effect start command, the VDP 314 draws images and sounds corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern, and creates a display list or the like for output processing. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads out image data and sound data for representing the selected variable effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and expresses the variable effect using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the process of selecting a variation performance pattern for symbol variation in S2813, a variation performance pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. Based on the variable effect pattern determined here, the variable display of decorative symbols, the background effect, the advance notice effect, etc. are determined. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols is effect display performed by the image display unit 114 along with the variable display of the special symbols performed by the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222 . In the variable display of the decorative symbols, a ready-to-win effect or the like is executed. It should be noted that, unlike the present embodiment, when a plurality of variation production patterns are set for the variation pattern, the production random number (one of the random numbers updated in S2503 of FIG. 25 (a) , Acquire production random value when receiving fluctuation start command) may be used to select a fluctuation production pattern by lottery.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process (S2609) in FIG.
In this jackpot effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of the jackpot pattern) (S3001), and selects a pattern of effect (jackpot effect pattern) (S3002). . Then, the effect control unit 300 reads out the image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected big win effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the big win effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, The jackpot effect selection process is terminated (S3003). As a result, the effect during the big hit is determined. It should be noted that in the selection of the jackpot effect pattern (S3002), determination may be made based on a random number obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the content of the ending effect selection process (S2611) of FIG.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information on the type of jackpot symbol) (S3101), and selects a pattern of effect (ending effect pattern) (S3102). . Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and the sound data used for the effect by the selected ending effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the ending effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, Ending effect selection processing is terminated (S3103). It should be noted that in the selection of the ending effect pattern (S3102), determination may be made based on a random number obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process (S2612) of FIG.
The effect control unit 300 determines whether or not a customer waiting command for shifting to a customer waiting state has been received (S3201). When the customer waiting command is received (Yes in S3201), the effect control section 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S3202), and turns ON the measurement flag in the RAM 303 (S3203). On the other hand, if the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S3201), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 is ON (S3204). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S3204), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated.

When the measurement flag is ON (after turning ON in Yes or S3203 in S3204), the production control unit 300 next determines whether the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (for example, 10 seconds). is determined (S3205). If the time has not expired (No in S3205), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time is up (Yes in S3205), the effect control unit 300 turns off the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 (S3206), and transmits a customer waiting effect command for performing a customer waiting effect (demonstration effect) to the RAM 303. is set to end the customer waiting command reception process (S3207).

When the command receiving process is completed as described above, any one of a variable performance start command, a variable performance end command, a big hit performance start command, an ending performance start command, and a customer waiting performance command is set in the RAM 303. - 特許庁

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the content of the effect button processing (S2512 in FIG. 25(b)).
In this effect button processing, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the operating means such as the effect button 161 is operated by the player during a predetermined acceptance period (effective period) (S3301). Here, the operation of the operating means includes pressing the effect button 161 to turn it on, and pressing the center key or the peripheral key of the effect key 162 to turn it on. In addition, when an operating device other than the effect button 161 and the effect key 162, such as a touch panel, is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100, this includes detecting the operation of the device. The effect control unit 300 receives operation signals from the controllers of these devices and detects that an operation has been performed.

If the operation means such as the production button 161 is operated (Yes in S3301), the production control unit 300 sets the production button command including the information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM 303, and ends the production button processing. (S3302).

After that, the effect control unit 300 performs the command transmission process (S2513) in FIG. Send to the control unit 320 . Based on the received command, the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 display an image on the image display unit 114, output sound, operate the movable accessory 115, emit light from the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like. to execute the set production.

[Information displayed on the information display in each game section]
Next, the information displayed on the information display 230 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. In the display information table of FIG. 32, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of outs during normal, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 230 are associated with each other.
Here, the first game section shown in FIG. 32 starts when the power is turned on for the first time. In addition, the setting of 60,000 total outs is a value that can approximately cover the daily operation of a pachinko game machine that fires 100 shots per minute. For the normal medium base value, the numeric segment is always displayed with two digits. Further, when the number of outs during normal is "0" and when the base value during normal is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the numerical segment.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 230 includes "bL." indicating that it is the normal base value of the current game section, and " "b1.", "b2." indicating the normal base value of the game interval two times before, and "b3." indicating the normal base value of the game interval three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 230 includes "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that there is, "01" to "99" indicating that the number of outs during normal is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and the normal base value is greater than or equal to "100". When the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The numerical value information displayed in the numerical segment does not change in display mode (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal operation, but the identification information displayed in the identification segment does not change. The display mode changes (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of outs during normal operation (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game intervals, when the identification information of the game interval for which there is no calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is blinked. In addition, in the game section after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will blink. Otherwise, the identification information is illuminated.

Here, to give an example of the display of the information display 230, the section counter value is "1", the number of outs during normal operation is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 230 blinks "bL." ” will be lit up.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information not using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of "00" to "99" is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value If the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." .

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01" etc.), so 2 as a numerical segment An easy-to-understand display can be achieved by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

In addition, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of outs during normal of the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient to calculate the normal base value. , the identification information “bL.” displayed in the identification segment blinks, making it easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

Also, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "--" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that there is no

Instead of executing the game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process as information programs, one or two of them are executed as game programs (for example, game ball counting process). The processing may be executed within the input control processing which monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the remainder may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 230 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process, which is a game program.

In addition, the game balls that have entered the normal winning opening 126, the first starting opening 121, the second starting opening 122, and the big winning opening 125 by the out ball detection switch 227, and the out balls that have flowed into the discharge opening 117. Instead of detecting the out ball detection switch 227, only the game ball that has flowed into the out port may be detected. In that case, the out number (total out number , the number of outs during normal play) should be incremented by one.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the image/sound control unit 310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing main processing of the image/sound control unit 310 . This main processing is performed by inputting to the CPU 311 a system reset that occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from a power supply board (not shown).

First, the CPU 311 prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initialization processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initial setting such as internal register setting, access permission to RAM 313, initialization of all RAM areas of RAM 313 (0 clear), CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupt Start-up etc. are performed, and all interrupts are permitted in step T3.

In step T4, the CPU 311 performs adjustment mode switching processing. Specifically, the sound volume (value) of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 and the light amount (value) of the backlight of the image display unit 114 are controlled by referring to an input signal from a changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by the game clerk. ), and adjustment mode related to volume and light intensity adjustment (whether volume adjustment is possible, light intensity adjustment is possible, initial value of volume value (any of 0 to 5) and initial value of light intensity value (0 to 5 Either), processing for switching the volume value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5) or the light amount value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)).

Here, the changeover switch (not shown) is provided on the game control board as the main board, and the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 and the display device (image display section 114, sub display device (image display section 114 and A display device that separately displays images related to effects)) and various lighting devices (frame lamp 157, board lamp 116).
Note that setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch (not shown) can always be performed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power ON state (after the image/sound control unit 310 is activated). It has become.

The CPU 311 performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the detection switch that detects the operation of the effect key 162 operable by the player. Perform processing to adjust (value).

The CPU 311 performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, based on the detection signal (lower button detection signal, upper button detection signal) from the detection switch that detects the operation of the effect key 162 that the player can operate, the amount of light of the backlight of the image display unit 114 ( value).

In addition, the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the production key 162 is regulated (restricted) at the start of the variable production and at the end of the variable production (stop of the decorative pattern 41). . In addition, during the period from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on until the progress control of the game is started (specifically, during the setting change mode, during the RAM clear preparation mode, during the setting confirmation mode, various driving sources Until the timer interrupt is started on the game control board during initial operation, etc.), important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery) that should be notified with priority over plate full errors and payout abnormalities , illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error) are controlled (restricted) even during notification (output of notification sound).

In addition, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds (BGM) output from the speaker 156 etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound is terminated, the volume of various effect sounds is returned to the volume before the decrease.

The CPU 311 performs eco mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, it performs processing for controlling the start and end of the eco mode in which the amount of light of the backlight of the image display unit 114 is reduced to suppress power consumption.

In step T8, the CPU 311 determines whether or not an effect instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 300 has been received. If the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11, and if the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

The CPU 311 performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, an animation pattern is determined from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 .

The CPU 311 performs sound pattern setting processing in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and setting it in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 is performed.

In step T11, the CPU 311 determines whether or not a frame switching flag is set in the RAM 313 to indicate that it is time to update the image displayed on the image display unit 114. FIG. If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is set every time the image/sound control unit 310 receives a V blank signal that is transmitted from the VDP 314 every 1/30 second (the time at which rendering and display of the effect image for one frame is scheduled to be completed). is set by the V blank interrupt processing which is executed at the beginning. Therefore, the processing of steps T12 to T15 described below is executed each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed (frame update timing).

The CPU 311 clears the frame switching flag set in the RAM 313 in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, referring to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter updated by the V-blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9. , the sound scene address is updated based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The CPU 311 performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, this display list is output to the VDP 314, and processing for instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the VDP 314 draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer on the image display unit 114 . will be done. In other words, the frame update timing coincides with the start timing and end timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as pending display, variable effect, big hit notice effect, and look-ahead effect) performed by the image display unit 114. . Note that the performance directly controlled by the performance control unit 300 and the lamp control unit 320 (the performance operation of the movable accessory 115) may or may not match the frame update timing.

The CPU 311 performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process of generating a voice control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputting this voice control command to the image/sound control unit 310 is performed.

As a result, the image/sound control unit 310 performs processing for outputting various effects and notification sounds from the speaker 156 based on the voice control command. When this process ends, the process moves to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the variable production and at the end of the variable production (stop of the decorative pattern 41), it is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light with a changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by the game clerk. Volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the operable effect keys 162 are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During notification (output of notification sound) of door open error), volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible with a changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by the game clerk, but volume adjustment is possible with the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player. and light amount adjustment are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light amount adjustment on the game parlor side while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light amount does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds (BGM) output from the speaker 156 etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound is terminated, the volume of various effect sounds is returned to the volume before the decrease. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing an abnormality notification sound due to various effects sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

During the notification of the abnormality (the output of the notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the sound volume value and the light intensity value by the effect key 162 that the player can operate may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the sound volume value and the light intensity value may be disabled. may be restricted between 0 and 2, for example.

(Accessory initial processing of lamp control section)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the character object initial processing of the lamp control unit 320, and this processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing executed by the lamp control unit 320 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the CPU 321 determines whether or not a power ON command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the game control unit 200 or not. If the power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the CPU 321 executes origin return processing of the role object (movable role object 115, sub-image display section (not shown), effect button 161) to the initial processing number updated in each process of the role object initial process. set to "1" for

The CPU 321 determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1" in step R103. If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R105 assuming that the character object origin return processing is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is executed in step R104. , and the present accessory initial processing is terminated. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the character (movable character 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) returns to the origin position, and the initial processing Processing such as setting the number to "2" is performed. Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

The CPU 321 determines whether or not the initial process number is "2" in step R105. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial action processing for the accessory is not executed, and the initial action processing for this time is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , terminates the initial processing of the character product. Specifically, an initial operation and initial light emission are performed to confirm whether or not the accessory operates normally, and an initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation process will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 34, the origin return processing for performing the operation of returning various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories are performed. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the operation of returning various roles to the origin position and the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are not mixed, and it is possible to separate and check the return operation and the initial operation and initial light emission. .

Further, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 34, the origin return process is executed before the initial action process. Therefore, the various accessories are initially moved from the origin position, and it is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp control unit)
The return-to-origin process of lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing origin return processing in lamp control unit 320 .

In step R105-1, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the return-to-origin status of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is "0". judge. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is moved to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the drive target to be returned to the origin is moved. It is set to the accessory 115 (movable effect device), and the process moves to step R105-5.

The CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R105-3. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the driving target to be returned to the origin is selected. A sub display device (not shown) is set, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the accessory to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each board accessory is at the origin position is determined. If the board accessory to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-6, and if the board accessory to be driven is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the CPU 321 drives the drive motor for moving the board accessory to be driven so that the board accessory to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, the board accessory is moved. A board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that the return abnormality has occurred in the board accessory to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9. moves the process to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the CPU 321 sets, in the RAM 323, return abnormality information (movable effect device return abnormality information, sub-display device return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the board accessory to be driven, and step R105. At -10, clear the board accessory abnormality judgment timer.

The CPU 321 updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the sub-image display unit (not shown) is to be driven. If the processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to the origin. do.

In step R105-12, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the origin return state of the frame role object (production button 161) is "0". If the frame role object processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R105-13, and if the board role process number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R105-20.

At step R105-13, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the effect button 161 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 161 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 161 is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-14, and if the effect button 161 is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the CPU 321 drives the effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 161 so that the effect button 161 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-15, the effect button 161 is pressed within a predetermined time. +1 update the frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position.

In step R105-16, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 161, and the process is moved to step R105-17. end the return-to-origin process.

In step R105-17, the CPU 321 sets return abnormality information indicating that return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 161 in the RAM 323, and in step R105-18 clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The CPU 321 updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (production button 161) to the origin.

The CPU 321 determines in step R105-20 whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the CPU 321 clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, executes the initial operation process of the accessory in the initial processing number described above. 2” is set, and the current origin return processing is terminated.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 35, when the power is turned on, the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display section (not shown), which overlap the performance position (movement area), are positioned at the origin position (standby position). If not, both of them are not returned to the origin position (standby position) at the same time (at the same time), but are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (movable accessory 115 → sub image display unit (not shown) order) It has become. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent the two accessories from applying loads to each other, and both the accessories are damaged at the same time. It is possible to suppress such inconvenience.

Also, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) execute a return operation to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motion of various roles, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial motions of various roles to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 35, an upper limit is set for the time for the return operation of each accessory to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories never ends. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the various accessories are performing the returning motions even during the variable performance and the performance motions are not performed, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Also, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. When both of the return operations to the origin position are completed, processing for shifting to initial operation processing is performed. Therefore, the returning motion of various accessories to the origin position and the initial motion of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it is possible to separate and confirm the returning motion and initial motion of various accessories. .

It should be noted that the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display section (not shown) return to the origin position in a predetermined order (the order of the movable accessory 115 → the sub-image display section (not shown)). At the same time, the operation of returning to the origin position may be started. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown), and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next. becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
Initial operation processing of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing of lamp control unit 320 .

In step R107-1, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". When the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R107-2, and when the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the CPU 321 determines whether or not return abnormality information of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) is set in the RAM323. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2" so that the initial action of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the CPU 321 selects the board role item initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 37(a)) for determining the board role item initial motion pattern. The details of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the CPU 321 determines the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display section (not shown)) and sets it in the RAM 323. FIG. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine one initial operation pattern.

The CPU 321 updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

The CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-7. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", it is set in the RAM 323 in step R107-8. The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the CPU 321 determines whether or not all steps of the initial action of the board accessory have been completed. If all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have not been completed, the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have been completed, step R107-10 is performed on the board accessory. The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation state of the frame role object (effect button 161) is "0". If the frame role-playing process number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame role-playing process number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the CPU 321 determines whether or not return abnormality information of the effect button 161 is set in the RAM323. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-14 assuming that the initial action of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame "2" is set to the frame role product processing number assuming that the initial action of the role product is not performed, and the process is shifted to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the CPU 321 selects a frame role initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 37(b)) for determining the frame role initial motion pattern. The details of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the CPU 321 determines the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 161) and sets it in the RAM323. Specifically, referring to the frame role initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(b), one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power ON command. .

The CPU 321 updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "0", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role-playing product.

In step R107-17, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is moved to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", it is set in the RAM 323 in step R107-18. The initial motion of the frame role-playing object is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the frame role-playing object.

In step R107-19, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the initial action of the frame role-playing object has been completed. If the initial action of the frame role has not been completed in all steps, the process is shifted to step R107-21, and if the initial action of the frame role has been completed in all steps, in step R107-20, the frame role The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "1", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the frame role-playing.

In step R107-21, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, this initial operation process is terminated.

The CPU 321 clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the initial processing number described above in step R107-23, and terminates this initial operation processing.

Thus, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 36, the initial action of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 161) can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial action of various accessories, and to prevent obstruction of the production actions of various accessories during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 36, when there is a return abnormality in the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) that constitute the board accessory, the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display The initial operation of the unit (not shown) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board accessory from being completely out of order or damaged by forcibly initializing the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 36, when there is a return abnormality in the production button 161 constituting the frame accessory, the initial operation of the production button 161 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as complete failure or breakage of the performance button 161 by forcibly initializing the performance button 161 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 36, even if the initial operation of the board role object in which the recovery error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame role object in which the recovery error has not occurred is executed. Even if the initial action of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial action of the board accessory in which the recovery abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the action of the accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

In addition, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 36, both the initial action of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 161) are performed. is finished, the initial operation process is finished. Therefore, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performs the initial action, the other performs the production action, and it may occur that it is unclear whether it is the initial action or the production action. Gone.

(Board accessories initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 37(a) is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table for determining an initial motion pattern of a board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)).

Types of commands at power ON, presence/absence of recovery abnormality information, and initial operation patterns to be selected are associated with the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. The number of steps is described.

The initial operation pattern includes patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01-03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns 04 to 06 that are determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

The "movable effect device small descent" is an action in which the movable accessory 115 moves (lowers) from the standby position to a midway position slightly below the standby position, and the "movable effect device large descent" The movable accessory 115 moves (descends) from the standby position to the production position below the middle position, and "return to the origin of the movable presentation device" is the action of returning the movable accessory 115 to the standby position. It's becoming

"Movement of the sub-display device" is an operation in which the sub-image display section (not shown) rises from the standby position to the effect position, and "Return to the origin of the sub-display device" is the movement of the sub-image display section (not shown). returns to the standby position.

"Movable production device LED" refers to a plurality of LEDs provided on the movable accessory 115, and "sub display device LED" refers to a plurality of LEDs provided around the screen of the sub image display section (not shown). LED.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the movable effect device LED is not described. This is because the red blinking occurs due to the anomaly notification.

Also, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the sub-display device LED is not described. This is because the LED of the display device blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

A first feature of the board role item initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the operation modes (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial actions of the objects (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) are the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory is the same at least in each process, and the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be the same. can be different.

Also, the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, The operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

In addition, when the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 and/or the sub-image display unit (not shown) is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation not included in the initial operation at power restoration may be performed in the initial operation at power recovery, or an operation not included in the initial operation at power recovery may be performed in the initial operation at power on. In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

A second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference is the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the sub-image display section (not shown). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

As a third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. While the mode is the same, the point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

When the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. However, on the contrary, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED is made different, while the light emission of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. The aspects may be the same.

Further, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state. . In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

As a fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

As a fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(a), when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state, during the variable display of special symbols, or during the jackpot game. The light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is different from that at the time of power restoration. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply to restore the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply during the variable display of the special symbols, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the movable effect device LED and the sub display device LED are extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power supply is restored during the jackpot game, but the movable effect device LED and the sub display are turned off. The device LED may be lit in the same light emission manner as when power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

As a sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When there is no return abnormality in the sub-image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) is performed without performing the initial operation of the movable accessory 115, and the return error in the movable accessory 115 is performed. If there is a return abnormality in the sub-image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 is performed and the initial operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) is not performed. mentioned. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation according to the presence or absence of the recovery abnormality.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 37(b) is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 161).

The type of power-on command and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described as a reference. ing.

"Production button large rise" is an operation in which the production button 161 rises from the standby position (initial position) to the production position (upper position). It is an operation to return to

A first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial action of the object (the effect button 161) is different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

As a second feature of the frame role initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is designed to execute an operation. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 161 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

As a third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference is the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

As a fourth feature of the frame role initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial action of the frame role (effect button 161) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols, or at the time of power restoration during the jackpot game, the production button LED is turned off, but it is the same as at the time of power restoration in which the production button LED is restored to the customer waiting state. You may make it light up in a light emission mode.

As a fifth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(b), the number of light emitting colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on and the initial light emission of the effect button 161 when the power is restored. , the number of emitted colors is different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 161 when the power is restored, it may be reversed.

As a sixth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the points is that it includes an emission color that is not in the emission color in . Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the initial light emission color of the effect button 161 upon power restoration may include a light emission color that is not included in the initial light emission color of the effect button 161 upon power-on.

As a seventh feature of the frame role initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. It is different from the time during which the production button 161 vibrates during the operation production executed by operating the production button 161 in the period. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is the initial action of the effect button 161 .

As an eighth feature of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial operation of the production button 161 in which the detection of whether or not is performed. Therefore, it is possible to check the operation of the performance button 161 and the operation of the button vibration motor at the same time, and it is possible to shorten the time required for checking the operation.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change)
With reference to FIG. 38, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change will be described. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various driving sources during setting change.

First, at timing T0, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off. At this time, a movable body ( Various driving sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating the electric tulip 123 and the big winning opening door 125D are stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the display device 130 (first special symbol display device 221, second special symbol display device 221, second Special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reservation display 218, second special symbol reservation display 219, normal symbol reservation display 220, round number display 225, state display 224, state confirmation The display 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on and a setting change operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts a setting change mode. It will be in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the state confirmation display 226, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, a setting change notification is displayed to confirm that the setting is being changed and to confirm the operation of various drive sources (display of the screen during setting change, voice during setting change "Setting is being changed" and initial operation confirmation voice "Solenoid operation is also Alternate output of "Please confirm") is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d on the right end of the information display 230. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the operating time of various driving sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various driving sources is stopped (driving source = OFF), and thereafter various driving is performed from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of the source are repeated.

At the timing of T10, if the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed in a state in which the operation time of the various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are activated. As soon as it is finished, the operation of various driving sources is immediately stopped (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources is completed, and the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230. finish. Then, the game control unit 200 shifts from the pre-start state to a game ready state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the display 130 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of general design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-described power-on notification is started. be. In addition, various accessories (movable accessories 115 (115a, 115b), sub-image display unit (not shown), presentation button 161) controlled by the production control unit 300 are started to return and initialize, and information All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d in the display 230 are fully lit, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 ends.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RAM clearing)
With reference to FIG. 39, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RAM clearing will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing the RAM.

First, at timing T0, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off. At this time, a movable body ( Various driving sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating the electric tulip 123 and the big winning opening door 125D are stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the display device 130 (first special symbol display device 221, second special symbol display device 221, second Special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reservation display 218, second special symbol reservation display 219, normal symbol reservation display 220, round number display 225, state display 224, state confirmation The display 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on and the RAM clearing operation (the RAM clearing switch 228 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts the RAM clearing preparation mode to control the progress of the game. It becomes a pre-start state before starting.

At this time, the state confirmation display 226 displays a state confirmation display indicating that RAM clearing is being prepared, and various drive sources start to operate (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, RAM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RAM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Please press RAM clear again" and "Check the operation of the solenoid Alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "please" is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, if the RAM clear approval operation (the RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed before the operating time of the various drive sources that started at the timing of T9 has elapsed, the RAM clear preparation mode and the RAM clear preparation mode are entered. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the game control unit 200 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. Move to enabled state.

At this time, various displays on the display 130 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of general design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-described power-on notification is started. be. In addition, various accessories (movable accessories 115 (115a, 115b), sub-image display unit (not shown), presentation button 161) controlled by the production control unit 300 are started to return and initialize, and information All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d in the display 230 are fully lit, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 ends.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation)
With reference to FIG. 40, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation will be described. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off. At this time, a movable body ( Various driving sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating the electric tulip 123 and the big winning opening door 125D are stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the display device 130 (first special symbol display device 221, second special symbol display device 221, second Special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reservation display 218, second special symbol reservation display 219, normal symbol reservation display 220, round number display 225, state display 224, state confirmation The display 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on and a setting confirmation operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts the setting confirmation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 226, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, setting confirmation notification to prompt confirmation of settings and operation confirmation of various drive sources (display of setting confirmation screen, setting confirmation voice "Setting confirmation in progress" and initial operation confirmation voice "Solenoid operation is also Alternate output of "Please confirm") is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d on the right end of the information display 230. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed before the operating time of the various driving sources that started at the timing of T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated. At the same time, the operation of various driving sources is immediately stopped (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources is completed, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 is also completed. do. Then, the game control unit 200 shifts from the pre-start state to a game ready state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the display 130 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation, display of normal design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power supply restoration notification is started. be. In addition, various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), presentation button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started to return and to be initialized. All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are lit, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 ends.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, in order to operate the movable body (electric tulip 123, big winning entrance door 125D) that affects the game result. (Electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, big winning entrance door opening/closing unit 216) are initially operated, so that when the pachinko game machine 100 is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game parlor, the progress of the game It is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that performs control.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the display other than the state confirmation display 226 is displayed. Device 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reservation display 218, second special symbol reservation display 219, normal symbol reservation display 220, Since the round number display 225 and the state display 224) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible not to give an extra processing burden to the game control unit 200, and to check the operation of various drive sources. can be concentrated on.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, it prompts the user to confirm that the settings are being changed and to check the operation of the various driving sources. (RAM clearing preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RAM clearing preparations and operation confirmation of various drive sources, setting confirmation notification to prompt confirmation of settings and confirmation of operation of various drive sources) is performed, the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the pachinko game machine 100 can be informed that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and the operation can be confirmed appropriately. can be performed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the setting change mode (RAM clearing preparation mode, setting confirmation mode), various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated. It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, and it is possible to reduce the development cost (shorten the development period, etc.) of the pachinko game machine 100.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the pre-start state ends due to the set value confirmation operation (RAM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation), the operation is immediately completed even before the operation time of various drive sources has elapsed. Since the operation of the various drive sources is terminated, the initial operation of the various drive sources will not be performed in the state where the game can be played, and it will be confused with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various driving sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable accessory 115 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial motions can be checked in order, and the motion can be properly checked. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various driving sources for operating the large winning opening door 125D are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is kept turned off, so that the light from the large winning opening LED Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the big winning opening door 125D, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various driving sources for operating the special winning opening door 125D are initially operated, the opening signal is generated even though the first special winning opening 125 is open. Since it is designed not to output, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the game control unit 200, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the pachinko game machine 100 It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the process.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 230 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. regulated), it is possible to prevent the game control unit 200 from being given an extra processing burden.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d displaying the current set values during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

In this embodiment, in the setting change notification, RAM clearing preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification, ``driving source is initializing'' or ``please check the operation of the solenoid'' prompts visual confirmation of the initial operation of various driving sources. Although such characters are not displayed, such characters may be displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, all the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d of the information display 230 are turned on after the progress control of the game is started to confirm the lighting. The lighting confirmation may not be performed after the RAM clear preparation mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example for initial operation of various drive sources)
Modified examples of the initial operation of various drive sources will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that this modification differs from the above-described embodiment in that the drive source processing operation process is performed after the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, or setting confirmation mode ends.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change)
With reference to FIG. 41, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change in the modified example will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources after setting changes in the modification.

First, at timing T0, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off. At this time, a movable body ( Various driving sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating the electric tulip 123 and the big winning opening door 125D are stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the display device 130 (first special symbol display device 221, second special symbol display device 221, second Special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reservation display 218, second special symbol reservation display 219, normal symbol reservation display 220, round number display 225, state display 224, state confirmation The display 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on and a setting change operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts a setting change mode. It will be in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the above-described setting change notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d on the right end of the information display 230. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The setting values displayed on the 7-segment display 230d are erased and hidden. At this time, the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 226 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the game control unit 200 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the display 130 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of general design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-described power-on notification is started. be. In addition, various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), presentation button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started to return and to be initialized. All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are lit, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 ends.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various driving sources after RAM clearing)
With reference to FIG. 42, a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources after RAM clearing in the modified example will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various driving sources after RAM clearing in the modification.

First, at timing T0, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off. At this time, a movable body ( Various driving sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating the electric tulip 123 and the big winning opening door 125D are stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the display device 130 (first special symbol display device 221, second special symbol display device 221, second Special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reservation display 218, second special symbol reservation display 219, normal symbol reservation display 220, round number display 225, state display 224), image The display unit 114 and the information display device 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on and the RAM clearing operation (the RAM clearing switch 228 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts the RAM clearing preparation mode to control the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started. At this time, the above-described RAM clearing preparation notification is started.

At the timing of T2, when the RAM clear approval operation (the RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed, the RAM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operations of various drive sources are started. At this time, an initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check operation of solenoid") for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the game control unit 200 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the display 130 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of general design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-described power-on notification is started. be. In addition, various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), presentation button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started to return and to be initialized. All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are lit, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 ends.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirming settings)
With reference to FIG. 43, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirming settings in the modified example will be described. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example in the case of initializing various drive sources after confirming the settings in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off. At this time, a movable body ( Various driving sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating the electric tulip 123 and the big winning opening door 125D are stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the display device 130 (first special symbol display device 221, second special symbol display device 221, second Special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reservation display 218, second special symbol reservation display 219, normal symbol reservation display 220, round number display 225, state display 224, state confirmation The display 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display state (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on and a setting confirmation operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 starts the setting confirmation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the above-described setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d on the right end of the information display 230. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 230d is erased and hidden. At this time, the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 226 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the game control unit 200 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the display 130 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of general design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-described power-on notification is started. be. In addition, various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), presentation button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started to return and to be initialized. All of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are lit, and lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 ends.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

Thus, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, to operate the movable bodies (the electric tulip 123 and the big winning entrance door 125D) that affect the game result. (Electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, big winning entrance door opening/closing unit 216) are initially operated, so that when the pachinko game machine 100 is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game parlor, the progress of the game It is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that performs control.

Further, according to this modification, when the various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the display other than the state confirmation display 226 is displayed. Device 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reservation display 218, second special symbol reservation display 219, normal symbol reservation display 220, Since the round number display 225 and the state display 224) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible not to give an extra processing burden to the game control unit 200, and to check the operation of various drive sources. can be concentrated on.

Further, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the pachinko game machine 100 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to perform the operation check appropriately. It becomes possible to

Further, according to this modification, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the game result is not affected after the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) ends. Since the various drive sources for operating the movable body to be given are initially operated, there is no need to perform complicated operations such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing settings (RAM clear, setting confirmation). , it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, after the setting change mode (RAM clearing preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed, after the operation waiting time has passed, various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are activated. Since the operation is to be started, it is possible to have time to check the operation of various drive sources after the setting change (setting confirmation) is completed, and the operation check can be performed appropriately. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, it is determined whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results is after the setting change mode or after the RAM clear preparation mode is finished. Since the same initial operation notification is performed regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation mode is finished, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified, and the development cost of the pachinko game machine 100 is reduced. reduction (shortening of development period, etc.).

Further, according to this modification, when the various driving sources for operating the large winning opening door 125D are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is kept turned off, so the light from the large winning opening LED Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the big winning opening door 125D, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable accessory 115 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state, the two types of initial motions can be checked in order, and the motion can be properly checked. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, when the various driving sources for operating the big winning gate 125D are initially operated, the opening signal is generated even though the first big winning gate 125 is open. Since it is designed not to output, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the game control unit 200, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the pachinko game machine 100 It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the process.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 230 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. regulated), it is possible to prevent the game control unit 200 from being given an extra processing burden.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, during the setting change mode, the RAM clearing preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d displaying the current setting values By not displaying the performance information, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

In addition, according to this modification, during the initial operation of various drive sources, the information display 230 does not display the set values and the performance information of the game machine. On the other hand, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the employees of the amusement arcade, and to accurately judge failures of various drive sources.

[Variation effect pattern table]
44 and 45 are diagrams showing setting examples of the variable effect patterns and tables used in the variable effect pattern selection (S2813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 27(b). In addition, FIG. 44 shows a variation effect pattern table for big hits in the low probability time saving no-game state, and FIG.

A plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table for big win shown in FIG. For the variation patterns “PA1” to “PA6”, “PB1” to “PB14”, and “PC1 to PC2” set using FIG. 21 above, the variation production patterns “EA1” to “EA6”, “ EB1” to “EB14” and “EC1 to EC2” are associated on a one-to-one basis.
In addition, a plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table for small hits and losses shown in FIG. With respect to the variation patterns "PD1 to PD2" and "PR1" to "PR10" set using FIG. are mapped.

Here, the variable performance is a performance for notifying the determination result of the special symbol lottery (that is, whether or not the player has won a big hit) in a dramatic manner by displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
In addition, in the illustrated variable performance pattern, "pseudo-continuous times", "normal", "SP reach", "SPSP reach" and "stop pattern" are set. In addition, "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed.

Here, the "pseudo-continuous number" is the number of pseudo-continuous effects (pseudo-runs). This pseudo-continuous production is a production that makes it appear as if a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbols is being performed in the variable display of the special symbols for one variation. In the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect control section 300 temporarily stops the decorative symbols after varying the decorative symbols before entering the ready-to-win state, and then restarts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous effect, after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern are repeated for the set pseudo-continuous number of times, and then the fixed stop is performed. End the variable display. Here, the term "temporary stop" refers to a pseudo-stopped state in which the decorative patterns appear to be stopped at first glance, but actually the patterns are slightly swaying. In other words, the temporary stop of the decorative symbols is treated as a continuous variation in game control. Further, the determination and stoppage of the decorative symbols means a state in which the special symbols are determined as the stopped symbols in the variable display for one variation of the special symbols. In the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect control unit 300 may restart the variable display of the decorative symbols after the ready-to-win state. Furthermore, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect control section 300 may restart the variable display of the decorative symbols without temporarily stopping the decorative symbols after varying the decorative symbols.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo-continuous number" is set to "-", "1", "2", "3", that is, between 0 and 3 times. In addition, the pseudo-continuous number of times is set in association with the degree of expectation (reliability), which is the degree of expectation for a big win. That is, the degree of expectation is set to be higher as the number of times of pseudo continuation is larger.

"Normal" indicates the type of ready-to-win effect. In the illustrated example, one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the type of ready-to-win effect.
"SP reach" indicates the type of SP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP ready-to-win effect. In addition, the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

"SPSP reach" indicates the type of SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2" and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP ready-to-win effect. In addition, the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

A “stop symbol” indicates a combination of decorative symbols displayed as a stop symbol. In the illustrated example, the types of stop symbols are "777", "666", "444", "RRR", "5X5" and the like. In the illustrated example, the type of stop symbol is set according to the type of jackpot. For example, in low-probability symbol A and low-probability symbol B, which are jackpots that are in a low-probability state after the jackpot, even-numbered stop symbols "444" and "666" are set. Further, in the high-probability symbol A and the high-probability symbol C which are the high-probability state after the big win, the odd stop symbols "777" and "111" are set.

Now, the effect control section 300 determines the variable effect pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 selects a variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 13) based on the table shown in FIG.
For example, in FIG. 44, when the "big win symbol" is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern is "PB1", "EB1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. In this variable effect pattern "EB1", the "pseudo-continuous number" is "-", that is, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. Also, "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach".

[Production image]
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, the effect image that the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display will be described.
As shown in FIG. 46 , the effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114 under the control of the effect control unit 300 . In this embodiment, the effect images displayed on the image display unit 114 include the decorative pattern 41, the moving image 51, the pending image 52, the pending number display 55, the small pattern 56, and the stage image 61. In addition, although the details will be described later, the image display unit 114 displays a light emission image 62 at stop, an image 63 with pending change, a transition image 64, an SP ready-to-reach image 65, an SPSP ready-to-reach image 66, a button operation image 67, and a double eye light emission image. 68, a resurrection image 69, a resurrection light-emitting image 70, a right-handed image 71, and a restorative image 72 may be displayed.

[Decorative pattern 41]
As shown in FIG. 46(1), three decorative designs 41 are displayed on the image display section 114 . In addition, when the three patterns constituting the decorative pattern 41 are individually described, the pattern arranged on the left side is the "left decorative pattern 41", the pattern arranged in the center is the "middle decorative pattern 41", and the pattern on the right side. The pattern arranged in the 2 is sometimes called a "right decorative pattern 41". When the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "left and right decorative patterns 41". Also, when the left decorative design 41, the middle decorative design 41, and the right decorative design 41 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "three decorative designs 41". Furthermore, the three decorative patterns 41 with the same numbers may be referred to as "coordinated decorative patterns 41".

In this embodiment, as the display mode of the decorative pattern 41, a highly decorative display mode (see FIG. 46 (1)) in which characters such as characters are displayed in addition to characters such as numbers, and characters such as numbers are displayed. There is also a low-decorative display mode (see FIG. 54(4)) that is displayed as the main subject. Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 is switched according to the change of the game state, the progress of the production, or the like. Although the details will be described later, for example, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in SP reach production, SPSP reach production, and high probability time-saving gaming state, etc. In other cases such as the low decorative pattern 41 Is displayed.

In the variable rendering of the decorative symbols 41, the effect control unit 300 variably displays the three decorative symbols 41 by, for example, vertical scrolling (scrolling downward). ”) is temporarily stopped, then the right decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number “9”) is temporarily stopped, and then the middle decorative pattern (for example, the number “2”) is temporarily stopped. After all the decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in this way, finally all the decorative patterns 41 are fixed and stopped according to the stop display of the special pattern. Incidentally, the combination "029" of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG.

[Variation image 51]
As shown in FIG. 46(5), the image display section 114 is in the process of changing the special design (during the display of the decorative design 41) by the special design variation control section 233 (see FIG. 5, etc.). is displayed. That is, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbols during the variable display of the special symbols. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower left corner of the display area of the image display unit 114), and the special symbol is displayed. The display disappears when the stop display is displayed. In the illustrated example, the variation image 51 has a spherical shape. Also, in the illustrated example, a glossy image 51A is displayed in the variable image 51 . The glossy image 51A is an image imitating gloss. A variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variation image 51 is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In addition, the variation image 51 changes its display mode, such as color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “color, etc.”), based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process, and informs the expectation of winning the jackpot. or suggest. For example, when white, blinking, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the variation image 51, the degree of expectation may be set to be higher the later in this order. “Blinking” is a display mode that looks like blinking.

[Reserved image 52]
As shown in FIG. 46(1), the image display unit 114 displays a pending image 52 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the current pending ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3, etc.). In other words, the pending image 52 is an image indicating that the right to judge the big win is suspended. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending image 52 on the screen is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.
The reserved image 52 has a smaller display size than the variable image 51 . Also, in the illustrated example, the retained image 52 has a spherical shape. Also, in the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 is displayed with a glossy image 52A. The glossy image 52A is an image imitating gloss. A holding base is displayed in the area where the holding image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the reserved pedestal of the reserved image are displayed in different modes.

In addition, the pending image 52 changes its display mode, such as color, based on the result of preliminary determination by the preliminary determination process, and notifies or suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, it is set such that when the result of preliminary determination by the preliminary determination process is a big hit, the color of the type with a higher degree of expectation is displayed than in the case of a loss. For example, when white, blinking, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the pending image 52, the expectations may be set higher in this order. Hereinafter, the display mode of the white variable image 51 and the display mode of the white reserved image 52 may be referred to as normal display modes.

Here, as described above, winning at the first starting port 121 causes up to four holds. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 due to the winning at the first starting port 121 . Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of reserved images 52 are displayed side by side in the area on the right side of the variable image 51 in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 toward a position farther away, that is, from left to right. .

Although a detailed description is omitted, even winning a prize at the second starting port 122 causes up to four holds. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 by winning the prize at the second starting port 122 .
Further, in this embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be configured in different forms.

Further, in the following description, the maximum of four reserved images 52 displayed are "first reserved image 52", "second reserved image 52", and "third Reserved image 52" and "fourth reserved image 52".

[Pending number display 55]
As shown in FIG. 46(1), the image display unit 114 displays a pending number display 55 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the pending ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3, etc.). This pending number display 55 is an image showing the pending number. Here, the number of pending images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of pending prizes for each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 .

[Small pattern 56]
As shown in FIG. 46(1), the image display unit 114 displays a special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 by the special symbol variation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5, etc.). A small pattern 56 is displayed to indicate that the variable display is in progress (the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed in a variable manner). The small pattern 56 is controlled by the effect control section 300, and is variably displayed and then stopped in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the special symbols.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 56 are three images respectively corresponding to the decorative patterns 41 and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the image display section 114 . The small pattern 56 is displayed as an image smaller in size than the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁Further, as described above, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or in a low decorative display mode, but the small pattern 56 may be displayed in a low decorative display mode. Only displayed in However, the small pattern 56 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode.

The small symbols 56 are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled) in a manner indicating that the special symbols are variably displayed as the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is won. In the small pattern 56, during scrolling, the number image is displayed from "1" to "9" while increasing by one, and then again from "1" by one. is repeated in Then, the small pattern 56 is stop-displayed when the special pattern is stop-displayed. In the illustrated example, the numbers indicated by the stopped small symbols 56 match the numbers indicated by the decorative symbols 41 . To explain further, in the example of FIG. 46(1), as the small pattern 56, a number corresponding to "029" of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed.

[Stage image 61]
As shown in FIG. 46(1), the image display section 114 displays a stage image 61 as a background for the decorative pattern 41 and the like. The stage image 61 is, for example, an image (stage, etc.) related to the content (idol, anime character, etc.) that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . In the illustrated example, a space-themed image is displayed as the stage image 61 . The stage image 61 is switched, for example, when a variable effect in one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. Further, the stage image 61 may be switched, for example, when a specific variable effect (for example, a variable effect in which an SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed) is performed. Furthermore, the stage image 61 may be switched according to the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 .

[Production example]
In this embodiment, various effects are executed while the effect image is being displayed on the image display section 114 . For example, the effect when the effect image is displayed includes an action effect. In addition, although the details will be described later, the effect when the effect image is displayed includes a shift effect, an enlargement effect, a light emission effect, a stop non-display effect, a pending change effect, an increase display effect, an operation effect when displaying, and an SP end effect. Display effects, promotion promotion effects, resurrection effects, resurrection non-display effects, and temporary stop incitement effects are included.

[Action production]
In this embodiment, an action effect is executed. The motion effect is a motion effect for displaying the moving image 51 or the pending image 52 . The action display is a display that allows the player to see the moving image 51 or the suspended image 52 as if it were moving. In this embodiment, the action effect is executed according to the progress of the effect. More specifically, the action effect is performed during execution of the variable effect. Further, the action effect of the present embodiment is performed even when the variable effect is not executed. By executing the action effect, the player can be made to pay attention to the changing image 51 or the pending image 52 . In addition, by executing the action effect, it is possible to suggest that the display mode of the variable image 51 or the pending image 52 will change.
In the present embodiment, a rotation effect, a partial swing effect, a full swing effect, and a flashing effect are performed as the action effect. Specific effects of the rotation effect, partial swing effect, total swing effect, and flashing effect will be described in detail later.

[Variation production example 1]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49, the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 (variable effect example 1) will be specifically described. Variation production example 1 is a variation production example of the decorative pattern 41 in the low probability time saving non-gaming state. In addition, in variation production example 1, two variation productions are performed.
Incidentally, the two variable effects shown in FIGS. 46 to 49 are both variable effects executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. When "ER1" is selected as this "fluctuation effect pattern", effects such as "normal" are not executed.

As shown in FIG. 46(1), the effect control unit 300 stops and displays the previous special symbol, and the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114. and Also, at this time, the image display section 114 displays the decorative pattern 41 , the pending image 52 , the pending number display 55 , the small pattern 56 , and the stage image 61 . The first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 are all displayed in the normal display mode. Also, at this time, in the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A is at the predetermined initial position. is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates "4", which is the number of pending prizes for the first starting port 121, and the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is the second 2 Shows "0", which is the number of pending prizes for the starting port. At this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped. Also, at this time, the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying "4".

Then, when the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the variable display of the next special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 46(2), the variable display of the small symbol 56 is started. be. In the drawing, when the small pattern 56 is shown to be fluctuating (scrolling) at high speed, the small pattern 56 is indicated by an arrow (↓) for easy understanding. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 switches from "4" to "3". Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Also, at this time, the first sub-reservation display 83 displays "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(3), the shift effect is started. Also, at this time, the rotation rendering of the pending image 52 is started.
The shift effect is a effect of moving the reserved image 52 . In this shift effect, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 are respectively the display position of the first reserved image 52, the display position of the second reserved image 52, and the display position of the second reserved image 52. It moves toward the display position of the second reserved image 52 . Also, in the shift effect, the first pending image 52 moves toward the display position of the variable image 51 .
A rotation effect, which is an example of the action effect, is an effect in which the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are rotated. In the rotating effect, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 continue to rotate clockwise at a constant speed. Further, the rotation effect is started from the state where the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 is positioned at the initial position. In addition, in the illustrated example, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 start rotating at the same time due to the rotation effect.
By starting the rotation effect, in the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A is at the non-initial position. positioned. A non-initial position is a position different from the initial position. Further, in the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52, the positions of the glossy images 52A in the rotation direction are aligned.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(4), the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 is started. Also, at this time, the enlargement effect is started.
The enlargement effect is a effect of enlarging the display size of the pending image 52 . More specifically, the enlargement effect is a effect of enlarging the display size of the first pending image 52 to the display size of the variable image 51 . In the enlargement effect, the display size of the first pending image 52 is gradually enlarged.

Next, the enlargement effect and the shift effect are completed, and as shown in FIG. 46(5), the variation image 51, the first pending image 52, the second pending image 52 and the third pending image 52 are displayed. . Also, at this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all It is located in the half-rotation position. The half-rotation position is the position when the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 or the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 is half-rotated clockwise from the initial position. A half-rotation position is an example of a non-initial position. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed at high speed. When the drawing shows that the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed (scrolled) at high speed, the decorative pattern 41 is indicated by an arrow (↓) for easy understanding.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(6), the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of the variable display after being scrolled at a low speed. In addition, when representing that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed by using a display similar to a double quotation mark around the decorative pattern 41 for easy understanding. Also, at this time, a lighting effect using the left decorative pattern 41 is performed.
The light emitting effect is a effect in which a specific light emitting body provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100 emits light. Specific light emitters include, for example, the display screen of the image display unit 114, the movable accessory 115, the board lamp 116, and the like. When the image display unit 114 is used to realize the light emission effect, the light emission effect is to display on the image display unit 114 an image that appears to the player as if it were emitting light. In other words, the light emission effect is to display an image simulating light on the image display unit 114 . In the illustrated example, in the light emission effect, a stop light emission image 62 is displayed around the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 (number "7"). The light emission image 62 at the time of stop is an image for making it appear to the player that the decorative symbol 41 is emitting light when the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped. The stop emission image 62 is, for example, an image imitating light. Further, the light emission image 62 at stop is displayed for, for example, 0.5 seconds, and then disappears. That is, the execution time of the light emission effect using the stop light emission image 62 is 0.5 seconds. The stop light emission image 62 may be displayed in any color. In addition, the light emission image 62 at stop may be displayed on the whole or part of the area where the decorative pattern 41 is displayed.
Further, when the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossiness of the third reserved image 52 All of the images 52A are located at the initial positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(7), the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of the variable display after being scrolled at a low speed. At this time, a lighting effect using the right decorative pattern 41 is performed. In the illustrated example, in the light emission effect, a stop light emission image 62 is displayed around the display area of the right decorative pattern 41 (number "8"). Also, at this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all Located in the half-rotation position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(8), the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of the variable display after being scrolled at a low speed. At this time, a lighting effect using the middle decorative pattern 41 is performed. In the illustrated example, in the light emission effect, a stop time light emission image 62 is displayed around the display area of the middle decorative pattern 41 (number "5"). Also, at this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all located at the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(9), after the three decorative patterns 41 continue to be temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the three decorative patterns 41 are determined along with the stop display of the special patterns. Stop. Here, the combination "758" of the decorative symbols 41 stopped and displayed shown in FIG. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop display of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “758” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Further, at this time, the rotation effect of any of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(10), the stop non-display effect is started.
The stop non-display effect is a effect in which the variable image 51 is not displayed with the stop display of the special symbols. This stop non-display effect can also be regarded as a disappearance effect in which the variable image 51 disappears. In the stop non-display effect, the transparency of the variable image 51 displayed in the opaque display mode gradually increases, and then the variable image 51 is hidden. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 is displayed in a translucent display mode. Note that the decorative pattern 41 does not change in transparency before and after the finalization stop.
Moreover, when the stop non-display effect is started, the rotating effect of any of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all rotated halfway. located in position.

Next, the stop non-display effect is completed, and as shown in FIG. 47(11), the variable image 51 is not displayed. Here, as the variable image 51 is hidden, the rotating effect of the variable image 51 is finished. Also, at this time, the rotation effect of any of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. At this time, in the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52, all glossy images 52A are positioned at non-initial positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(12), the rotation effect of any of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52 and the third reserved image 52 is interrupted. At this time, as the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52, the reserved image 52 in which the glossy image 52A is positioned at the initial position is displayed. More specifically, when the rotation effect is interrupted, regardless of the position of the glossy image 52A in the reserved image 52 immediately before this interruption, the reserved image 52 in which the glossy image 52A is positioned at the initial position is displayed. be.

Next, when the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the variable display of the next special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 48 (13), the variable display of the small symbol 56 is started. be done. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 switches from "3" to "2". Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Also, at this time, the sub-first suspension display 83 displays "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(14), the shift effect is started. Also, at this time, the rotation effects of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are restarted.
Next, the enlargement effect is performed, and the shift effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. 48(15), the variable image 51, the first pending image 52 and the second pending image 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are all positioned at the half-rotation position. Also, the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 has started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(16), the suspension change effect using the second suspension image 52 is started.
The pending change performance is a performance for informing or suggesting the degree of expectation for winning a big prize based on the result of preliminary determination by preliminary determination processing by changing the display mode of the variable image 51 or the display mode of the pending image 52.例文帳に追加The pending change effect is started when the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the pending image 52 are positioned at the initial positions. In addition, the pending change effect includes the display of the pending change inciting image 63 . The pending change hint image 63 is an image showing whether or not the display mode of the variable image 51 or the display mode of the pending image 52 will change.
Further, when the pending change effect using the second pending image 52 is started, the rotation effect of any of the variable image 51, the first pending image 52 and the second pending image 52 is continuously performed. .

Next, the pending change effect ends, and the second pending image 52 is displayed in blue as shown in FIG. 48(17). This second reserved image 52 displays a glossy image 52A and an aura image 52B. The aura image 52B is an image imitating an aura. Also, at this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are all positioned at the initial positions. Also, at this time, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is located at a predetermined initial position. Also, at this time, a partial swing effect is started.
The partial swing effect, which is an example of the action effect, is a effect in which a part of the variable image 51 or a part of the reserved image 52 is shaken. In the illustrated example, in the partial swing effect, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 continues to swing left and right. Also, the partial swing effect is started from a state where the aura image 52B is positioned at the initial position. When the partial swing effect is started, the aura image 52B first starts swinging to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(18), the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are all Aligned. Also, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is positioned at the right tilt position. The right tilt position is a position where the target image (the aura image 52B in the illustrated example) is tilted to the right from the initial position.

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting port 121 and the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 121 is added, as shown in FIG. The number display 55 switches from "2" to "3". Also, at this time, the increased display effect and the operation effect at the time of display are started. Also, at this time, the first sub-reservation display 83 displays "3".
The increase display effect is a effect of newly displaying the pending image 52 as the number of pending positions increases. In the increased display effect, the pending image 52 is displayed in an opaque display mode after gradually changing from a display mode with a high degree of transparency to a display mode with a low degree of transparency. In the illustrated example, the third reserved image 52 is displayed in a translucent display mode.
The display-time action effect is an effect of operating the pending image 52 when the pending image 52 is newly displayed. In the illustrated example, the third reserved image 52 moves upward from the lower side of the reserved pedestal corresponding to the third reserved image 52 in the display-time action effect.
Further, when the increased display effect and the display-time action effect are started, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are all Positions in the direction of rotation are aligned. Also, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is positioned at the left tilt position. The left tilt position is a position where the target image (the aura image 52B in the illustrated example) is tilted leftward from the initial position.

Next, the increase display effect is terminated, and as shown in FIG. 49(20), the third pending image 52 is displayed in an opaque display mode. Also, at this time, the display-time action effect ends, and the third reserved image 52 is displayed on the reserved base corresponding to the third reserved image 52 . Also, at this time, the rotation effect of the third reserved image 52 is started. Also, at this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all Positions in the direction of rotation are aligned. Also, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is positioned at the initial position. On the other hand, none of the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 has reached the initial position. That is, before the moving image 51 and the reserved image 52 make one rotation, the motion of the aura image 52B making one reciprocation in the horizontal direction is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (21), the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped. At this time, around the display area of the left decorative design 41, around the display area of the middle decorative design 41, and around the display area of the right decorative design 41, the light emitting image 62 at stop is displayed. Further, at this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all initialized. located in position. Also, at this time, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is positioned at the non-initial position.

Then, along with the stop display of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 49 (22), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. Here, the combination “412” of the stationary decorative symbols 41 shown in FIG. 49(22) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop display of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “412” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Further, at this time, the rotation effect of any of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Also, at this time, the partial swing effect of the second reserved image 52 is continuously performed. At this time, the aura image 52B is positioned at the left tilt position. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped.

50 and 51 are explanatory diagrams of each effect in example 1 of variable effect. Note that the description of each effect shown in FIG. 50 corresponds to FIGS. 46(1) to 47(12). Also, the description of each effect shown in FIG. 51 corresponds to FIGS. 48(13) to 49(22).

As shown in FIG. 50, at the time point (T1) of the variable effect example 1, the number of pending prizes to the first starting port 121 is subtracted from "4" to "3", and variable display of special symbols is started. be.
Thereafter, at time (T2), the variable display on the first sub variable display 81 and the variable display of the small pattern 56 are started. Also, the first sub display 83 changes from "4" display to "3" display. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 switches from "4" to "3".
After that, at time (T3), the shift effect is started. Also, the rotation effects of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52 and the fourth reserved image 52 are started.

After that, at time (T4), the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 is started. Also, the enlargement effect is started.
After that, at time (T5), the shift effect and the enlargement effect end.
After that, at the time point (T6), the lighting effect using the left decorative pattern 41 is started. Also, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 reach the initial positions. Here, the time P1 from the time point (T3) to the time point (T6) is the cycle of rotation in the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. FIG. That is, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 repeatedly perform the action of rotating once at the time P1 in the rotation effect. The time P1 is, for example, 2 seconds.

After that, at time (T7), the lighting effect using the left decorative pattern 41 ends. Here, the time P2 from time (T6) to time (T7) is the execution time of the lighting effect. The time P2 is, for example, 1 second. That is, the time P2, which is the execution time of the light emission effect, is shorter than the time P1, which is the cycle of rotation in the rotation effect.
After that, at time (T8), glossy image 51A of variable image 51, glossy image 52A of first reserved image 52, glossy image 52A of second reserved image 52, and glossy image 52A of third reserved image 52 are initialized. reach the position. Here, the time P3 from time (T6) to time (T8) is the cycle of rotation in the rotation presentation of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 . This time P3 is the same time as the time P1.

After that, at time (T9), the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
After that, at time (T10), the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped. Also, the variable display on the first sub variable display 81 stops. Also, the small pattern 56 is stopped and displayed.

After that, at time (T11), the stop non-display effect is started.
After that, at time (T12), the rotation effect of the variable image 51 ends. Also, the stop non-display effect ends.
After that, at time (T13), the rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52 and the third reserved image 52 is interrupted. Here, time P4 from time (T10) to time (T11) is shorter than time P5 from time (T11) to time (T12). Also, time P4 is shorter than time T6 from time (T12) to time (T13). Furthermore, time P5 is longer than time P6.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51, at time (T14), the number of pending prizes to the first starting port 121 is subtracted from "3" to "2", and the next special symbol variable display is started. be.
Thereafter, at time (T15), the variable display on the first sub variable display 81 and the variable display of the small pattern 56 are started. Also, the first sub display 83 changes from "3" display to "2" display. In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 switches from "3" to "2".
After that, at time (T16), the shift effect is started. Also, the rotation effects of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52 and the third reserved image 52 are restarted.

After that, at time (T17), the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 is started.
After that, at time (T18), the shift effect ends.
After that, at time (T19), the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are positioned at the initial positions. Also, the pending change effect is started.
After that, at time (T20), the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 reach the initial positions. Also, the pending change effect ends. Also, the partial swing effect of the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is started.

After that, at time (T21), the number of pending prizes for the first starting port 121 is added from "2" to "3".
After that, at time (T22), the first sub-suspension indicator 83 changes from displaying "2" to displaying "3". In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 switches from "2" to "3". Also, an increase display effect is started. In addition, the motion presentation at the time of display is started.

After that, at the time point (T23), the increase display effect and the motion effect at the time of display end. Also, the rotation effect of the third reserved image 52 is started. Also, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 reaches the initial position. Here, the time P7 from the time point (T20) to the time point (T23) is the swing cycle of the aura image 52B in the partial swing effect. Time P7 is, for example, 1.5 seconds. That is, time P7 is shorter than time P1. In other words, the swing cycle of the aura image 52B in the partial swing effect is shorter than the rotation cycle of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 in the rotation effect. Also, the time P8 from time (T22) to time (T23) is shorter than time P5. That is, the time from the start to the end of the increase display effect is shorter than the time from the start to the end of the stop non-display effect.

After that, at time (T24), glossy image 51A of variation image 51, glossy image 52A of first reserved image 52, glossy image 52A of second reserved image 52, and glossy image 52A of third reserved image 52 are initial. reach the position. Here, time P9 from time (T23) to time (T24) is shorter than time P1. That is, the time from the start of the rotation effect of the third reserved image 52 to the arrival of the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 at the initial position is longer than the rotation period in the rotation effect of the reserved image 52. short.
After that, at time (T25), the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
After that, at time (T26), the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped. Also, the variable display on the first sub variable display 81 stops. Also, the small pattern 56 is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts the shift effect after updating the display content of the reservation number display 55 when the number of reservations decreases, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the number of reservations has decreased, the effect control unit 300 may start the shift effect when updating the display content of the number of reservations display 55 .

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts the shift effect after starting the variable display of the small symbols 56, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The effect control unit 300 may start the shift effect, for example, when starting the variable display of the small symbols 56 .

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 after starting the shift effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control section 300 may start the shift effect after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols 41 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 starts the shift effect after starting the variable display on the first sub-variable display 81, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The effect control section 300 may start the shift effect, for example, when starting the variable display on the first sub-variable display 81 .

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts the shift effect after the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The effect control unit 300 may start the shift effect, for example, when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts the action effect when starting the shift effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may start the action effect before starting the shift effect. Also, the action effect may be started after the shift effect is started. Also, the motion effect may be started when the shift effect ends. Further, the action effect may be started after the shift effect is finished.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts the shift effect after updating the display content of the pending number display 55 . In other words, the effect control unit 300 starts the moving display of the pending image 52 after the change of the display mode of the pending number display 55 according to the decrease of the pending memory stored in the RAM 203 . Here, the pending image 52 is taken as the first pending display. Also, the pending number display 55 can be regarded as a second pending display.
When an effect using the reserved image 52 is performed, the player tends to focus on the reserved image 52, so that the player may recognize a change in the reserved number by starting the moving display of the reserved image 52. be. In this case, if the display mode of the pending number display 55 does not change even if the moving display of the pending image 52 is started, the player may not be able to grasp the accurate pending number. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the moving display of the pending image 52 is started after the change in the display mode of the pending number display 55, thereby preventing the player from being unable to accurately grasp the pending number.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect control section 300 terminates the movement display of the variable image 51 after the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. In this case, even before the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the end of the variable effect due to the end of the movement display of the variable image 51 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 starts the moving display of the information display after starting the variable display of the specific symbols. Here, the specific pattern includes, for example, the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, and the like. Also, the information display includes, for example, a variable image 51 and a pending image 52 . Further, the moving display of the information display includes not only the moving display of the reserved image 52 to the display area of the reserved image 52 but also the moving display of the reserved image 52 to the display area of the variable image 51 .
In this case, even before the start of the variable display of the specific symbols, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable effect has been started due to the start of the moving display of the information display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 can start moving display of the pending image 52 after starting the cycle display of the special symbols. Here, the special symbol includes, for example, the first sub-variable indicator 81 and the like. In this case, even before the cycle display of the special symbols is started, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display of the special symbols is started due to the start of the moving display of the reserved image 52.例文帳に追加

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts moving display of the pending image 52 after the cycle display of the special symbols is started. In this case, even before the cycle display of the special symbols is started, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display of the special symbols is started due to the start of the moving display of the reserved image 52.例文帳に追加

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 starts moving display of the information display after the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed. In this case, even before the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable effect has ended due to the start of the moving display of the information display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 can display the pending image 52 in a predetermined cycle.
When the pending image 52 displays an action, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance using the pending image 52, and even when the motion display of the pending image 52 different from the motion display in the pending change performance is performed. , the player may misunderstand that the pending change effect has been performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying the pending image 52 in a predetermined cycle, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the motion display in the predetermined cycle is the pending change effect. Furthermore, it is possible to suggest that the suspension change effect using the suspension image 52 may be performed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 causes the pending image 52 to be displayed in motion at a predetermined cycle. On the other hand, after changing the display mode of the pending number display 55, the operation display of the pending number display 55 is not executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to accurately grasp the number of reservations due to the operation display of the number of reservations display 55, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 is, for example, a first operation display that displays the operation of the first pending image 52 in a predetermined cycle, and a second operation display that displays the operation of the second pending image 52 in a predetermined cycle. A two-action display is possible. Then, it is possible to synchronize and display the first action display and the second action display. Here, the first pending image 52 is taken as the first information display. Also, the second pending image 52 is taken as a second information display.
In this case, compared to the case where the first action display and the second action display are displayed without synchronism, the appearance of the synchronously displayed pending image 52 is improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved. .

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 causes the pending image 52 to be displayed in the first operation mode when starting the additional display of the pending image 52 . The first action mode is, for example, the action mode of the pending image 52 in the display-time action effect. Then, the effect control unit 300 can display the pending image 52 in the second action mode in which the pending image 52 is displayed in the first action mode and then displayed in a predetermined cycle. The second action mode is, for example, the action mode of the pending image 52 in the action rendering.
In this case, the player can easily notice that the pending image 52 has been additionally displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 displays the pending image 52 in the first display mode when starting to additionally display the pending image 52 . The first display mode is, for example, the display mode of the pending image 52 during execution of the increased display effect. After displaying the pending image 52 in the first display mode, the effect control unit 300 can display the pending image 52 in a predetermined cycle in the second display mode. The second display mode is a display mode of the pending image 52 after the end of the increase display effect.
In this case, the player can easily notice that the pending image 52 has been additionally displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can interrupt the motion display of the pending image 52 in a predetermined cycle after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, while the variable image 51 is hidden. be. In this case, it is possible for the player to grasp whether or not the special symbols are variably displayed depending on whether or not the operation display of the reserved image 52 is performed at a predetermined cycle, and the interest in the game can be improved. can.
Note that the effect control unit 300 may, for example, hide the variable image 51 after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, while the operation display of the reserved image 52 is interrupted at a predetermined cycle.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 executes the operation display of the pending image 52 during the period from the stop display of the decorative symbol 41 to the start of the next variable display, and after the start of the next variable display. It is also possible to execute the active display of the hold image 52 in the . The stop display of the decorative pattern 41 includes, for example, a temporary stop display of the decorative pattern 41, a fixed stop display of the decorative pattern 41, and the like.
In this case, the amusement of the game can be improved even when the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 is not performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display the varying image 51 in such a manner that the degree of transparency of the varying image 51 is changed when the movement display of the varying image 51 in a predetermined cycle is completed. In this case, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the end of the motion display of the variable image 51, and the motion display of the variable image 51 can be ended naturally, thereby improving the amusement of the game.
Note that the effect control unit 300 may change the transparency of the variation image 51 after finishing the operation display of the variation image 51 at a predetermined cycle after temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41 . Further, after temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41, the transparency of the varying image 51 may be changed, and then the movement display of the varying image 51 at a predetermined cycle may be terminated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 changes the transparency of the variable image 51 in a state in which the motion display of the variable image 51 is executed at a predetermined cycle after the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed. After that, the variable image 51 can be hidden.
In this case, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable with the non-display of the variable image 51, the variable image 51 can be naturally hidden, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display the pending image 52 from the first mode to the second mode at a predetermined cycle. , it is possible to start the operation display from the first mode. The first mode is, for example, the initial position of the gloss image 52A in the reserved image 52. FIG. Also, the second aspect is, for example, the half-rotation position of the glossy image 52A in the reserved image 52 .
In this case, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display of the special symbols has started, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 causes the pending image 52 in the first display mode to be displayed in a first cycle, and then displays the pending image 52 in the second display mode in a second cycle different from the first cycle. It is possible to display the operation with The first display mode is, for example, the normal display mode. The second display mode is, for example, a blue display mode.
In this case, the player can easily distinguish between the pending image 52 in the first display mode and the pending image 52 in the second display mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period of operation in the operation display of the pending image 52 and the execution time of the light emitting effect using the decorative pattern 41 are different.
In this case, since it becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the operation display of the pending image 52 and the light emitting effect, various effects can be realized, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display the pending image 52 in the first cycle, and can execute switching display in which the small symbols 56 are switched and displayed in the second cycle. The first cycle and the second cycle are different times.
In this case, if the action display of the pending image 52 and the switching display of the small pattern 56 are interlocked, misunderstanding by the player is suppressed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to cause the first sub-variable display device 81 to be cycle-displayed in the first period and then stop-displayed, and to cause the holding image 52 to be operatively displayed in the second period. The first cycle and the second cycle are different times. Cycle display is, for example, blinking display.
In this case, if the cycle display of the first sub-variable display 81 and the operation display of the pending image 52 are interlocked, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing them, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can move and display the decorative pattern 41 in the first direction in the variable display, and can move and display the pending image 52 in the second direction. . The first direction is, for example, the direction in which the decorative pattern 41 fluctuates. The second direction is the direction in which the pending image 52 moves in the action effect. The second direction is a direction different from the first direction.
In this case, the moving display of the decorative pattern 41 and the moving display of the reserved image 52 can be easily distinguished by the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Variation production example 2]
FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. Variation production example 2 is a variation production executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation production pattern" in FIG. When "ER3" is selected as this "fluctuation effect pattern", "N1" is executed as "normal". In addition, in the following description, points different from example 1 of variable effect will be mainly described, and description of points that are identical to example 1 of variable effect may be omitted.

As the last special symbol is stopped and displayed by the effect control section 300, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 52(1). Also, at this time, the small pattern 56 is stopped and displayed. Also, at this time, both the glossy image 52A and the aura image 52B of the first reserved image 52 and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are positioned at the initial positions. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates “2”, which is the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121 . At this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped. Also, at this time, the sub first suspension display 83 is displaying "2".

Next, when the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the next special symbol variable display is started, the small symbol 56 variable display is started as shown in FIG. 52(2). be done. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 switches from "2" to "1". Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Also, at this time, the sub-first suspension display 83 displays "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(3), the shift effect is started. Also, at this time, the rotation effect of the first reserved image 52 and the second reserved image 52 is started. Also, at this time, the partial swing effect of the first reserved image 52 is started.
Next, the shift effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 52(4), the variable image 51 and the first pending image 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(5), the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. At this time, the light emission image 62 at stop is displayed around the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 52(6), the ready-to-win effect is started. More specifically, the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped, and a ready-to-win state is reached. Also, at this time, the light emission image 62 at stop is displayed around the display area of the right decorative pattern 41 . Further, at this time, the rotating effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Further, at this time, the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(7), the number "5", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped. At this time, a light emission image 62 at stop is displayed around the display area of the middle decorative pattern 41 .
Then, along with the stop display of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 53(8), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. Here, the combination "454" of the stationary decorative symbols 41 shown in FIG. 53(8) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop display of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “454” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Further, at this time, the rotating effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Further, at this time, the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 is continuously performed. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300, when the number of pending memories stored in the RAM 203 is one, displays the pending number display 55 in the first area, and the second area different from the first area. The reserved image 52 is displayed in two areas. Furthermore, when the number of pending memories stored in the RAM 203 is plural, the pending number display 55 is displayed in the first area, and the pending image 52 is displayed in the third area different from the first area. Here, the first area is, for example, the display area of the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 . The second area is, for example, the display area of the first reserved image 52 . The third area is, for example, a display area for the second reserved image 52 .
In this case, an effect using the pending image 52 can be realized by using a wide display area, and the player can easily grasp the number of pending, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Variation production example 3]
FIG. 54 and FIG. 55 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. FIG. Variation production example 3 is a variation production executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variation production pattern" in FIG. When "ER4" is selected as this "fluctuation effect pattern", "N2" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach". executed. In addition, in the following description, points different from the above examples of variable effect will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as those of the above examples of variable effect may be omitted.

First, in this variable production example 3, the same production as the production described with reference to FIGS. 52(1) to 52(6) in the variable production example 2 is performed. That is, the variable display of the special symbols is started, and after the motion effects of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are started, the ready-to-win effect is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 54(1), the number "4" which is the left decorative design 41 and the number "4" which is the right decorative design 41 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(2), a transition image 64 is displayed. Also, at this time, the SP start non-display effect is started.
The transition image 64 is an image that notifies or suggests that the SP ready-to-win effect will be executed or that the SP ready-to-win effect will end. Here, although a predetermined image is displayed as the transition image 64 , it may be a monochrome image displayed over the entire image display area of the image display section 114 . For example, by displaying a white image as the transition image 64 on the image display unit 114, a so-called whiteout may be performed. Also, a so-called blackout may be executed by displaying a black image as the transition image 64 on the image display unit 114 .
The SP start non-display effect is a effect of not displaying the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 when the SP ready-to-win effect is started. In the SP start non-display effect, the transparency of the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 that have been displayed in the opaque display mode gradually increases, and then the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are hidden. . In the illustrated example, in the SP start non-display effect, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed in a translucent display mode.
Also, when the transition image 64 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden. At this time, both the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are positioned at the half-rotation position. Further, at this time, the motion effects of the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are continuously performed.

Next, the SP start non-display effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 54(3), the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are hidden. Along with this, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are ended.
Next, as shown in FIG. 54(4), the SP ready-to-win effect is started. At this time, the SP image 65 is displayed.
The SP image 65 is an image showing that the SP ready-to-win effect is being executed. This SP image 65 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini game.
When the SP ready-to-win effect is started, the left and right decorative symbols 41 move to the corners (upper left corner and upper right corner) of the image display area in the image display section 114 . The left and right decorative patterns 41 are smaller in display size and less decorative than the decorative patterns 41 displayed before the start of the SP ready-to-win production (see FIG. 54 (1)). .

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(5), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started. At this time, the SPSP image 66 is displayed.
The SPSP image 66 is an image showing that the SPSP ready-to-win effect is being executed. This SPSP image 66 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fight.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(6), the number "5", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a less decorative display mode and in a display size larger than the left and right decorative patterns 41 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 55(7), a transition image 64 is displayed. Also, at this time, the SP end display effect is started.
The SP end display effect is an effect of displaying the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 when the SP ready-to-win effect (SPSP ready-to-win effect) ends. In the SP end display effect, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 that have been hidden are displayed in an opaque display mode after gradually changing from a display mode with a high degree of transparency to a display mode with a low degree of transparency. be done. In the illustrated example, the change image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed in a translucent display mode in the SP end display effect.
When the SP end display effect is started, both the glossy image 51A and the aura image 51B of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are positioned at the initial positions. Also, at this time, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are started.

Next, the SP end display rendering ends, and as shown in FIG. 55(8), the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed in an opaque display mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 55(9), three highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped.

Then, along with the stop display of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 55(10), the three decorative symbols 41 are determined and stopped. Here, the combination “454” of the stationary decorative symbols 41 shown in FIG. 55(10) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop display of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “454” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Further, at this time, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 hides the information display when executing the special effect in the specific effect. Further, in the specific effect, the small pattern 56 is displayed regardless of whether or not the special effect is executed. Here, the specific effect is, for example, a ready-to-win effect. In addition, special effects include, for example, SP reach effects and SP SP reach effects.
In this case, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special performance while making the player aware that the special symbol is being variably displayed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 can display a predetermined information display that changes from the first display mode to a second display mode that is different from the first display mode. Then, the effect control unit 300 hides the information display in the second display mode when executing the special effect in the specific effect, and informs by the decorative pattern 41 that it is determined that the special game is not performed. In addition, the information display in the second display mode can be displayed again. Furthermore, in the specific effect, the small pattern 56 is displayed regardless of whether or not the special effect is executed. The first display mode is, for example, the normal display mode. Also, the second display mode is, for example, a blue display mode. The special game is, for example, a jackpot game.
In this case, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special performance while making the player aware that the special symbol is being variably displayed. Furthermore, by re-displaying the information display, the player can be made to recognize that the variable display of the special symbols has not ended, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 hides the information display when the special effect is executed in the specific effect, and hides the information display when the special effect is not executed in the specific effect. Sometimes it doesn't. Then, in the specific effect, the small pattern 56 is displayed regardless of whether or not the special effect is executed.
In this case, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special performance while making the player aware that the special symbol is being variably displayed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display the decorative pattern 41 changed from the first display mode to the second display mode when executing the special effect in the specific effect, and displays the information. It is possible to hide from the state in which the operation is displayed. Here, the first display mode is, for example, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 with high decorativeness. Further, the second display mode is a display mode of the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness.
In this case, the player can be made to concentrate on the special effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Variation production example 4]
FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. Variation production example 4 is a variation production executed when "EA2" is selected as the "variation production pattern" in FIG. When "EA2" is selected as this "fluctuation effect pattern", "N2" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach". executed. In addition, in the following explanation, points different from the above examples of variable production will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as those of the above examples of variable production may be omitted.

First, in this variable production example 4, the same production as the production described with reference to FIGS. 54(1) to 54(3) in the variable production example 3 is performed. That is, the variable display of the special symbol is started, and after the motion effects of the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are started, the ready-to-win effect is started, then the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are hidden, and the SP ready-to-win effect is produced. is started. In this case, the SP image 65 is displayed as shown in FIG. 56(1).
Next, as shown in FIG. 56(2), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started. At this time, the SPSP image 66 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(3), the double stitch decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a combination of "444" to inform the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. Also, at this time, the display size of the decorative pattern 41 is larger than that during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 56(2)). Also, at this time, the small pattern 56 maintains the state in which three patterns are variably displayed. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are maintained in a non-display state. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(4), the promotion promotion effect is started.
The promotion-inciting production is a production inciting whether or not a player is to be promoted. Here, the promotion is a decoration that informs or suggests that the game state will be more advantageous for the player after temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41 that informs or suggests that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big win. It is an effect to change to the pattern 41. In the illustrated example, a button operation image 67 is displayed as the promotion promotion effect.
The button operation image 67 is an image prompting the player to operate the effect button 161 . By displaying this button operation image 67 , the player can recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 161 . In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect button 161 is displayed as the button operation image 67 . Note that when the button operation image 67 is displayed, an effective period suggesting image that suggests the effective period of the operation of the effect button 161 may be displayed together with the button operation image 67 . Then, when the effective period of operation of the effect button 161 expires, the effective period suggestion image may be hidden.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 67 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 56(5), the decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the combination of "444". In other words, as a result of the performance inciting promotion, the player is not promoted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 56(6), the light emitting effect using the double-sided decorative pattern 41 is started. In the illustrated example, as the lighting effect, a lighting effect is performed in which a double eye light emitting image 68 is displayed around each display area in the double eye decoration pattern 41 .
The double eyes light-emitting image 68 is an image that the player sees as if the double eyes decorative pattern 41 that is temporarily stopped is emitting light. The double eye emission image 68 is, for example, an image imitating light. The double eye emission image 68 may be displayed in any color. Also, the double eye luminous image 68 may be displayed on the whole or part of the area where each of the double eye decorative patterns 41 is displayed. The time for which the double eye emission image 68 is displayed is, for example, 2.5 seconds. That is, the execution time of the light emitting effect using the double-sided decorative pattern 41 is longer than the rotation period of the rotating effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 .

Then, along with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 57(7). The combination "444" of the numbers of this decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In addition, "444" is stopped and displayed as the small pattern 56. - 特許庁That is, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "444". Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are maintained in a non-display state. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the specific effect, when the special effect is executed, the information display is hidden, and the information display is displayed after the decorative pattern 41 notifies that the special game is determined to be performed. may not be. Then, in the specific effect, the small pattern 56 is displayed regardless of whether or not the special effect is executed.
In this case, the player is made to pay attention to the special performance while making the player aware that the special symbols are being variably displayed, and furthermore, the decorative symbols 41 for informing the player that it is determined that the big winning game will be played are given to the player. It is possible to attract attention and improve the amusement of the game.

[Variation production example 5]
FIGS. 58 to 60 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 5) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. FIG. Variation production example 5 is a variation production executed when "EB3" is selected as the "variation production pattern" in FIG. When "EB3" is selected as this "fluctuation effect pattern", "N2" is executed as "normal", "SP2" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP2" is executed as "SPSP reach". executed. In addition, in the following description, points different from the above examples of variable effect will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as those of the above examples of variable effect may be omitted.

First, in this variable production example 5, the same production as the production described with reference to FIGS. 54(1) to 54(3) in the variable production example 3 is performed. That is, after the variable display of the special symbol is started and the motion effect of the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 is started, the ready-to-win effect is started, then the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are hidden, and the SP ready-to-win effect is produced. is started. In this case, the SP image 65 is displayed as shown in FIG. 58(1).
Next, as shown in FIG. 58(2), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started. At this time, the SPSP image 66 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(3), the number "5", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58(4), a transitional image 64 is displayed. Also, at this time, the SP end display effect is started. At this time, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed again. Both the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed in a translucent display mode. Further, at this time, both the glossy image 51A and the aura image 51B of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are positioned at the initial positions. Further, at this time, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are started.

Next, the SP end display effect ends. At this time, as shown in FIG. 58(5), the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed in an opaque display mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58(6), three highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped. Further, at this time, the rotation effect and partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(7), the resurrection effect is started. Also, at this time, the resurrection non-display effect is started.
The resurrection performance is a performance of displaying the decorative pattern 41 informing that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big hit after temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41 informing that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a loss. be. In the illustrated example, a resurrection image 69 is displayed in the resurrection effect. The resurrection image 69 is an image that notifies or suggests that a resurrection effect is being performed.
The resurrection non-display effect is a resurrection effect in which the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed when the resurrection effect is performed. In the resurrection non-display effect, the transparency of the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 displayed in the opaque display mode gradually increases, and then the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are hidden. In the illustrated example, in the resurrection non-display effect, the variable image 51 and the suspended image 52 are displayed in a translucent display mode.
When the restoration non-display effect is started, both the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are positioned at the half-rotation position. Also, at this time, the aura image 51B of the variation image 51 is positioned at the left tilt position. Further, at this time, the rotation effect and partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed.

Next, the resurrection non-display effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 59(8), the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are hidden. Along with this, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are ended. Also, at this time, the light emission effect is started. In the illustrated example, the display of the resurrection light emitting image 70 is performed as the light emitting effect.
The resurrection light-emitting image 70 is an image that appears to the player as if the resurrection image 69 is emitting light. In the illustrated example, the resurrection luminescent image 70 is displayed around the display area of the resurrection image 69 . The resurrection luminescent image 70 is, for example, an image imitating light. The resurrection luminescent image 70 may be displayed in any color. Also, the resurrection light-emitting image 70 may be displayed in the whole or part of the area where the resurrection image 69 is displayed. The time during which the resurrection light-emitting image 70 is displayed is, for example, 3 seconds. That is, the execution time of the light emission effect using the resurrection image 69 is longer than the rotation period of the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(9), the double stitch decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a combination of "444" to inform the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are maintained in a non-display state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 59(10), promotion-inviting effect is started. A button operation image 67 is displayed in the promotion promotion effect.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 67 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. In this way, the player is informed that the promotion has been performed by displaying the decorative symbols 41 in the combination of "777". Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are maintained in a non-display state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (12), the light emitting effect using the double-sided decorative pattern 41 is started. In the illustrated example, as the lighting effect, a lighting effect is performed in which a double eye light emitting image 68 is displayed around each display area in the double eye decoration pattern 41 .
Then, along with the stop display of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 60 (13), the decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. The number combination "777" of this decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In addition, "777" is stop-displayed as the small pattern 56. - 特許庁That is, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "777". Also, at this time, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are maintained in a non-display state. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the specific effect, when the special effect is executed, the information display is hidden, and after the notification by the decorative pattern 41 in the mode in which it is determined that the special game is not performed, the information display is performed. is displayed, the information display may be hidden when the decorative pattern 41 notifies that it is determined that the special game will be played. Then, in the specific effect, the small pattern 56 is displayed regardless of whether or not the special effect is executed.
In this case, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special effect while making the player aware that the special symbol is being variably displayed. Further, by redisplaying the information display, the player can be made to recognize that the variable display of the special symbols has not ended. Furthermore, by hiding the information display after that, the decorative pattern 41 for notifying that the big win game is determined can be focused on by the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Variation production example 6]
FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 6) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. Variation production example 6 is a variation production executed when "EB5" is selected as the "variation production pattern" in FIG. When "EB5" is selected as this "fluctuation effect pattern", "N3" is executed as "normal". In addition, in the following description, points different from the above examples of variable effect will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as those of the above examples of variable effect may be omitted.

First, in this variable production example 6, the same production as the production described in the variable production example 2 with reference to FIGS. 52(1) to 52(6) is performed. That is, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the motion effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is started, and then the ready-to-win effect is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 61(1), the number "4" which is the left decorative design 41 and the number "4" which is the right decorative design 41 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(2), a temporary stop effect is performed.
The temporary stop appealing effect is an effect for asking whether or not the middle decorative pattern 41 having the same number as the left and right decorative patterns 41 is to be temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the number "4", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, moves in the display area of the image display section 114 from the upper side toward the central portion while gradually slowing down in the temporary stop effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(3), the number "4", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped, so that the decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a combination of "444". Also, at this time, both the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed. Further, at this time, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(4), a promotion promotion effect is performed. A button operation image 67 is displayed in the promotion promotion effect. Also, at this time, the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a less decorative display mode.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 67 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. By displaying the decorative symbols 41 in the combination of "777" in this way, the player is informed that the promotion has been performed. Also, at this time, both the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed. Further, at this time, the rotation effect and partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(6), the lighting effect using the double-sided decorative pattern 41 is started. In the illustrated example, as the lighting effect, a lighting effect is performed in which a double eye light emitting image 68 is displayed around each display area in the double eye decoration pattern 41 .
Then, along with the stop display of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 62(7), the decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. The number combination "777" of this decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In addition, "777" is stop-displayed as the small pattern 56. - 特許庁That is, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "777". Also, at this time, both the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed. Further, at this time, the rotation effect and partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops.

[Variation production example 7]
FIG. 63 and FIG. 64 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 7) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. Variation production example 7 is a variation production executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation production pattern" in FIG. When "ER1" is selected as this "fluctuation effect pattern", effects such as "normal" are not executed. In addition, variation production example 7 is an example of variation production of the decorative pattern 41 in the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state. In addition, in the following explanation, points different from the above examples of variable production will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as those of the above examples of variable production may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 63(1), the effect control unit 300 stops and displays the previous special symbol, and the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114. and Also, in the illustrated example, an image with the theme of the sea is displayed as the stage image 61 . That is, the stage in the example 7 of variation production is different from the stages in the examples 1 to 6 of variation production. The decorativeness of the decorative pattern 41 is different between this stage and the stages in the variable production example 1 to the variable production example 6. FIG. Also at this stage, the reserved image 52 has the shape of a cross. In the illustrated example, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52 and the fourth reserved image 52 are all positioned at predetermined initial positions. Further, the small patterns 56 are displayed in the same display mode in this stage and the stages in the example 1 to example 6 of the variable effect. At this time, the small pattern 56 is stopped and displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates "4", which is the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121. FIG. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped. Also, at this time, the sub first suspension display 83 is displaying "4".

Then, when the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the variable display of the next special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 63(2), the variable display of the small symbol 56 is started. be. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 switches from "4" to "3". Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Also, at this time, the first sub-reservation display 83 displays "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(3), the shift effect is started. Also, at this time, the overall swing effect is started.
The overall swing effect, which is an example of the action effect, is a effect in which the entire variable image 51 or the entire reserved image 52 is shaken. In the illustrated example, the holding image 52 continues to swing left and right in the overall swing effect. Further, the whole swing effect is started from a state where the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are positioned at the initial positions. When the whole swing effect is started, the moving image 51 and the pending image 52 first start swinging to the right.
When the whole swing effect starts, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 are all positioned at non-initial positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(4), the decorative pattern 41 starts to change. Also, at this time, the enlargement effect is started.
Next, the shift effect and the enlargement effect are finished, and as shown in FIG. 63(5), the variable image 51, the first pending image 52, the second pending image 52 and the third pending image 52 are displayed. . Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed at high speed. Also, at this time, the moving image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all positioned at the right tilt position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63(6), the overall swing effect is continuously performed. At this time, the moving image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all positioned at the left tilt position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(7), the overall swing effect is continuously performed. At this time, the moving image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 all reach the initial positions. That is, one reciprocating motion of the entire motion effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is completed. Here, the time required for one reciprocating swing motion in the overall swing effect, that is, the period of the swing motion in the overall swing effect is, for example, two seconds. That is, the swing period in the whole swing effect is the same as the rotation period in the rotation effect (see (3) in FIG. 46).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(8), the three decorative designs 41 are temporarily stopped. At this time, around the display area of the left decorative design 41, around the display area of the middle decorative design 41, and around the display area of the right decorative design 41, the light emitting image 62 at stop is displayed. Also, at this time, the overall swing effect of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed.

Then, along with the stop display of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 64(9), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. Here, the combination "412" of the decorative symbols 41 stopped and displayed shown in FIG. 64(9) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop display of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “412” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, the overall swing effect of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops.

[Variation production example 8]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 8) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIG. This variation production example 8 is a variation production example of the decorative pattern 41 in the high probability time saving game state. In addition, variation production example 8 is an example of variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. In addition, in the following explanation, mainly the points that are different from the above examples of variable production will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as the above examples of variable production may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 65(1), the effect control section 300 stops and displays the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is confirmed and stopped in the image display section 114. It is assumed that there is Also, as the stage image 61, an image with the theme of the sky is displayed. A right-handed image 71 is also displayed on the image display section 114 . The right shot image 71 is an image for prompting the player to shoot a game ball to the right area of the game area 111 . Further, as the reserved image 52, an image simulating a flame is displayed. In the illustrated example, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52 and the fourth reserved image 52 are all positioned at predetermined initial positions. Further, in the variable effect example 8 and the variable effect examples 1 to 7, the small pattern 56 is displayed in the same display mode. At this time, the small pattern 56 is stopped and displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates "0", which is the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 121, and the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 2 indicates "4", which is the pending number of winnings to the starting port 122. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-second variable display 82 is stopped. Also, at this time, the sub-second holding display 84 is displaying "4".

Then, when the pending number of winnings to the second starting port 122 is subtracted and the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the variable display of the small symbol 56 is started as shown in FIG. 65(2). be. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 switches from "4" to "3". Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-second variable display 82 is started. Also, at this time, the second sub display 84 displays "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(3), the shift effect is started. Also, at this time, a rotating effect is started. In the illustrated example, the holding image 52 continues to rotate clockwise in the rotation effect. When the rotation effect is started, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 are all positioned at non-initial positions in the rotation direction. will come to

Next, the shift effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. 65(4), the variation image 51, the first pending image 52, the second pending image 52 and the third pending image 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed at high speed. Also, at this time, the moving image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all positioned at the half-rotation position.

Then, along with the stop display of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 65(5), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. Here, the combination "758" of the stationary decorative symbols 41 shown in FIG. 65(5) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop display of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “758” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, the rotation effects of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are continuously performed. Also, at this time, the moving image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 all reach the initial positions. That is, one rotation in the rotation rendering of the pending image 52 is completed. Here, the time required for one rotation in the rotation production in this high probability time saving game state, that is, the cycle of rotation in the rotation production in the high probability time saving game state is, for example, 2 seconds. That is, the cycle of rotation in the rotation performance in the high probability time-saving gaming state is the same as the cycle of rotation in the rotation performance in the low probability time-saving non-playing state and the swing cycle in the entire swing performance. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-second variable display 82 stops.

In addition, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, after the start of one fluctuation production, before the operation for one cycle in the operation production is performed, this one fluctuation production ends. You may make it Then, even in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, in the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is performed, the motion for one cycle or more in the motion performance may be performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display the pending image 52 in the first display mode in the first effect mode, and display the pending image 52 in the second display mode in the second effect mode. It is possible to display it by a display mode. Further, the effect control unit 300 can operatively display the pending image 52 in the first display mode in the first period, and can operatively display the pending image 52 in the second display mode in the second period. be. The first period and the second period are the same time. Here, examples of the first effect mode include a predetermined stage, a predetermined game state, and the like. Further, the second effect mode includes, for example, a stage different from the first effect mode, a game state different from the first effect mode, and the like.
In this case, the second display mode can prevent the player from misunderstanding that it is the display mode after the suspension change effect using the suspension image 52 of the first display mode, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 completes the operation cycle in the action effect of the pending image 52 in the first effect mode and the operation cycle in the action effect of the pending image 52 in the second effect mode. , but not limited to.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may make the cycle of the action in the action effect of the pending image 52 in the first effect mode substantially the same as the cycle of the action in the action effect of the pending image 52 in the second effect mode. . That is, the cycle of the motion in the action rendering of the pending image 52 in the first rendering mode and the cycle of the motion in the motion rendering of the pending image 52 in the second rendering mode are not limited to be exactly the same.

[Variation production example 9]
FIG. 66 and FIG. 67 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 9) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. Variation production example 9 is a variation production executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation production pattern" in FIG. When "ER1" is selected as this "fluctuation effect pattern", effects such as "normal" are not executed. In addition, in the variation production example 9, the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after the power supply is interrupted during the variation production. In addition, in the following explanation, points different from the above examples of variable production will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as those of the above examples of variable production may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 66(1), the effect control unit 300 stops and displays the previous special symbol, and the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114. and Also, at this time, in the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A is at the predetermined initial position. is displayed. Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 . Also, at this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218 is displayed as "4" corresponding to the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped. Also, at this time, the sub first suspension display 83 is displaying "4".

Next, when the number of pending prizes to the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the next special symbol variable display is started, the first special symbol pending display 218 is shown in FIG. 66(2). is displayed as "3". Also, at this time, the cycle variation of the special symbols is started in the first special symbol display 221 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(3), the variable display of the small pattern 56 is started. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 switches from "4" to "3". Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Also, at this time, the first sub-reservation display 83 displays "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(4), the shift effect is started. Also, at this time, the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 is started.
Next, the shift effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. 66(5), the variation image 51, the first pending image 52, the second pending image 52 and the third pending image 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed at high speed.

When the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 66(6). Also, at this time, the LED in the first special symbol reservation display device 218 and the LED in the first special symbol display device 221 are extinguished. Also, at this time, the LED in the first sub variable display 81 and the LED in the first sub holding display 83 are extinguished.

Next, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, as shown in FIG. 67(7), the first special symbol reservation display 218 indicates the number of reservations for winning the first start port 121, which is "3". display. Also, at this time, the cycle variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 221 is restarted. On the other hand, at this time, the LED in the sub-first variable display 81 and the LED in the sub-first holding display 83 are kept off. Also, at this time, an image 72 during restoration is displayed. The restoring image 72 is an image that notifies that the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is being restored. In the illustrated example, the text "Restoring" is displayed as the restoration-in-progress image 72 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(8), the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is resumed. Also, the first sub-hold display 83 displays "3".
Then, along with the stop display of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 67(9), the number "123" which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 is fixed and stopped. The number "123" is a number displayed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off and then restored. In addition, the small symbols 56 are stopped and displayed along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “123” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, the three pending images 52 are displayed again. Also, at this time, the rotation effect of the three reserved images 52 is restarted. This rotation effect is restarted from the state where the glossy images 52A of the three reserved images 52 are all positioned at the initial positions. Further, the cycle of rotation in this rotation effect is the same as the cycle of rotation in the rotation effect performed before the pachinko gaming machine 100 was powered off. Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 . Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation control section 233 performs the cycle variation in the first cycle as the special symbol variation display, and then stops and displays the special symbol. Also, the effect control unit 300 can display the pending image 52 in the second cycle. The first cycle and the second cycle are different times.
In this case, if the cycle variation of the special symbols and the operation display of the pending image 52 are interlocked, misunderstanding by the player is suppressed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after the power is cut off, the operation display of the pending image 52 after the cycle display of the special symbol is started It is viable.
In this case, the player may misunderstand that the cycle variation of the special symbols has started due to the operation display of the reserved image 52 even before the cycle variation of the special symbols is started after the power is restored. can be suppressed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect in the variable effect example.
Next, a modification of the effect in the variable effect example described above will be described.
In the example of the variable effect described above, as the action effect at the time of display, an effect is performed in which the pending image 52 moves from the lower side to the upper side of the pending pedestal (see FIG. 49 (19)). Action effects are not limited to the above effects.

For example, when the pending number is added, as the display operation effect, as shown in FIG. 68(1), the effect of gradually enlarging and displaying the newly displayed third pending image 52 with a small display size is performed. may be broken. Then, when the display operation effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 68(2), the newly displayed third pending image 52 is displayed in the same display size as the already displayed pending image 52. can be

(Modification 2)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect in the variable effect example.
Next, another modified example (modified example 2) of the effect in the variable effect example described above will be described.
In the above-described variation effect example, at the timing when the pending image 52 is newly displayed, the motion display of the pending image 52 already displayed and the motion display of the newly displayed pending image 52 are synchronized (Fig. 49 ( 20)), but is not limited to this.

For example, as shown in FIG. 69(1), when the third pending image 52 is newly displayed, the glossy image 52A is placed at the initial position regardless of the position of the glossy image 52A in the pending image 52 already displayed. The third pending image 52 may be displayed in the state of being positioned at . Then, the rotation effect of the newly displayed third pending image 52 is started. The positions of the images 52 in the rotational direction are not aligned. That is, at the timing when the pending image 52 is newly displayed, the operation display of the already displayed pending image 52 and the operation display of the newly displayed pending image 52 are not synchronized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(2), the three decorative designs 41 are temporarily stopped. At this time, the rotating effect of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Also, at this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are all positioned at the initial positions. On the other hand, the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 is positioned at the non-initial position.

Then, along with the stop display of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 69(3), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. Further, at this time, the rotation effect of any of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Also, at this time, the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 is different from the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52. Directional misalignment.

Next, a stop non-display effect is performed, and as shown in FIG. 69(4), the variable image 51 is hidden. Also, at this time, the rotation effect of any of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Also, at this time, the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 is not aligned in the rotational direction with the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52 and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 69(5), the rotation effect of any of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52 and the third reserved image 52 is interrupted. At this time, as the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52, the reserved image 52 in which the glossy image 52A is positioned at the initial position is displayed.

Then, when the number of pending prizes to the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the variable display of the small symbol 56 is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(6), the shift effect is started, and the rotation effects of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52 and the third reserved image 52 are resumed. At this time, the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 is aligned with the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52 in the rotational direction. That is, at this timing, the motion display of the first pending image 52 and the motion display of the third pending image 52 are synchronized. Thus, the timing at which the action display of the already displayed pending image 52 and the action display of the newly displayed pending image 52 are synchronized is not limited to the timing at which the pending image 52 is newly displayed.

(Modification 3)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect in the variable effect example.
Next, another modified example (modified example 3) of the effect in the variable effect example described above will be described.
In the variable effect example described above, it is explained that the pending image 52 is not displayed in motion when the motion effect of the pending image 52 is interrupted (see (12) in FIG. 47), but the present invention is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 70(1), even after the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped, the stop non-display effect is completed and the variable image 51 is hidden, the rotation effect of the pending image 52 is continued. ing.
Next, when the number of pending prizes to the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the variable display of the next special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 70(2), the variable display of the small symbol 56 is started. be done. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 switches from "3" to "2". Also, at this time, the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(3), the shift effect is started. In the illustrated example, as the shift effect, an effect is performed in which the holding image 52 moves while rotating in a direction different from the rotation direction in the rotation effect. During execution of this shift effect, the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 is interrupted.
Then, when the shift effect ends, the rotating effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is resumed. In this case, the rotation effect is restarted from a state where both the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are positioned at the initial positions. In this way, while the action rendering of the pending image 52 is suspended, the pending image 52 may be displayed in an action mode different from the action rendering.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 71 and FIG. 72 are diagrams showing a modification of the effect in the variable effect example.
Next, another modified example (modified example 4) of the effect in the variable effect example described above will be described.
In the example of the variable effect described above, it will be explained that the period of motion in the motion effect is the same before the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and after the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is restored after being cut off. However, it is not limited to this.

For example, as shown in FIG. 71(1), the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are variably displayed at high speed. At this time, the rotating effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is performed. The period of rotation in this rotation effect is, for example, two seconds.

Next, the display mode of the third pending image 52 changes from the normal display mode to the blinking display mode by performing the suspension change effect. This third pending image 52 displayed in the blinking display mode performs a rotating effect and a blinking effect.
A blinking effect as an example of an action effect includes a lighting state in which the variable image 51 and the holding image 52 appear to be lit (see FIG. 71 (2)) and a light-out state in which the variable image 51 and the holding image 52 appear to be lit (see FIG. 71). (3)) is alternately repeated. In the blinking effect, the time required for the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 to turn on again after being turned off, ie, the blinking cycle in the blinking effect is, for example, 0.5 seconds. That is, the blinking cycle in the blinking effect is shorter than the rotation cycle in the rotating effect. Also, the display in the blinking effect of the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 is an example of the action display. In other words, the “action display” includes not only a display in which the display area of the variable image 51 and the suspended image 52 changes over time, but also a display in which the variable image 51 and the suspended image 52 are displayed in a predetermined display area, such as a blinking effect. A display in which the display mode of the image 52 changes over time is also included.

Next, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 71(4). Also, at this time, the LED in the first sub variable display 81 and the LED in the first sub holding display 83 are extinguished.
Next, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, a restoration-in-progress image 72 is displayed as shown in FIG. 71(5). Also, the variable display on the first sub variable display 81 is resumed. Also, the first sub-hold display 83 displays "3".

Then, along with the stop display of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 71(6), the numbers "123", which are the three decorative symbols 41 with high decorativeness, are confirmed and stopped. In addition, the small symbols 56 are stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbols. Also, at this time, the three pending images 52 are displayed again. At this time, the third pending image 52 displayed in the blinking display mode is in a lighting state. Also, at this time, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops.

Then, the number of pending prizes to the first starting port 121 is subtracted, and the next special symbol is started to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, when the shift effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 72(7), the variation image 51, the first pending image 52 and the second pending image 52 are displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 is started. In addition, a rotating effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is performed. The cycle of rotation in this rotation effect is 2 seconds. Also, a blinking effect of the second pending image 52 is performed. The flashing cycle in this flashing effect is, for example, two seconds. That is, after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off and restored, the blinking cycle in the blinking effect is longer than before the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shut off. Also, the variable display on the first sub variable display 81 is started. Also, the first sub display 83 "2" is displayed.

As described above, in the modification 4, the effect control unit 300, after the pachinko game machine 100 is powered off and then restored, compared to before the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off, operation in the action effect lengthens the cycle of
A player may be able to restart the game after the pachinko game machine 100 is powered off and restored, but the player may feel uneasy about the pachinko game machine 100 being powered off. In this case, if the period of the action in the action effect is shortened and the effect that arouses the player is performed, there is a possibility that the player's anxiety will increase. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the pachinko game machine 100 is powered off and then restored, the cycle of the action in the action effect is lengthened to limit the effect that agitates the player, thereby restarting the game. It prevents people's anxiety from growing.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control section 300 starts the action effect before starting the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 46(3)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control section 300 may start the action effect when starting the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 . Also, the action effect may be started after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 has explained that the action effect is started after starting the variable display of the small pattern 56 (see FIG. 46(3)), but the variable display of the small pattern 56 is started. You may start the action production when you do.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300, after updating the display content of the pending number display 55 according to the decrease in the pending number (see FIG. 46 (3)) explained that the action effect is started, When updating the display content of the pending number display 55, the action effect may be started.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case where the pending image 52 is newly displayed, the effect control unit 300 starts the operation effect of the newly displayed pending image 52 when ending the increased display effect (FIG. 49 ( 20)), but is not limited to this.
For example, when the pending image 52 is newly displayed, the effect control unit 300 may start the operation effect of the newly displayed pending image 52 during execution of the increase display effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 interrupts the motion effect after the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped (see (12) in FIG. 47), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may interrupt the action effect when the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped. Also, the action effect may be interrupted before the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped.

Also, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 interrupts the motion effect after stopping and displaying the small symbol 56 (see (12) in FIG. 47), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control section 300 may interrupt the action effect when the small pattern 56 is stopped and displayed. Also, the action effect may be interrupted before the small pattern 56 is stop-displayed.

Also, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 interrupts the motion effect of the pending image 52 after hiding the variable image 51 (see FIG. 47(12)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may interrupt the motion effect of the pending image 52 when the variable image 51 is hidden. Also, the action rendering of the pending image 52 may be interrupted before the variable image 51 is hidden.

Also, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 interrupts the action effect of the pending image 52 before starting the shift effect (see (12) in FIG. 47), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may interrupt the action effect of the pending image 52 when starting the shift effect. Also, the action rendering of the pending image 52 may be interrupted during execution of the shift rendering. Also, the action rendering of the pending image 52 may be interrupted when the shift rendering ends. Furthermore, the motion effect of the pending image 52 may be interrupted after the shift effect is finished.

Also, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 has explained that the shift effect is started before starting the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 46(3)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control section 300 may start the shift effect when starting the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 . Further, the shift effect may be started after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are times when the action effect of the reserved image 52 is not performed after the action effect of the reserved image 52 is interrupted until it is resumed (see FIG. 47 (12)). Not limited.
For example, the effect control unit 300 interrupts the action effect being executed for the displayed pending image 52, and at the same time, starts rotating effect from the state where the pending image 52 is positioned at the initial position. may That is, the “interruption” of the action display of the pending image 52 may be any interruption of the periodic action display that was in progress. There may be no time when the motion presentation of the image 52 is not performed.

Also, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 ends the action effect of the variable image 51 after starting the stop/non-display effect (see (11) in FIG. 47), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control section 300 may end the motion effect of the variable image 51 when starting the stop/non-display effect. Also, the action effect of the variable image 51 may be ended before the stop non-display effect is started.

Also, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 changes the transparency of the variable image 51 in the stop/non-display effect (see (10) in FIG. 47), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the stop non-display effect, the effect control section 300 may hide the variable image 51 after gradually reducing the display size of the variable image 51 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the one reserved image 52 and the other reserved image 52 (see FIG. 48 (17)) having different display modes have a period of some operations (for example, rotation in the rotation effect of each other). Although described as being the same, it is not limited to this. One reserved image 52 and another reserved image 52 having different display modes may not perform actions with the same period in the action effect.

Also, the timing at which the effect control unit 300 synchronizes the motion display of the plurality of pending images 52 is not limited to the examples described above.
An example of the timing at which the effect control unit 300 synchronizes the action display of the plurality of pending images 52 will be described. When one reserved image 52 that is executing an action effect is positioned at a non-initial position, another reserved image 52 may be newly displayed in a state of being positioned at an initial position. In this case, the newly displayed other pending image 52 does not perform the action effect until the already displayed one pending image 52 reaches the initial position. Then, at the timing when the already displayed one reserved image 52 reaches the initial position, the newly displayed another reserved image 52 performs an action presentation together with the already displayed one reserved image 52.例文帳に追加In this manner, the motion display of another newly displayed pending image 52 may be synchronized with the motion display of the one already displayed pending image 52 .
Further, for example, the effect control unit 300 may synchronize the action display of the newly displayed pending image 52 with the action display of the already displayed pending image 52 during execution of the increased display effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 starts the SP start non-display effect when displaying the transition image 64 (see FIG. 54(2)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may start the SP start non-display effect before displaying the transition image 64 . Also, the SP start non-display effect may be started after the transition image 64 is displayed. Also, the SP start non-display effect may be started when the SP ready-to-win effect is started. Also, the SP start non-display effect may be started after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 hides the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 in the SP ready-to-win effect so that the player cannot visually recognize the variable image 51 and the pending image 52. , but not limited to.
For example, the effect control unit 300 displays the changing image 51 and the pending image 52 in a layer lower than the layer in which the SP image 65 and the transition image 64 are displayed, among the plurality of layers of the image display unit 114. , viewing of the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 by the player may be restricted. A lower layer is a layer on the rear side when the player views the pachinko gaming machine 100 from the front. Moreover, in the SP ready-to-win effect, the effect control unit 300 may continuously perform the action effect of the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 . In this case, when the SP image 65 and the transition image 64 are hidden and the player can visually recognize the changing image 51 and the reserved image 52, the changing image 51 and the reserved image 52 are positioned at the non-initial positions. I have been That is, when the player becomes able to visually recognize the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 again after the SP ready-to-win effect ends, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 do not have to be positioned at the initial position.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 prevents (hides) the player from visually recognizing the changing image 51 and the pending image 52 while the transition image 64 is being displayed (see FIG. 54(3)). , but not limited to.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may make the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 invisible to the player (not displayed) before the transition image 64 is displayed. Further, when the SP ready-to-win effect is started, the player may not be able to visually recognize the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 (non-display). Further, after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect, the player may not be able to visually recognize the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 (non-display).

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 hides the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 when performing the SP ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 54(4)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the SP ready-to-win effect is performed, the pending image 52 may be hidden while the variable image 51 may not be hidden. Further, when the SP ready-to-win effect is performed, the variable image 51 may be hidden while the pending image 52 may not be hidden. Further, when the SP ready-to-win effect is performed, neither the variable image 51 nor the pending image 52 may be hidden. In this case, the action effect of the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 that are not hidden may be continued. That is, the effect control unit 300 may change the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 when executing the specific effect, but may not change the operation display of the information display. In this case, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special symbols are being variably displayed while making the player pay attention to the specific effect, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 starts the SP end display effect when displaying the transition image 64 (see FIG. 55(7)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may start the SP end display effect after displaying the transition image 64 . Further, after the display of the transition image 64, when displaying the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 55(9)), the SP end display effect may be started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 displays the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 in an opaque display mode after displaying the transition image 64 (see FIG. 55(8)). It is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may display the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 in an opaque display mode when displaying the transition image 64 .

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300, in the variation effect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, when the double decorative pattern 41 is displayed first (see FIG. 56 (3)) Although the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the performance control section 300 may display a variable image 51 or a pending image 52 when the second decorative pattern 41 is displayed first in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. Then, for example, when the promotion effect is being executed (see (4) in FIG. 56), the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 may be hidden. In addition, for example, in a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the variation image 51 and the pending image 52 are not hidden until the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, and the decorative pattern 41 is changed when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped. The image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be hidden.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 hides the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 while executing the resurrection effect (see FIG. 59(8)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 displays the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 when executing the resurrection effect, and then, when displaying the second decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 59 (9)) , the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 may be hidden. Further, for example, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are not hidden during and after the execution of the resurrection effect, and the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed when executing the promotion effect after that (see FIG. 59 (10)). You can hide it. Further, for example, even when executing the resurrection effect, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are not hidden until the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable image 51 and the suspended image 52 are not hidden when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped. The reserved image 52 may be hidden. Further, for example, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 may be hidden during execution of the resurrection effect, and the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 may be displayed again after the resurrection effect is completed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 does not hide the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 when the SP ready-to-win effect is not performed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (Fig. 61(3)), but is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 does not hide the variable image 51 or the pending image 52 at the timing of displaying the double decorative pattern 41 first (see FIG. 61 (3)), and then displays the variable image 51 or the pending image. 52 may be hidden. Further, for example, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may not be hidden until the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be hidden when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shut off and then restored, the effect control unit 300 displays the variable display on the first sub-variable display device 81 after starting the display of the image 72 during recovery. is restarted (see FIG. 67(8)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shut off and then restored, the effect control unit 300 may start displaying the image 72 during restoration after resuming the variable display on the first sub variable display 81. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shut off and then restored, the production control unit 300 starts displaying the image 72 during restoration, and the number of reservations in the sub-first reservation display 83 (see FIG. 67(8)) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off and then restored, the effect control unit 300 restarts the display of the number of reservations on the first sub-reservation display 83, and then starts displaying the image 72 during restoration. may

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300, after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off and then restored, compared to before the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shut off, the blinking cycle in the blinking effect lengthened. Here, after the pachinko game machine 100 is powered off and then restored, the effect mode for making the operation cycle in the action effect longer than before the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off is the above example. is not limited to
For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off and then restored while the blinking effect is being performed with a blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds by the hold image 52 in the blinking display mode, the blinking display mode Instead of the reserved image 52, the reserved image 52 in the normal display mode may be displayed. After that, the holding image 52 in the normal display mode performs an action presentation with an action cycle of 2 seconds. In this way, after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off and then restored, the cycle of the action in the action performance may be longer than before the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is switched off.

Also, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 has explained that the enlargement effect is started during execution of the shift effect (see (4) in FIG. 46), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may start the enlargement effect when starting the shift effect. Also, the enlargement effect may be ended before the shift effect is ended.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300, in the shift effect, moves the reserved image 52 to the display area of the variable image 51 by moving one reserved image 52 to the display area of the other reserved image 52 . Although it is the same as the movement mode when moving to, it is not limited to this.
For example, in the shift effect, the effect control unit 300 changes the operation of the pending image 52 when moving the pending image 52 to the display area of the variable image 51 by moving one pending image 52 to the display area of the other pending image 52. It may be different from the action of the one hold image 52 when it is turned on. Further, in the shift effect, the moving direction of the reserved image 52 when moving the reserved image 52 to the display area of the variable image 51 is changed to the direction of movement of the reserved image 52 when moving the reserved image 52 to the display area of the other reserved image 52. The moving direction of the reserved image 52 may be different. That is, in the shift effect, the movement mode when moving the reserved image 52 to the display area of the variable image 51 is different from the movement mode when moving one reserved image 52 to the display area of the other reserved image 52. may

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 moves the pending image 52 in the opaque display mode in the shift effect (see FIG. 46 (3)). You may move by a certain display mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 hides the decorative pattern 41 while displaying the transition image 64 (see FIG. 54(2)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control section 300 may display the decorative pattern 41 in a less decorative manner and in a smaller display size while the transition image 64 is being displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 makes the action in the action effect of the variable image 51 the same as the action in the action effect of the pending image 52, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may make the action in the action effect of the variable image 51 different from the action in the action effect of the pending image 52 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 variably displays the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 46(5)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
The effect control unit 300 may, for example, variably display the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 by horizontal scrolling (scrolling in the horizontal direction). Moreover, the effect control section 300 may variably display by updating the numbers displayed as the decorative patterns 41 and the small patterns 56 without scrolling the decorative patterns 41 and the small patterns 56 . The switching display of the small patterns 56 includes a variable display in which the small patterns 56 are scrolled and a display in which the numbers displayed as the small patterns 56 are updated without scrolling the small patterns 56 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 displays the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 in different shapes for each game state or stage.
Here, the effect control section 300 may display the variable image 51 and the pending image 52, which are in a display mode different from the normal display mode, in a common mode regardless of the game state or stage.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 sets the start timing of the pending change effect to the timing when the pending image 52 is positioned at the initial position (see FIG. 48 (16)), but is not limited to this. . The effect control unit 300 may set the start timing of the pending change effect to the timing at which the pending image 52 is in a specific motion mode in the motion effect, and may not be the timing at which the pending image 52 is positioned at the initial position. . Further, the effect control unit 300 may start the pending change effect regardless of the mode of the action mode in the action effect of the pending image 52 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 displays the variable image 51 and the pending image 52, which are display modes different from the normal display mode, by executing the pending change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. .
For example, the effect control unit 300 may newly display the variable image 51 and the pending image 52, which are in a display mode different from the normal display mode, in response to the addition of the pending number. That is, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52, which are in a display mode different from the normal display mode, may be displayed without performing the pending change effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the performance control unit 300 newly displays the pending image 52, the newly displayed pending image 52 is gradually changed from a display mode with a high degree of transparency to a display mode with a low degree of transparency. Although it is changed (see FIG. 49 (19)), it is not limited to this.
For example, when the number of reservations is 0 and the number of reservations is added during the stop display of the special symbol, the effect control unit 300 may display the reservation image 52 while changing the degree of transparency in stages. Instead, it may be displayed in an opaque display mode. In addition, when the number of reservations is 0 and the number of reservations is added during the stop display of the special symbol, the mode of movement of the reservation image 52 in the shift effect is added to the number of reservations when the number of reservations is not 0. It may be different from the case where Further, when the number of reservations is 0 and the number of reservations is added during the stop display of the special symbol, the display mode of the number of reservations display 55 may be switched to "0" after being set to "1", The display mode of the pending number display 55 may be left as "0",

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300, when the pending number is added, updates the display content of the pending number display 55 and newly displays the pending image 52 (see FIG. 49 (19) ), but not limited to this.
For example, when the pending number is added, the effect control unit 300 may first update the display content of the pending number display 55 and then start displaying the pending image 52 again.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 changes the display mode of the pending image 52 by changing the transparency of the pending image 52 in the increased display effect (see FIG. 49 (19)). It is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may change the display mode of the pending image 52 by gradually changing the shape of the pending image 52 in the increase display effect.

In the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 uses the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82 to perform cycle display and stop display of symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may perform cycle display and stop display of symbols on the image display unit 114 . In this case, the symbols for which the cycle display and the stop display are performed on the image display unit 114 are regarded as special symbols.

[Second embodiment]
(Display example of special symbol indicator)
A display example of the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 221, second special symbol display device 222) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), the special symbol display device displays a failing special symbol in which the LED on the right end lights up as the first display mode after the power is turned on.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. ), the display mode is such that the lighting position of the LED changes every 32 ms. Specifically, control is performed to turn on the corresponding LED every 4 ms, which is the cycle of the timer interrupt, and by continuing this over eight timer interrupts, the same LED remains lit for 32 ms.

73 (b) ~ (h) display mode change is one cycle (= 256ms) cycle variation is performed multiple times, and when the special symbol variation time elapses, Figure 73 (i) ~ (l ) (loss special symbol, first big win special symbol, second big win special symbol, third big win special symbol) is stop-displayed for a stop time (0.5 seconds).

Furthermore, after the stop time has passed, when the next special symbol variation display is started, the cycle variation is performed multiple times from the display mode of FIG. 73(b), and any of FIGS. is stopped and displayed for a stop time (0.5 seconds=500 ms).

In cycle variation, two LEDs are turned on and their lighting positions are changed (moved). , and the lighting position may be changed.

In the cycle variation, one cycle is composed of eight types of display modes, but one cycle may be composed of two types of display modes (for example, all lighting and all lights off), and one cycle may be composed of three or more types of display modes. good too. Even in this case, the time for one cycle should be shorter than the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds=500 ms).

Further, in the present embodiment, the small winning game is not executed to open the variable winning portion for 1.8 seconds. It is preferable to stop and display the small winning special symbol. In this case, the stop time of the small hit special symbol may be shorter than 0.5 seconds (500 ms) or the display time (32 ms) of one display mode in the cycle variation.

(Production example for each production mode)
A display effect example for each effect mode will be described with reference to FIG.

In production mode A (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 74(a), the mode A background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the image display unit 114. The decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode (rectangular base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by circular images), and the small pattern 56 is displayed in a common mode (number image) common to all production modes. Is displayed.

Then, the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode scrolls downward (renewal change) in the variable effect, and as a pre-variation action suggesting the start of the scroll display, the decorative pattern 41 floats upward from the pattern stop position. The display is performed for 0.75 seconds. This pre-variation action of the decorative pattern 41 can also be regarded as a start-time action presentation that is performed when the scroll display is started.

Further, in the icon display areas (the first reserved icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C), the normal icons are displayed in the first form (hexagon). Then, the normal icon of the first mode causes the image display unit 114 to perform a swing motion (drawing motion) from the first posture (initial posture) tilting to the left, to the second posture tilting to the right, and then to the first posture again. During the display, it is always repeated with one period of 2 seconds.

In production mode B (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 74(b), the mode B background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the image display unit 114. The decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a second mode (a lantern-shaped base image BG, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a circle image), and the small pattern 56 is displayed in a common mode (number image) common to all production modes. Is displayed.

Then, the decorative pattern 41 of the second mode performs downward scrolling display (update fluctuation) in the variable effect. is performed for 0.5 seconds.

In addition, in the icon display area (the first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the second mode (shuttle shape). Then, the normal icon of the second mode causes the image display unit 114 to perform a swing motion (drawing motion) from the first posture (initial posture) tilting to the left, to the second posture tilting to the right, and then to the first posture again. During the display, it is always repeated with one period of 2 seconds.

In production mode C (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 74(c), the mode C background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the image display unit 114. A decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a third mode (a rectangular base image BG with R chamfering, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a round image of a pattern background), and a small pattern 56 is common to all production modes. It is displayed in a common mode (numeric image).

Then, the decorative pattern 41 of the third mode performs downward scrolling display (update fluctuation) in the variable effect, and the enlarged display of the decorative pattern 41 is performed as a pre-variation operation before starting this scroll display (update fluctuation). is performed for 0.5 seconds.

Further, in the icon display areas (the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C), the normal icons are displayed in the third mode (star shape). Then, the normal icon of the third mode rotates from a first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is positioned at the top, passes through a second posture in which the specific top is moved, and then reverts to the first posture. operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds while the image is being displayed on the image display unit 114 .

In production mode D (probability variable game state), as shown in FIG. 74(c), the mode D background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the image display unit 114, The decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a fourth mode (rectangular base image BG, number image SG), and the small pattern 56 is displayed in a common mode (number image) common to all the effect modes.

Then, the decorative pattern 41 of the fourth mode scrolls downward (renewal change) in the variable effect, but as a pre-variation action suggesting the start of this scroll display, the decorative pattern 41 floats upward from the pattern stop position. The display is performed for 0.4 seconds.

In addition, in the icon display area (the second reserved icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth mode (round shape). Then, the normal icon of the fourth mode rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the internal black point is positioned at the top, passes through the second posture in which the black dot moves, and then returns to the first posture (representation). operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds while the image is being displayed on the image display unit 114 .

In production mode E (probability variable game state), as shown in FIG. 74(e), the mode E background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the image display unit 114. The decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a fourth mode (rectangular base image BG, number image SG), and the small pattern 56 is displayed in a common mode (number image) common to all the effect modes.

Then, the decorative pattern 41 of the fourth mode scrolls downward (renewal change) in the variable effect, but as a pre-variation action suggesting the start of this scroll display, the decorative pattern 41 floats upward from the pattern stop position. The display is performed for 0.4 seconds.

In addition, in the icon display area (the second reserved icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth mode (round shape). Then, the normal icon of the fourth mode rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the internal black point is positioned at the top, passes through the second posture in which the black dot moves, and then returns to the first posture (representation). operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds while the image is being displayed on the image display unit 114 .

In production mode F (time-saving game state), as shown in FIG. 74(f), the mode F background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation) while being displayed on the image display unit 114, The decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a fourth mode (rectangular base image BG, number image SG), and the small pattern 56 is displayed in a common mode (numerical image) common to all the effect modes.

The decorative pattern 41 of the fourth mode performs downward scrolling display (update fluctuation) in the variable effect. .4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (the second reserved icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fifth mode (pentagon). Then, the normal icon of the fifth aspect rotates from a first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is positioned at the top, passes through a second posture in which the specific top is moved, and then returns to the first posture (representation). operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds while the image is being displayed on the image display unit 114 .

Note that an operation different from each pre-variation operation described above may be performed. For example, the decorative design 41 may be rotated as a pre-variation action suggesting the start of scroll display.

Also, in production modes A to F, when a special icon is displayed in the icon display area (second pending icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the special icon is a common aspect common to all production modes ( circle). Then, the special icon of the common mode is a rotation action (drawing action ) is repeatedly performed at a cycle of 2.5 seconds during display on the image display unit 114 .

Also, in the production modes A to F, the small patterns 56 displayed in a common mode (numeric image) are scrolled downward (update fluctuation) without performing the pre-variation operation in the fluctuation production. The updating operation for repeatedly updating the numeric images 1 to 9 is repeatedly performed in one cycle of 0.9 seconds. It should be noted that the small pattern 56 suggests that the variation effect is being executed by performing the update variation.

In this way, the effect of changing between the first posture and the second posture in the performance action (swaying action, rotating action) of the pending icon is the LED of the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222). It is repeatedly executed at a period (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from the lighting state change period (32 ms) and the period (256 ms) of one cycle. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the pending icon is performing the performance action, and it is possible to improve the performance effect.

In addition, the effect of changing between the first posture and the second posture in the performance action (swaying action, rotating action) of the hold icon is set to It is repeatedly executed at a cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from (1 second). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the pending icon is performing the performance action, and it is possible to improve the performance effect.

Also, in the variable effect, the decorative pattern 41 performs any one of a plurality of types of pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the variable production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the time until the decorative design 41 performs scroll display (update fluctuation) differs depending on which of the plurality of types of pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) the decorative design 41 performs in the variable effect. There is a case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the variable production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even if the decorative pattern 41 performs any of the plurality of types of pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) in the variable effect, the pre-variation actions and scroll display (update) of the three decorative patterns 41 variation) may be made to have the same starting order (left→middle→right).

In addition, depending on which of the plurality of types of pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) the decorative pattern 41 performs in the fluctuation effect, the pre-variation action and scroll display (update fluctuation) of the three decorative patterns 41 The starting order may be changed (floating display: left→middle→right, enlarged display: center→left→right, reduced display: right→middle→left, etc.).

Moreover, it is also possible to provide a plurality of types of pre-fluctuation behaviors of the decorative symbols 41 for each production mode so that the degree of expectation for a big win is different. Even in this case, the operation mode of the pending icon may be set to one type for each performance mode so as not to give the expectation of a big win.

(Example of the display effect of the number of pending)
A display rendering example of the pending number on the image display unit 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 .

First, when the number of reservations is "0" and the customer is waiting, as shown in FIG. "0" is displayed on the pending number display 55 of 121 and the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122, respectively.

After that, when the game ball wins the first starting port 121 and the first reservation number becomes "1", as shown in FIG. The pending icon HI of the mode is additionally displayed (increased display) with one frame of non-animation, and the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is updated (increased display) to "1" with one frame of non-animation. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the effect motion (shaking motion) is started from there.

Then, when the first pending number is reduced to "0" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. A 20-frame animation is started in which the icon HI is shifted (decreased display, change display) toward the icon display area 70C, and the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 becomes "0" in one frame of non-animation. It is updated (decreased display). At this time, the pending icon HI is displayed translucently with the degree of transparency changing from opaque, but the performance action (shaking action) is continued.

After that, when the shift display of the pending icon HI is completed, the pending icon HI is displayed as the icon TI in a larger size than the pending icon HI and in an opaque manner as shown in FIG. 75(d). ) continues.

In this state, when the game ball wins the first starting port 121 and the first reserved number becomes "1", as shown in FIG. A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) is started, and the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 is updated to "1" in one frame of non-animation (increase display). be done. At this time, the additional display of the pending icon HI starts a production action (shaking action) so as to be synchronized with other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is accompanied by an effect image and is a semi-transparent minimal icon. The display is enlarged from size to normal size. That is, in a state where the special symbols are variably displayed, the display of the hold icon HI may not start from the first posture (initial posture).

Then, when the additional display (increase display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is finished, as shown in FIG. , and the performance action (swaying action) is continuously performed.

After that, when it is determined that the game ball wins the first starting port 121 and the first reserved number becomes "2" and the icon change effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 75(g), A 20-frame animation in which the second special display mode (blue) of the pending icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is additionally displayed (increased display) on the second display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B is started, and the number of pending of the first start port 121 The display 55 is updated (increased display) to "2" with one frame of non-animation. At this time, the additionally displayed hold icon HI has a performance action (rotating action) that is not synchronized with the icon in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI) from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific part is positioned at the top. It starts and is enlarged and displayed from a semi-transparent extra-small size to a normal size with an effect image.

Then, when the additional display (increase display) of the hold icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) ends, as shown in FIG. 75(h), the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) The HI is of normal size and is displayed opaquely, and the effect action (rotation action) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. Animation starts. At this time, the icon TI that is erased and displayed gradually increases in transparency with an effect image and is erased.

After that, when the first reserved number is reduced to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. A 20-frame animation is started in which two pending icons HI are shifted (reduced) toward the icon display area 70C, and the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is updated to "1" in one frame of non-animation. (decrease display). At this time, the two pending icons HI are displayed translucently with the degree of transparency changing from opaque, but the effect action (swaying action, rotating action) is continuously performed.

Then, when the shift display of the two pending icons HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 75(k), the pending icon HI in the normal display mode displayed in the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B is displayed. The icon TI has a size larger than that of the pending icon HI and is displayed opaquely, and the performance action (shaking action) is continuously performed. In addition, the suspended icon HI in the first special display mode, which had been displayed in the second display portion of the first suspended icon display area 70B, is displayed in the normal size and opaquely in the first display portion, and accordingly the icon changes. Although the effect changes to the second special display mode (a kind of special icon), the effect operation (rotating operation) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the game ball wins the first starting port 121 and the first reserved number becomes "2", as shown in FIG. A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increase display) is started, and the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 is updated to "2" in 1 frame of non-animation (increase display). be done. At this time, the additional display of the pending icon HI starts a production action (shaking action) so as to be synchronized with other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is accompanied by an effect image and is a semi-transparent minimal icon. The display is enlarged from size to normal size.

After that, when the additional display (increase display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode ends, as shown in FIG. , and the performance action (swaying action) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. Animation starts. At this time, the icon TI that is erased and displayed gradually increases in transparency with an effect image and is erased.

After that, when the first pending number decreases to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 75(o), the effect displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B A 20-frame animation is started in which the two active pending icons HI are shifted (reduced) toward the icon display area 70C, and the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 is displayed in a non-animated frame of " 1” (decreased display). At this time, the two pending icons HI are displayed translucently with the degree of transparency changing from opaque, but the effect action (swaying action, rotating action) is continuously performed.

At this time, if the condition for switching from effect mode A to effect mode B is satisfied, as shown in FIG. etc.) is displayed, and while the reservation number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the reservation number display 55 of the second start port 122 are visible, the icons in the first reservation icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C visibility is regulated.

Then, in the layer behind the shielding image, as shown in FIG. 75(q), while the display mode and the rendering operation (rotating operation) of the icon TI are maintained, the suspended icon HI is normally displayed corresponding to the rendering mode B. The status is switched to the pending icon HI. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the effect motion (shaking motion) is started from there.

Then, when the shielding image is erased, as shown in FIG. 75(r), the suspended icon HI in the normal display mode displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B and the second suspended icon HI displayed in the icon display area 70C It becomes possible to visually recognize the icon TI in the special display mode.

In addition, even when a plurality of suspended icons in the normal display mode are displayed, the normal display is performed in the same way as the performance operation is performed so that the suspended icon in the normal display mode and the corresponding icon in the normal display mode are synchronized. Rendering operations are performed so that a plurality of pending icons in the mode are synchronized.

In addition, although the pending display example in the production mode A has been mainly described here, the display mode of the pending icon and the operation production mode are different in other production modes, but basically the same pending number display (production (including display at the time of mode switching) is performed.

74 to 75. As a first feature related to the production example of FIGS. The point is that the non-animated increment display is executed in the shortest period of one frame. By doing so, it is possible to immediately perform a variable effect (decrease display of the pending number display 55 and decrease display of the pending icon) so as not to be slow, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

74 to 75, when the number of reservations decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the number of reservations 55 is reduced by non-animation (1 frame) Display and change display (decrease display) by animation (20 frames) of the pending icon to the icon are executed (started at the same frame update timing). By doing so, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reservations has decreased, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the timing (frame update timing) at which the decrease display of the pending number display 55 starts (frame update timing) is earlier than the timing (frame update timing) at which the change display of the pending icon to the relevant icon (shift display of the pending icon to the pending icon) starts. ) may be earlier (for example, one frame earlier).

As a third characteristic of the production examples of FIGS. Also, the timing (frame update timing) at which the decrease display of the pending number display 55 is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp that the number of reservations has decreased by the display 55 of the number of reservations while directing the change of the number of reservations, thereby improving the interest of the game. It should be noted that the timing (frame update timing) when the decrease display of the pending number display 55 is completed is earlier than the timing (frame update timing) when the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (the shift display of the pending icon to the relevant icon) is completed. may be earlier (for example, one frame earlier).

As a fourth feature according to the production example of FIGS. 74 to 75, when the number of reservations increases during the variable display of special symbols, the increase display by non-animation (1 frame) of the number display 55 of reservations, and The point is that an increase display is executed (started at the same frame update timing) by animation (20 frames) of the pending icon. By doing so, the player can surely recognize that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The timing (frame update timing) at which the increase display of the pending icon 55 starts (frame update timing) and the timing at which it ends (frame update timing) precedes the timing (frame update timing) at which the increase display of the pending icon starts (for example, 1 frame).

As a fifth feature of the production examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, the increase display of the pending number display 55 is completed before the timing (frame update timing) at which the additional display (increase display) of the pending icon is completed. The point is that the timing (frame update timing) to be executed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp that the number of reservations has increased by the display 55 of the number of reservations while directing the change of the number of reservations, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a sixth feature related to the production example of FIGS. 74 to 75, when the number of reservations increases during the variable display of special symbols (variation production), compared to the case where the number of reservations increases during the customer waiting state Therefore, additional display (increase display) of the pending icon is performed over a long period (long number of frames). By doing so, the player can surely recognize that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

74 and 75, the seventh feature of the production example is the production operation mode (operating while expanding) at the start (display start) of the increasing display of the pending icon, and the completion of the increasing display of the pending icon (display The point is that it is different (partly different) from the production operation mode (operation while maintaining the size) after the start). By doing so, it is possible to let the player know that the number of pending games has increased, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that not only part of the operation may be changed at the start of the increased display of the pending icon and after the completion of the increased display, but all the operations may be changed.

The eighth characteristic of the production examples of FIGS. 74 and 75 is that the display mode (semi-transparent) at the start of the increased display of the suspended icons and the display mode (opaque) after the increased display of the suspended icons is completed. Different (partially different) points can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to let the player know that the number of pending games has increased, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that not only the transparency but also the shape and the like may be changed between when the increased display of the pending icon is started and after the increased display is completed.

As a ninth feature of the production examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, during the variable display of the special symbols (decorative symbols), the suspended icon and the icon repeatedly change between the first posture and the second posture ( swing motion, rotation motion, etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect by the reserved icon and the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A tenth feature of the production examples of FIGS. The point that the time to change to the second posture is constant every time. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the suspended icon and the icon become difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that if the control load of the drawing process is large when the pending icon and the corresponding icon change from the first posture to the second posture and the processing drops (one frame's worth of drawing could not be performed), the Only then is the time taken to change to the second posture not constant, but substantially constant.

As the eleventh feature related to the production example of FIGS. 74 to 75, a plurality of icons (suspended icons, suspended icon and the icon) displayed in the normal display mode during the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbols. are synchronized to execute the production operation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect by improving the appearance of the presentation action of the icon, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that the timing of synchronizing the presentation action of the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode with the presentation action of the other pending icons based on the newly started winning may be at the start of display or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display. It may be the hour, the start of the shift display, or the completion of the shift display.

As a twelfth feature of the production examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, when the special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed, the icon is erased and displayed, but after the special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed, the next Until the variable display (variable effect) is started, the pending icon repeats the effect operation. By doing so, it is possible for the player to grasp that the number of reservations is not "0" by means of the reservation icon, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A thirteenth feature of the production examples of FIGS. 74 and 75 is that when a special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed, the transparency of the decorative symbol does not change, but the icon is erased after the transparency of the icon increases. points. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when erasing the icon and naturally erase the icon, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

As a fourteenth characteristic of the production examples of FIGS. Mode A and production mode B, between production modes C to F) are the same. By doing so, it is possible to make the performance action of the pending icon (the icon) easier to see, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A fifteenth characteristic of the production examples of FIGS. 74 and 75 is that the period in which the pending icon (the icon) changes from the first orientation to the second orientation and then to the first orientation again is defined as the first presentation mode. It is the same as the second production mode (production mode A and production mode B, between production modes C to F). By doing so, it is possible to make the performance action of the pending icon (the icon) easier to see, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a sixteenth feature according to the production example of FIGS. 74 to 75, the size (area) of the area where the number of reservations is displayed does not change due to the increase or decrease of the number of reservations in the number display area, but in the reservation icon display area Depending on the number of holds, the size (area) of the area where the hold icon is displayed changes (when the number of holds is singular, the hold icon is displayed in the first area, and when the number of holds is multiple (the pending icon is displayed in a second area that is larger than the first area). By doing so, it is possible for the player to grasp the increase or decrease in the number of reservations while recognizing the number of reservations, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a seventeenth feature of the production examples of FIGS. (2 seconds or 3 seconds), and the hold icon displayed in a special display mode (special icon) with a higher chance of winning a jackpot than in the normal display mode changes between a first attitude and a second attitude. The point is that the effect action to be performed can be repeatedly executed in a second period (2.5 seconds) different from the first period. By doing so, it becomes easier to distinguish between the suspended icon in the normal display mode and the suspended icon in the special display mode, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As an eighteenth feature of the production examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, the small symbols are updated and changed (scroll display, switching display) of the number images from 1 to 9 in the first cycle (0.9 seconds). It is possible, and the pending icon can perform the effect action that changes between the first posture and the second posture in a second cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from the first cycle. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player misunderstand that the update variation of the small symbols and the performance operation of the pending icon are interlocked, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As the 19th feature according to the production example of FIGS. 74 to 75, a decrease display of the number of reservations is performed with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but in this decrease display, the reservation displayed in the number display area of the reservation The number display 55 does not move, but the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area moves (before the pending number decreases, the pending icon is displayed in the second area larger than the first area, and the pending number is After decreasing, the pending icon is displayed in the first area). By doing so, it is possible for the player to recognize the decrease in the number of reservations while recognizing the number of reservations, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twentieth feature of the production examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, the moving direction (downward) in the update action of the decorative pattern (small pattern) and the action direction (horizontal direction) in the production action (shake action) of the pending icon etc.). By doing so, the update variation of the decorative pattern (small pattern) and the production operation (shaking operation) of the reserved icon can be separated and easily recognized, and the production effect in the variation production can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

When the number of pending customers increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the pending icon is displayed in a non-animated frame by one frame. The increased display may be performed by animation of a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue longer than the increased display. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reservations, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, while the special pattern (decorative pattern) is stopped and displayed, the pending icon performs the effect operation, but during the stop display of the special pattern (decorative pattern), the suspended icon stops the effect operation, and the next After the shift display of the pending icon accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbol (decrease in the number of pending), the production operation of the pending icon may be restarted. By doing so, the player can grasp whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed depending on the presence or absence of the performance action of the pending icon, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when resuming the performance action of the pending icon after the shift display of the pending icon, even if the pending icon resumes the performance action from the initial posture at the position after the shift display (suspended icon display area, the icon display area). good. By doing so, it is possible to impress the player that the variable display of the special symbols has newly started, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even when the special pattern (decorative pattern) is stopped and the icon is erased and displayed, the icon continues to perform the production operation, but the special pattern (decorative pattern) is stopped and displayed. You may make it complete|finish operation|movement. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the load associated with display control.

In addition, a plurality of icons displayed in the normal display mode (holding icons, holding icon and the icon) are synchronized to perform the production operation, but the production operation is not performed in complete synchronization. , may be performed substantially in synchronism with each other. It should be noted that the timing of substantially synchronizing the rendering operation of the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode with the rendering operation of the other pending icons based on the newly started winning may be at the start of display or a predetermined time after the start of display. It may be at the time when the shift display is started, or at the time when the shift display is completed.

(Specific example of the case where the variable production starts from the customer waiting state)
A specific example in which the variable effect starts from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. FIG.

FIG. 76 is a timing chart when the variable effect starts from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 77 and 78 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 76, the player is in a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols has not been executed since the power was turned on, and production mode A and sound volume value "3" are set. At this time, the first special symbol display device 221 displays a failing special symbol (only the LED at the right end lights up), which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the image display unit 114 waits for the execution of the variable effect. The variable standby screen is displayed. Specifically, the mode A background image is horizontally scrolled (demonstration operation), and the decoration pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are in a state in which "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, is stopped ( See FIG. 77(a)). Note that the mode A background image is horizontally scrolled from the timing when the variable standby screen is first displayed after the power is turned on.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 76, when the up button or the down button of the effect key 162 is operated to adjust the volume, the image display section 114 partially overlaps the front side of the right decorative pattern 41. In this way, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "3" is displayed, and the confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume value "3" is output from the speaker 156 (see FIG. 77(b)).

At timing T2 in FIG. 76, when the upper button of the effect key 162 is operated to increase the volume, the volume value changes from "3" to "4". At this time, the image display unit 114 is updated with the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "4", and the speaker 156 outputs a volume confirmation sound (for 0.5 seconds) corresponding to the volume value "4". (See FIG. 77(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 76, when the selector switch (not shown) is operated to lower the volume, the volume value changes from "4" to "3". At this time, the image display unit 114 is updated to the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "3", but since the volume is adjusted by a changeover switch (not shown), the speaker 156 outputs the volume value corresponding to the volume value "3". Confirmation sound is not output (see FIG. 77(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 76, when the game ball wins the first start port 121, the first reservation number becomes "1" and the first special symbol reservation display 218 becomes "1" display, and the game is played. Winning commands (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) are transmitted from the control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 (see FIG. 77(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 76, when the first reservation number changes from "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is made, the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 starts a command (special symbol A memory specification command, a game state specification command, a special design specification command, a special figure variation pattern specification command) are transmitted. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 218 becomes "0" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) is started on the first special symbol display 221 (Fig. 77 (f) reference).

Furthermore, since the predetermined period has passed since the effect control unit 300 received the command at the time of winning, the reservation number display 55 and the sub first reservation display 83 of the first start port 121 become "1" display, and the first reservation A hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed in a non-animated manner in the first display portion of the icon display area 70B, and output of the first winning sound is started (see FIG. 77(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 76 (the timing of the third display change in the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period has passed since the effect control unit 300 received the command at the start, the first start port 121 The holding number display 55 and the sub-first holding display 83 become "0" display, and the fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started (Fig. 78 (g) reference).

Also, the pending icon HI displayed in the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B starts shift display (reduced display) to the icon display area 70C. Also, the hold icon HI starts the effect action. Further, the decorative pattern 41 starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, and the small pattern 56 starts updating and changing (scrolling display, switching display). Furthermore, volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the effect key 162 are restricted for a predetermined period (one second), the volume value image OG is erased, and audible output of fluctuating BGM is started from the speaker 156 (FIG. 78(g)). reference).

In addition to starting the audible output of the variable BGM at the start of floating display as the operation before the variation of the decorative pattern 41, a variable start sound (a start sound that is output every time, a start sound as a jackpot notice, etc.) is output. You may do so.

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 76 (at the start of the third cycle variation), the output of the winning sound ends (see FIG. 78(h)), and at the timing of T8 in FIG. ), when the shift display of the pending icon HI is completed, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), and then the scroll display (update change) of the decorative pattern 41 is started (see FIG. 78(i)). It should be noted that the effect operation of the icon TI may be performed while the floating display as the pre-variation operation of the decorative pattern 41 is being executed. Also, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 76, all the decorative patterns 41 start to fluctuate at high speed (see FIG. 78(j)). When outputting the variable start sound, the output of the variable start sound should be finished at this timing (after the output of the winning sound is finished).

It should be noted that when the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the start time command during the display of the volume value image OG, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, but the variable effect is not executed, so the volume value image The display of the OG is continued without being erased, and the state in which the effect key 162 can be used to adjust the volume and the amount of light is maintained. Further, when the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the command at the start while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the display period of the volume value image OG may be extended.

In addition, even when the light amount image is displayed by operating the left button or right button of the effect key 162 instead of the volume value image OG, basically it is the same as the case where the volume value image OG is displayed. Become.

In this way, when the variable effect is started in the customer waiting state (the period during which volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible by the effect key 162), the volume adjustment and light intensity by the effect key 162 are performed for a predetermined period (one second). Adjustments are regulated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player misses the important phase of the start of the variable performance by concentrating on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when the variable effect is started during the display of the volume value image OG, the volume value image OG is visually recognized even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the last adjustment operation) has not passed. is regulated (erased). Therefore, the volume value image OG does not impede the variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Even if the volume value is adjusted by operating a switch (not shown) while the volume value image OG is not displayed, the volume value image OG is not displayed. A volume value image OG corresponding to the newly set volume value is displayed regardless of whether the volume is adjusted by operating the , or by operating a changeover switch (not shown). Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the newly set volume value, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, during the pre-variation operation (symbol floating, rotation, etc.) by the decorative pattern 41, the variable effect by the production pattern (small pattern 56, sub-first fluctuation display 81, etc.) is executed. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp that the variable display of the special symbols has been started by the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the variable effect by the decorative pattern 41 includes a pre-variation operation (floating of the pattern, rotation, etc.) that operates the decorative pattern 41 in a predetermined display mode, and a scroll display. In the variable performance by the variable display device 81, etc., the variable display of the performance symbols is executed without operating the performance symbols in a predetermined display mode. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced by the action before the variation of the decorative pattern 41, and the player can grasp that the variable display of the special pattern is started by the performance pattern, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, after the pre-change operation (floating of the pattern, rotation, etc.) by the decorative pattern 41, the pending information (holding number display 55, holding icon HI, sub first holding display 83 and sub second holding display 84 LED pending display, etc.) are (already) reduced. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during the pre-variation operation (floating, rotation, etc. of the pattern) by the decorative pattern 41, the moving display of the pending icon HI is started. The moving display of this pending icon HI may be a moving display from the first pending icon display area 70B to the first pending icon display area 70B. Alternatively, the display may be moved from the first pending icon display area 70B to the icon display area 70C. That is, it may be possible to move the hold icon HI and display it as the icon TI.
In these cases, the player can quickly perceive that the reserved memory has decreased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, during the pre-variation operation (floating, rotation, etc. of the pattern) by the decorative pattern 41, the moving display of the pending icon HI is terminated. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the flow of the game that the variable performance is performed due to the reduction of the reserved memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during the pre-variation operation (floating, rotation, etc. of the pattern) by the decorative pattern 41, the icon TI can be displayed. Therefore, the display of the icon TI makes it easier for the player to grasp the flow of the game in which the variable effect is performed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, during the pre-variation operation (floating, rotation, etc. of the pattern) by the decorative pattern 41, the holding icon HI can be produced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect while appealing to the player that there is a reserved memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during the pre-variation operation (floating, rotation, etc. of the pattern) by the decorative pattern 41, the icon TI can be produced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player look at the icon TI and appeal that the variable effect is started, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at least a part of the background image (background image corresponding to each production mode, zone background image described later) is operated (horizontal scroll , scene changes, actions of characters included in the background image, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the variable performance together with the decorative pattern 41, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, at least a part of the background image (background image corresponding to each production mode, zone background image to be described later) is operated (horizontal scrolling, scene change , actions of characters included in the background image, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the variable performance together with the decorative pattern 41, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, BGM (BGM corresponding to each production mode, etc.) can be output when performing the pre-variation operation (floating of the pattern, rotation, etc.) by the decorative pattern 41 . Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable effect has started, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the pre-variation operation (floating, rotating, etc. of the pattern) by the decorative pattern 41, output of BGM (BGM corresponding to each production mode, etc.) is started. Therefore, the performance effect of the variation performance can be enhanced before the pre-variation action by the decorative pattern 41 is started, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , after the end timing of the first cycle variation), the scroll display (update variation) of the decorative pattern 41 in the variation effect is started, that is, both are intentionally not synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. Further, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbols and the start timing of the scroll display of the decorative symbols 41 becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation after the second time in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) (2 to 3 times of cycle variation After the start timing (after the start timing of the fourth cycle variation), the scroll display (update variation) of the decorative symbols 41 in the variation effect is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the second cycle variation and the start timing of the scroll display of the decorative pattern 41 match, the user misunderstands that the start timing of the variable display of the special pattern is the start time of the scroll display of the decorative pattern 41.例文帳に追加It is possible to avoid such inconvenience.

Further, after the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222), the scroll display (update variation) of the decorative symbol 41 is started. It's like Therefore, by starting the variable display of the special symbols and the scrolling display of the decorative symbols 41 in stages, the performance effect of the game performance can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to let the player know that the special symbol is the main symbol and the decorative symbol 41 is the secondary symbol, so that the player can recognize the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , before the end timing of the first cycle variation), the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the small pattern 56 is started, that is, both are intentionally not synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbols and the start timing of the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the small symbols 56 becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development load can be reduced. It becomes possible.

In addition, timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222) (end timing of the first cycle variation , before the start timing of the second cycle variation), the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the small pattern 56 is started. Therefore, the start timing of the second and later cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the update fluctuations (scroll display, switching display) of the small symbols 56 match, so that the start timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbols is the update fluctuation of the small symbols 56 ( It is possible to avoid inconvenience such as misunderstanding that it is the start of scrolling display, switching display).

Also, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222), the update variation of the small symbol 56 (scroll display , switching display) is started, that is, both are intentionally started without synchronizing them. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timing of the first display change in the cycle fluctuation and the start timing of the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) of the small pattern 56 becomes unnecessary, thereby reducing the control load and the development load. becomes possible. In addition, it is possible to let the player know that the special symbol is the main symbol and the small symbol 56 is the secondary symbol, so that the player can recognize the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), hold display (hold icon and hold number display 55 in image display unit 114, LED hold in sub first hold display 83 and sub second hold display 84 display), that is, both are intentionally not synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of variable display of special symbols with the update start timing of reserved display is not required, and the control load and development load can be reduced.

In addition, timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222) (end timing of the first cycle variation before, before the start timing of the second cycle variation), pending display (holding icon and holding number display 55 in image display unit 114, sub-first holding display 83 and sub-second holding display 84 LED pending display at ) will start updating. Therefore, since the start timing of the second cycle variation and the update start timing of the pending display coincide with each other, the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol is the time of starting the update of the pending display is avoided. becomes possible.

In addition, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222), the suspension display (on the image display unit 114 Hold icon, hold number display 55, LED hold display on sub first hold display 83 and sub second hold display 84) start updating, that is, start without intentionally synchronizing both ing. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of variable display of special symbols with the update start timing of reserved display is not required, and the control load and development load can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the pending display is updated after the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and the player can grasp the flow of the game.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , before the end timing of the first cycle variation), the shift display of the hold icon HI is started, that is, both are intentionally not synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI is not required, and the control load and development load can be reduced.

In addition, timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) (the start timing of the second cycle variation , before the end timing of the second cycle variation), shift display of the pending icon HI is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the cycle variation for the second and subsequent times coincides with the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI, the user misunderstands that the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol is the start of the shift display of the pending icon HI. It is possible to avoid such inconvenience.

Further, after the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222), the shift display (decrease display) of the pending icon HI is ended. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the holding icon HI is shift-displayed after the variable display of the special symbols is started, and the player can grasp the flow of the game.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) (after the start timing of the first cycle variation , before the end timing of the first cycle variation), shift display of the pending icon HI to the corresponding icon TI is started, that is, the two are intentionally not synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI to the icon TI becomes unnecessary, and it is possible to reduce the control load and the development load. Become.

In addition, timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) (the start timing of the second cycle variation (before the end timing of the second cycle variation), shift display of the pending icon HI to the icon TI is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the cycle fluctuation from the second time onwards coincides with the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI to the icon TI, the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol is the same as the shift display of the pending icon HI to the icon TI. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistakenly thinking that it is the time to start the shift display.

In addition, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222), the holding icon HI is shifted to the icon TI. The display is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the holding icon HI is shift-displayed to the icon TI since the variable display of the special symbols is started, and the player can grasp the flow of the game.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222) (before the start timing of the first cycle variation , later than the start timing of the first cycle variation), the audible output of a predetermined game sound (variation BGM, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) starts, that is, both start intentionally without synchronizing. It's like Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the audible output of the predetermined game sound becomes unnecessary, and the control load and development load can be reduced.

In addition, timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) (the start timing of the second cycle variation , before the end timing of the second cycle variation), audible output of a predetermined game sound (variation BGM, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the cycle fluctuation for the second and subsequent times coincides with the start timing of the audible output of the predetermined game sound, it is determined that the start timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is the start time of the audible output of the predetermined game sound. It is possible to avoid inconvenience such as misunderstanding.

In addition, the timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222) (before the start timing of the first cycle variation , after the start timing of the first cycle variation), the audible output of the production BGM (variation BGM for each production mode) starts, that is, both are intentionally not synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbols and the start timing of the audible output of the production BGM is not required, and the control load and development load can be reduced.

In addition, timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) (the start timing of the second cycle variation , before the end timing of the second cycle variation), the audible output of the production BGM (variation BGM for each production mode) is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the cycle fluctuation and the start timing of the audible output of the production BGM for the second and subsequent times coincide with each other, it is possible to misunderstand that the start timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is the start time of the audible output of the production BGM. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

In addition, timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation in the case of performing variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) (start of display of variation standby screen after power ON At the time, before the start timing of the first cycle change, at the end of the customer waiting demo production), the background image (background image for each production mode, zone background image) production operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) starts , that is, they are intentionally started without synchronization. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the effect operation of the background image becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

In addition, timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations in the case of performing variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) (variation standby screen after power ON) At the start of the display, before the start timing of the second cycle change, at the end of the customer waiting demo effect), the background image (background image for each effect mode, zone background image) effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) ) is to be started. Therefore, since the start timing of the cycle variation and the start timing of the effect operation of the background image match from the second time onward, the user may misunderstand that the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol is the start time of the effect operation of the background image. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Also, before the start of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222) (at the time of starting the display of the variation standby screen after the power is turned on), Rendering operations (horizontal scrolling, scene changes, etc.) of background images (background images for each rendering mode, zone background images) are performed. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. Further, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored in the customer waiting state before the variable display of the special symbols is started, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, depending on the type of pre-variation operation in the variable effect (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display), the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display 222) may be performed differently. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation according to the type of pre-variation action, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, depending on the type of pre-variation operation in the variable effect (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display), the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display It is provided that the number of display changes in the cycle variation performed by the device 222) may be different. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation according to the type of pre-variation action, and to improve the interest of the game.

When the variable effect is started while the volume value image OG is displayed, instead of hiding the volume value image OG, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed (set) in the upper layer of the decorative pattern 41. Visual recognition of the volume value image OG may be restricted by changing to a state of being displayed (set) in a lower layer of , so that the volume value image OG is superimposed behind the decorative pattern 41 .

(Specific example of starting winning during variable production)
A specific example of a case where the starting prize is won during the variable presentation will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 79 is a timing chart in the case of starting winning during variable production, and FIG. 80 is a diagram showing examples of production at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 79, the first special symbol fluctuation display (Yth cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) is being executed on the variable display 81 . At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218, the reservation number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displayed as "0". In addition, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are updated and changed (scroll display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, and the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C. is displayed, and fluctuating BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 80(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 79, when the game ball wins the first start port 121, the first reservation number becomes "1" and the first special symbol reservation display 218 becomes "1" display, and the game is played. Winning commands (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) are transmitted from the control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 (see FIG. 80(b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 79, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control unit 300 received the winning command, the reservation number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub-first reservation display 83 are set to "1". ” is displayed. In addition, the additional display of the animation of the suspension icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode on the first display portion of the first suspension icon display area 70B and the output of the first winning sound are started (FIG. 80(c) reference).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 79, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the additional display of the animation of the pending icon HI, the additional display of the pending icon HI animation ends and the output of the first winning sound also ends. (See FIG. 80(d)).

In this way, when a game ball wins in the starting hole during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, additional display of the pending icon HI by animation is executed over a plurality of cycles of variable display. Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this way, when the game ball enters the starting hole during execution of the variable display of the special symbols, the winning sounds (first winning sound, second winning sound) are output over a plurality of cycle fluctuations. there is Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, when a game ball enters the starting hole during execution of the variable display of the special symbols and the winning sounds (the first winning sound and the second winning sound) are output, the volume of the variable BGM is maintained without decreasing. It's like Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation effect from being hindered by the prize-winning sound, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Concrete example of executing variable production continuously)
A specific example of the case where the variable performance is continuously executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. FIG.

FIG. 81 is a timing chart in the case of continuously executing variable effects, and FIGS. 82 and 83 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 81, the first special symbol variation display (Nth cycle variation from the start of variation) and the sub-th 1 The variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) is being executed on the variable display 81 . At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218, the reservation number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, and the central decorative pattern 41 is scrolled (updated) at a low speed. display, switching display). Two suspended icons HI in the normal display mode are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, and the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C. It is audibly output (see FIG. 82(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 81 (at the start of the N+1th cycle variation from the start of variation), when the central decorative pattern 41 scrolled (updated variation) temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound is emitted from the speaker 156. Output is started, and the character of the decorative pattern 41 in the center performs an effect action (pre-stop motion of shaking the head), and all the decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 82(b)). Here, the pre-stop action of the decorative pattern 41 can also be regarded as a stop-time action presentation that is performed when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed.

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. 81 (during the N+2th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when a predetermined period has passed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 82(c)). .

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 81, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the game control unit 200 transmits a stop time command (symbol confirmation command) to the effect control unit 300 . In addition, a losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 82(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 81, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control section 300 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started, and stop display of the decorative pattern 41 ("523") and the small pattern 56 ("523") is started ( See FIG. 82(e)).
After the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped or after the small pattern 56 is stopped and displayed, disappearing display of the icon TI by animation may be started.

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 81, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation, the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation ends (see FIG. 82(f)).

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 81, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number changes from "2" to "1" and a big hit determination is performed, and the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 A start time command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted to. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 218 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) is started on the first special symbol display 221 (Fig. 83 (g )reference).

Then, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 81 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control unit 300 received the command at the start, the number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub-th The 1-hold display 83 becomes "1" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 83(h)).

Also, the two pending icons HI displayed in the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variable effect is started, the decorative pattern 41 starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, and the small pattern 56 starts updating and changing (scrolling display, switching display) (see FIG. 83(h)).

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 81 (during the second cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of floating display of the decorative pattern 41, the look-ahead effect rendering executed only with this variation rendering is started, and decoration is performed. A blue effect image EF is displayed around the pattern 41 (see FIG. 83(i)).

Next, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 81 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the two pending icons HI is completed, the earliest one pending icon HI is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). . At this time, an icon change effect at the time of start of variation is performed and the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, after which scroll display (update variation) of the decorative pattern 41 is started (see FIG. 83(i)).

Note that the operation before stopping the decorative pattern 41 is not limited to the example described above. As the action before the decorative pattern 41 stops, for example, an animation display of an effect image around the decorative pattern 41 may be performed. Further, as the action before stopping the decorative pattern 41, for example, the rotating action of the decorative pattern 41 may be performed. Furthermore, as the action before the decorative pattern 41 stops, for example, the decorative pattern 41 may be raised and lowered.

In this way, the variable BGM that has been output before the execution of the pre-variation action (floating, rotation, etc. of the pattern) by the decorative pattern 41 can be continuously output even during the execution of the pre-variation action. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect as if a plurality of variable effects are spun, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the icon change effect is executed at the start of the variable effect (when the icon shift display is performed), the icon shift display is performed instead of changing the icon display mode from the start of the icon shift display. At the time of completion (after), the display mode of the icon is changed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the icon change presentation by highlighting the change in the display mode of the icon, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, during the operation before stopping the decorative pattern 41 (ups and downs of the pattern, effect, rotation, etc.), the special pattern is variably displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable performance is not finished during the pre-stop action of the decorative pattern 41, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, while the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stopped first (for example, the decorative pattern 41 on the left side) is performing the pre-stop operation (ups and downs of the pattern, effect, rotation, etc.) depending on the type of the variable effect pattern, the decoration that is temporarily stopped next. The symbol 41 (for example, the decorative symbol 41 on the right side) performs a pre-stop action and a variable display. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved. Although the operation mode of the pre-stop operation of the decorative symbol 41 to be temporarily stopped first and that of the decorative symbol 41 to be temporarily stopped next are the same, they may be different. Further, in the case of shortened variation, the pre-stop operation may not be performed.

In addition, during the operation before stopping the decorative pattern 41 (ups and downs of the pattern, effect, rotation, etc.), the fluctuation production by the production pattern (small pattern 56, sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, etc.) It seems to be running. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable performance is not finished during the pre-stop action of the decorative pattern 41, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, after the operation before stopping the decorative pattern 41 (ups and downs of the pattern, effect, rotation, etc.), a disappearing effect of disappearing the icon TI can be executed. Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the disappearing effect can also be regarded as the stop non-display effect described in the first embodiment.

In addition, after the operation before stopping the decorative pattern 41 (up and down of the pattern, effect, rotation, etc.), the stop display by the decorative pattern 41 can be executed, and after the stop display by the decorative pattern 41, the icon TI disappears. It seems that Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after the operation before stopping the decorative design 41 (up and down of the design, effect, rotation, etc.), the stop display by the decorative design 41 can be executed, and the production design (small design 56, sub first fluctuation display 81, sub After the stop display by the second variable display device 82, etc.) is executed, it is possible to execute an extinguishing effect for extinguishing the icon TI. Therefore, the progress of the game presentation becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after the variable production by the decorative pattern 41, the decorative pattern 41 can be stopped and displayed after the pre-stop operation (up and down of the pattern, effect, rotation, etc.). After the variation effect by the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, etc.), the stop display can be executed without performing the pre-stop operation of the effect symbols. Therefore, while enhancing the performance effect of the variable performance by the decoration pattern 41, the player can grasp the end of the variable display of the special pattern by the performance pattern, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, after the decorative pattern 41 is operated before stopping (up and down of the pattern, effect, rotation, etc.), during the execution of the stop display by the decorative pattern 41, the background image (background image corresponding to each production mode, zone background described later) image, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, during the execution of the operation before stopping the decorative pattern 41 (up and down of the pattern, effect, rotation, etc.) and during the execution of the stop display by the decorative pattern 41, the background image (background image corresponding to each production mode, zone background described later) image, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored during the pre-stop operation of the decorative pattern 41 or after the stop display, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222) (before the start timing of the last cycle variation, the last before the end timing of the second cycle variation, after the start timing of the last cycle variation, and after the end timing of the last cycle variation), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a predetermined manner (temporary stop display, stop display). It is designed to be Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timings of both becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development load.

In addition, before the final cycle variation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222), the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped and displayed. ing. Therefore, the player can grasp the flow of the game that the variable display of the special symbol ends after the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222) (after the start timing of the last cycle variation, the last After the end timing of the cycle variation and after the stop display timing of the special symbols, the small symbols 56 are stop-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of effects related to the stop display of the small symbols 56, and to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timings of both becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development load.

Also, during the execution of the variable performance, the pending icon HI is made to perform the performance operation (shaking operation, rotating operation), and the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222) is the last in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbol. Even after the end of the cycle variation of , the effect operation of the hold icon HI is continued. Therefore, the player can recognize that the number of reservations is not "0" by the reservation icon HI, and the player can be prevented from feeling bored even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, the timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222) (after the start timing of the last cycle variation, the last After the end timing of the cycle variation and after the stop display timing of the special symbol, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends. Therefore, it is possible to expand the range of effects related to disappearing display of the icon TI, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timings of both becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development load.

Further, after the cycle variation in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222) is completed, disappearance display of the icon TI is completed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow of the game that the icon TI is erased because the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, a predetermined game sound started before the last cycle variation (during the execution of the variation effect) in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222) Audible output of (variation BGM, variation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation (after the start timing of the last cycle variation, after the end timing of the last cycle variation) , After the stop display timing of the special symbol), it is possible to end. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of effects when the predetermined game sound is audibly output, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timings of both becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development load.

In addition, a predetermined game sound started before the last cycle variation (during the execution of the variation effect) in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222) It is possible to terminate the audible output (such as a temporary stop tone) before the end of the cycle variation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impression of the previous variable display from being carried over to the next variable display, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, a predetermined game sound (fluctuation BGM) that has been output before the last cycle fluctuation in the case of performing a variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 221 (second special symbol display device 222), It is possible to continue audible output even after the end of the cycle variation (during stop display). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) are continuously executed even after the end of the cycle variation (during stop display). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the look-ahead effect (look-ahead zone effect, look-ahead effect effect) executed with the start of the variable effect is executed after the first cycle change in the case of performing the variable display of the special symbol. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow of the game that the look-ahead effect is executed after the variable display of the special symbols is started, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Concrete example when the variable effect is started without being able to receive the stop command normally)
84 and 85, a specific example will be described in which the variable effect is started without being able to receive the stop command normally.

FIG. 84 is a timing chart when the stop command cannot be received normally and the variable effect is started, and FIG. 85 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

Note that the timings T0 to T2 in FIG. 84 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T2 in FIG. 81, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T3 will be described.

At the timing of T3 in FIG. 84, when the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. FIG. In addition, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 85(d)).

However, since the production control unit 300 could not normally receive the stop command, the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, etc. should have started to be stopped at the timing of T4 in FIG. , the small pattern 56, etc. will not be started, and the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81, the display of the icon TI, the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, and the variable display of the small pattern 56 will be continued. It will be. In addition, when the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the stop command, the variable display period on the sub first variable display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern 41 and the small The variable display period of the pattern 56 may be extended.

Next, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 84, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number changes from "1" to "0" and a big hit determination is performed, and the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 A start time command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted to. In addition, the first special symbol holding display 218 becomes "0" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 221 is started (Fig. 85 (e )reference).

Then, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 84 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control unit 300 received the command at the start, the number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub-th 1 The holding display 83 becomes "0" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first variable display 81 starts from the beginning (lights out) (see FIG. 85 (f)) .

Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased without animation, and the pending icon HI displayed in the first display unit starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. do. Elimination of the icon TI by non-animation is regarded as an effect of disappearing the icon TI. Further, after the variable performance is started and the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 is displayed at the pattern stop position for a moment, floating display as an operation before the fluctuation is started, and the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the small pattern is started. 56 continues scroll display without stopping display (see FIG. 85(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T7 in FIG. 84 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the pending icon HI is completed, the icon TI (white icon) is displayed. After that, the scroll display (update change) of the decorative pattern 41 is started (see FIG. 85(g)).

In this way, when the first command (command at start) is received, the variable performance is started, and when the second command (command at stop) is received, the variable performance is terminated. When a third command (next start time command) is received in a state in which it is not started, the current variable performance is forcibly terminated and the next variable performance is started. In other words, when the second command (command at the time of stop) is received, the variable effect ends, but even if the second command cannot be received normally and the third command (the next command at the start) is received, the variable effect ends. It's like In other words, both when the second command is received and when the second command is not received, the previous variable effect is terminated during execution of the next variable effect. Therefore, the previous variable performance can be appropriately terminated by the start of the next variable performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, when the start command is received while the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 is displayed at the pattern stop position for a moment (same as when the stop command was received normally). mode) to start a variable effect (here, floating display). Therefore, the variable performance can be started in the same manner as when the start command is received during the stop display of the decorative pattern 41, and the game when the variable performance is started from the state where the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the start time command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the displayed icon TI is erased and displayed in a non-animation, that is, in a shorter time than the erased display in the animation. Therefore, the next time the hold icon HI is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C, the shift-display will not be hindered, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect.

It should be noted that if the command at the start is received by the production control unit 300 in a garbled state due to wiring abnormality or noise, the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display executed by the first special symbol display device 221 (for example 13.5 second variation of normal reach) and the content of the variable effect pattern of the variable effect executed by the image display unit 114 (for example, 40 seconds of SP reach effect) may be different. In such a case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 221, the image display unit 114 is in a state where the variation effect (specifically, the SP reach effect) is executed, and in this state, the next start. When the hour command is received, the current variable performance is forcibly terminated and the next variable performance is started. Regarding this point, the operation is the same for a gaming machine that transmits/receives a start command but does not transmit/receive a stop command.

(Concrete example when the normal fluctuation effect ends and the customer waits)
A specific example of the case where the normal variable effect ends and the customer waits for customers will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 86 is a timing chart when the normal variable effect ends and the customer waits. FIGS. 87 and 88 show examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 86, the first special symbol fluctuation display (the Nth cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) is being executed on the variable display 81 . At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218, the reservation number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displayed as "0". In addition, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, and the central decorative pattern 41 is scrolled (updated) at a low speed. display, switching display). Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output. Furthermore, a volume value image OG is displayed so as to partially overlap with the front side of the right decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 87(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 86 (during the N-th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the scroll display (update display) of the central decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, the temporary stop sound is output from the speaker 156. Then, the character of the decorative pattern 41 in the center performs a performance action (pre-stop motion of shaking the head), and all the decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 87(b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 86 (during the N+1th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the lower button of the effect key 162 is operated to adjust the volume, the volume value changes from "4" to "3". do. At this time, the image display unit 114 is updated with the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "3", and the speaker 156 starts outputting a volume confirmation sound corresponding to the volume value "3" (FIG. 87). (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 86 (during the N+1th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 87(d)). .

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 86 (in the middle of the N+2th cycle variation from the start of variation), when the variation time of the special symbol has passed, the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 When stopping command (symbol confirmation command) is sent. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 87(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 86, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control section 300 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, disappearance display by animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, and stop display by the decorative pattern 41 ("523") and the small pattern 56 ("523") is started. . Further, volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the effect key 162 are restricted for a predetermined period (1 second), and the volume value image OG is erased, but the output of the confirmation sound continues (see FIG. 87(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 86, when the output period of the confirmation sound elapses, the output of the confirmation sound ends (see FIG. 88(g)), and at the timing of T7 in FIG. 86, the animation of the icon TI disappears. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the display, the disappearing display of the icon TI by animation ends (see FIG. 88(h)).

Next, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 86, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, it becomes a customer waiting state and becomes a waiting period during which the special symbols are stopped and displayed. A state specification command is sent.

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 86, when a stop waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the fluctuating BGM at an audible volume is stopped (muted) (FIG. 88(i) See), when a demo waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing to the player is started.

When the stop display of the decorative pattern 41 (small pattern 56) is performed in response to the reception of the stop time command during the output of the confirmation sound, the volume adjustment by the effect key 162 is regulated, while the confirmation sound is output. is designed to continue output until the output period (0.5 seconds) elapses, but this is also the same at the start of the variable effect. Even when the execution of the corresponding variable performance is started, the sound volume adjustment with the performance key 162 is restricted, while the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period elapses.

When a predetermined period of time elapses after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is stopped (muted). The audible output is not stopped, and for example, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) when a customer waiting state designation command, a jackpot game opening designation command, or the like is received next time.

Additional elements at the time of stoppage of fluctuation In this way, when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed during the fluctuation effect (the period in which the volume adjustment and the light amount can be adjusted by the effect key 162), the effect is performed for a predetermined period (1 second). Volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the key 162 are restricted. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player misses the important phase of the stop display of the decorative pattern 41 by concentrating on volume adjustment and light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Additional Elements When Stopping Fluctuation When the decorative pattern 41 is stopped during display of the volume value image OG, even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds after the last adjustment operation) has not passed In order to ensure the visibility of the decorative pattern 41 that is stopped and displayed, the visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted (erased). Therefore, the visibility of the stationary-displayed decorative pattern 41 is not hindered by the volume value image OG, and the player can confirm the stationary-displayed decorative pattern 41, thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Where to drop the volume adjustment When the variable effect is started or the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed during the output period of the volume confirmation sound, the volume adjustment by the effect key 162 is regulated, but the volume confirmation sound is not output. The output is continued until the output period (0.5 seconds) elapses. Therefore, the player can recognize that the volume has been adjusted, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Where to Drop BGM In addition, when the normal variable effect ends and the player waits for customers, the audible output of the variable BGM continues for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, compared with the case where the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) immediately after the normal variable performance is finished, the player is less likely to want to quit the game, and the operation of the game machine is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, it is possible to continuously output BGM (variable BGM for each production mode) during the execution of the operation before stopping the decorative pattern 41 (up and down of the pattern, effect, rotation, etc.) and during the execution of the stop display by the decorative pattern 41. It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even during the pre-stop operation or during the stop display of the decorative pattern 41, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the volume of BGM (fluctuating BGM for each production mode) is adjusted according to the operation of a predetermined operation unit (production key 162, etc.) during the operation before stopping the decorative pattern 41 (ups and downs of the pattern, effect, rotation, etc.). It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to output the BGM with a sound volume suitable for the player even during the operation before the decorative pattern 41 is stopped, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the volume of BGM (fluctuating BGM for each production mode) is adjusted according to the operation of a predetermined operation unit (production key 162, etc.) during the operation before stopping the decorative pattern 41 (ups and downs of the pattern, effect, rotation, etc.). It is possible to suppress the volume of BGM by outputting various error notification sounds. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the error notification sound is disturbed by the BGM, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

When the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value image OG is not hidden, but is displayed (set) in the upper layer of the decorative pattern 41. You may change to the state displayed (set) in the lower layer of the pattern 41. FIG. In this way, since the volume value image OG is displayed so as to overlap behind the decorative pattern 41, the visual recognition of the volume value image OG is restricted, while the visibility of the decorative pattern 41 is ensured, and the display is stopped. The player can confirm the decorative pattern 41 to be displayed.

In addition, when the volume is adjusted by operating the performance key 162 during the customer waiting state, the volume confirmation sound is output, and when the volume is adjusted by operating the performance key 162 during the variable performance, the volume confirmation sound is not output. A volume confirmation sound may not be output when the volume is adjusted by operating the performance key 162 during the customer waiting state, and a volume confirmation sound may be output when the volume is adjusted by operating the performance key 162 during the variable performance. .

In addition, the volume value image OG is displayed when the volume is adjusted by operating the effect key 162 even during the customer waiting state or during the variable effect. The volume value image OG may be displayed at the time of the volume adjustment by , and the volume value image OG may not be displayed at the time of the volume adjustment by operating the effect key 162 during the variable effect.

In addition, when the stop display of the decorative pattern 41 is performed according to the reception of the stop command during output of the confirmation sound, or when the execution of the variable effect is started according to the reception of the start command during the output of the confirmation sound. However, the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) elapses. In this case, the output of the confirmation sound may be stopped even if the output period has not elapsed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to confuse the confirmation sound with the fluctuation start sound and the fluctuation stop sound, so that the fluctuation start sound and the fluctuation stop sound can be easily heard, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Concrete example when the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally)
89 to 90, a specific example will be described in which the end of the normal variation effect is delayed due to the normal reception of the stop command.

FIG. 89 is a timing chart in the case where the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed due to a failure to receive the stop command normally, and FIG. 90 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

Note that the timings T0 to T3 in FIG. 89 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T3 in FIG. 86, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T4 will be described.

At the timing of T4 in FIG. 89 (in the middle of the N+2th cycle variation from the start of variation), when the variation time of the special symbol has passed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is issued from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. sent. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 90(e)).

However, since the effect control unit 300 could not normally receive the stop command, the decorative pattern 41, the small pattern 56, etc. should have started to be stopped and displayed at the timing of T5 in FIG. , the small pattern 56, etc. will not be stopped. Then, variable display on the sub-first variable display 81, display of the icon TI, temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, variable display of the small pattern 56, display of the volume value image OG, and volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the effect key 162. is continued (see FIG. 90(f)). In addition, when the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the stop command, the variable display period on the sub first variable display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern 41, the small The variable display period of the pattern 56, the display period of the volume value image OG, and the period in which volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are possible by the effect key 162 may be extended.

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 89, when the confirmation sound output period elapses, the output of the confirmation sound ends (see FIG. 90(g)), and at the timing of T7 in FIG. 89, the special symbol stop time elapses. Then, it becomes a customer waiting state and a waiting period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300. - 特許庁

After that, at timing T8 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C disappears without animation, and the decorative pattern 41 ("523") and the small pattern 56 ("523") are displayed at the pattern stop position. (= stop display state). On the other hand, the state in which the volume can be adjusted by the effect key 162 is maintained, and the display of the volume value image OG is also maintained (see FIG. 90(h)).

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 89, when the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds after the last operation of the performance key 162 for volume adjustment) has elapsed, the volume value image OG is hidden (see FIG. 90 ( i)), at the timing of T10 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the fluctuating BGM at an audible volume is stopped (muted) (FIG. 90 ( j)), and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, a customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed to appeal to the player to play the game.

Note that even if the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the start command transmitted from the game control unit 200 while the volume value image OG is being displayed, basically the game control unit As in the case where the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the command at the time of stop transmitted from 200, the variable effect is not executed. The OG is no longer erased.

In addition, when the stop command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the variable display on the sub first variable display 81 is stopped, the icon TI disappears in non-animation, the decorative pattern 41 and the small Since the pattern 56 is not stopped and displayed, the state in which the sound volume can be adjusted by the effect key 162 is maintained, and the sound volume value image OG is not erased.

Where to drop the BGM In addition, if the stop time command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are not stopped and displayed, so a predetermined period ( 30 seconds) has passed, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is maintained.

In this way, when the first command (command at start) is received, the variable performance is started, and when the second command (command at stop) is received, the variable performance is terminated. When the third command (customer waiting state designation command) is received in a state in which the player is not in the waiting state, the current variable effect is forcibly ended and the customer waiting state is entered. In other words, when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable effect ends, but even if the second command cannot be received normally and the third command (customer waiting state designation command) is received, the variable effect ends. It's like In other words, both when the second command is received and when the second command is not received, the variable effect is terminated when shifting to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately end the variable presentation by the start of the customer waiting state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, when the production control unit 300 cannot normally receive the command at the start or the command at the time of stop transmitted from the game control unit 200 (disconnection of the command line connecting the game control unit 200 and the production control unit 300, connector disconnection, etc. ), the effect key 162 is not restricted to adjust the volume and the amount of light, and the state in which the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light can be performed is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience for the player regarding sound volume adjustment and light amount adjustment, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the production control unit 300 can not normally receive the command at the start or the command at the time of stop transmitted from the game control unit 200 (disconnection of the command line connecting the game control unit 200 and the production control unit 300, connector disconnection, etc.) , the display of the volume value image OG is maintained until the display period of the volume value image OG elapses. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience for the player regarding sound volume adjustment and light amount adjustment, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that if the command at the start is received by the production control unit 300 in a garbled state due to wiring abnormality or noise, the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display executed by the first special symbol display device 221 (for example 13.5 second variation of normal reach) and the content of the variable effect pattern of the variable effect executed by the image display unit 114 (for example, 40 seconds of SP reach effect) may be different. In such a case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 221, the image display unit 114 is in a state where the variable effect (specifically, the SP ready-to-win effect) is executed, and in this state, the customer is waiting. When the specified command is received, the current variable effect is forcibly terminated and the player waits for customers. Regarding this point, the operation is the same for a gaming machine that transmits/receives a start command but does not transmit/receive a stop command.

(Concrete example when the loss normal reach fluctuation effect ends and the customer waits)
91 to 93, a specific example of the case where the lost normal reach fluctuation effect ends and the customer waits for customers will be described.

FIG. 91 is a timing chart when the lost normal reach variable effect ends and the customer waits state, and FIGS. 92 and 93 show examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 91, in the state where the first reserved number is "0", the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 and the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218, the reservation number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displayed as "0". In addition, three decorative patterns 41 and three small patterns 56 are updated and changed (scrolling display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 92(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 91, when the normal ready-to-win effect is started in which the central decorative pattern 41 is scrolled at a low speed while the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped at the same pattern, audible output of the fluctuating BGM is started. is stopped (muted) and output of normal reach BGM is started (see FIG. 92(b)).

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. 91, when the dark background image is displayed on the image display section 114 and the blackout effect is started, the decorative pattern 41 is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and the effect button 161 is pressed. The effective period of promotion effect and effect button 161 for prompting the operation is started. Specifically, the image display unit 114 displays an operation promotion image SSG imitating the production button 161, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), and the prompting sound “Press” is output from the speaker 156. (See FIG. 92(c)).

Thereafter, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 91, when the effect button 161 is operated or the effective period elapses, the development failure effect suggesting that the development to the SP ready-to-win effect fails and ends in the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. . Specifically, the development failure image SIG is displayed on the image display unit 114, and the failure sound "Chang" is output from the speaker 156, and the audible output of the normal reach BGM is resumed (Fig. 92 (d )reference).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 91, when the execution period of the blackout effect has passed, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed, and the decorative pattern 41 returns to the position before the start of the blackout effect. The normal reach effect is resumed (see FIG. 92(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 91, when the center decorative pattern 41 scrolled (updated and changed) at a low speed temporarily stops at "6", output of a temporary stop sound is started from the speaker 156, and the central decoration is displayed. The character of the pattern 41 performs a performance action (pre-stop action of shaking the head), and the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped with a reach-losing roll ("565"). Further, the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped, but the audible output of the variable BGM is not restarted (see FIG. 92(f)).

After that, at timing T6 in FIG. 91, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 93(g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 91, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the game control section 200 transmits a stop time command (symbol confirmation command) to the effect control section 300. FIG. In addition, a losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 93(h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 91, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control section 300 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, disappearance display by animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, and stop display with the decorative pattern 41 ("565") and the small pattern 56 ("565") is started. (See FIG. 93(i)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 91, when a predetermined period has passed since the disappearance display of the icon TI started, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 93(j)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 91, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, it becomes a customer waiting state and becomes a waiting period in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed. A state specification command is sent. Thereafter, when a demonstration waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the receipt of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing the game to the player is started.

In this way, when the normal reach variation performance is executed, when the normal reach performance is started, the variation BGM is muted (silenced) and the normal reach BGM is output, so that the normal reach performance is effectively livened up. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case of a customer waiting state after the losing normal reach variation effect, the effect BGM (variation BGM, normal reach BGM) is not output from the temporary stop of the three decorative patterns 41, specifically, before the normal reach change effect ends. Since it is in the state, it is possible to immediately grasp that the normal reach effect has ended or that it has been lost, and it is possible to improve the interest.

It should be noted that instead of stopping the output of the performance BGM (fluctuation BGM, normal reach BGM) from the temporary stop of the three decorative patterns 41, the temporary stop of the three decorative patterns 41 will audibly output the variable BGM instead of the normal reach BGM. can be In this way, the player will not be extremely discouraged when the normal ready-to-win variation effect with the low expectation for the big win is lost.

(Concrete example of the case where the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP ready-to-win effect ends)
94 to 96, a specific example in which the variable effect is executed after the losing SPSP ready-to-win effect is completed will be described.

FIG. 94 is a timing chart when the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP ready-to-win effect ends, and FIGS. 95 and 96 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 94, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 and the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218, the reservation number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the three decorative patterns 41 are scrolled (updated and changed), and the small patterns 56 are updated and changed (scrolled and switched). Also, in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the pending icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 94, when normal ready-to-win effect is started in which the central decorative pattern 41 is scrolled at a low speed while the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped at the same pattern, audible output of the fluctuating BGM is started. is stopped (muted) and output of normal reach BGM is started.

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. At the same time, the activation effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 161 and the effective period of the effect button 161 are started. Specifically, the image display unit 114 displays an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 161, the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (no output), and the prompting sound “press” is output from the speaker 156. (See FIG. 95(a)).

Thereafter, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 94, when the effect button 161 is operated or the effective period elapses, the development to the SP ready-to-win effect succeeds and the development success effect to suggest that the SP ready-to-win effect is executed is executed. be done. Specifically, the development success image HSG is displayed on the image display unit 114, and the success sound "You did it" is output from the speaker 156 (see FIG. 95(b)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 94, when the execution period of the blackout effect has passed, the display of the SP reach background image and the output of the SP reach BGM are started, and the execution of the SP reach effect is started. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 changes to display only numbers, and the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen in a state reduced from the normal size (see FIG. 95(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 94, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect has passed, the display of the SPSP reach background image and the output of the SPSP reach BGM are started, and the execution of the SPSP reach effect is started. At this time, the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a state of being reduced from the normal size, and the first pending icon display area 70B is hidden together with the pending icon HI (see FIG. 95(d)). .

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 94, when the output of the SPSP ready-to-win BGM is stopped in the final phase of the SPSP ready-to-win effect and the final effect is started, the promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 161 and the effective period of the effect button 161 are displayed. is started. Specifically, the image display unit 114 displays an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 161, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (no output), and the prompting sound “press” is emitted from the speaker 156. It is output (see FIG. 95(e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 94, when the effect button 161 is operated or the effective period elapses, a decision failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed. Specifically, the failure image HBG is displayed on the image display unit 114 , and the failure sound “Hang” is output from the speaker 156 . In addition, by temporarily stopping the central decorative pattern 41 at the upper left corner of the screen at "6", the three decorative patterns 41 will be in a state of being temporarily stopped at the reach-losing result ("565") (Fig. 95 (f) )reference).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 94, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect has passed, the first stop suggesting effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the decorative symbol 41 is stopped is executed. Specifically, a shielding image (for example, an eye-catching image including a model name, model-specific characters, etc.) that shields the background image, the decorative pattern 41, and the like is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed, and the decorative pattern 41 is returned to the position before the start of the SP ready-to-win effect and the first mode, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. Become. Also, the first pending icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the pending icon HI (see FIG. 96(g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 94, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the game control section 200 transmits a stop time command (symbol determination command) to the effect control section 300. FIG. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 96(h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 94, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control section 300 received the stop command, the first sub-variable display device 81 stops the variable display. In addition, disappearance display by animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, and stop display with the decorative pattern 41 ("565") and the small pattern 56 ("565") is started. (See FIG. 96(i)).

Then, at timing T11 in FIG. 94, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the disappearance display of the icon TI started, the animation disappearance display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 96(j)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 94, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reservation number changes from "2" to "1" and a big hit determination is performed, and the game control unit 200 transfers to the effect control unit 300. In response, a start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 218 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 221 is started (Fig. 96 (k )reference).

Next, at the timing of T13 in FIG. 94 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the production control unit 300 received the command at the start, the number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub The first holding display 83 becomes "1" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first variable display 81 starts from the beginning (extinguishing) (see FIG. 96(l) ).

Also, the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variable effect is started, the decorative pattern 41 starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, the small pattern 56 starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display), and the audible output of the variable BGM is resumed. (See FIG. 96(l)).

Although the SP reach fluctuation effect has been explained here, the same applies to the SP reach change effect. Playback of the normal reach BGM is interrupted during the blackout effect, and the output of the normal reach BGM is resumed in the SP reach effect after the blackout effect. SP reach BGM is output without doing.

In addition, although the SPSP reach fluctuation effect has been described here, the case where the SP reach change effect is lost is the same as the case where the SPSP reach effect is lost, and the decorative pattern 41 that is lost in the SP reach effect is temporarily stopped. Then, a first stop suggesting effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is executed to suggest that the decorative pattern 41 should be stopped and displayed. , the decorative pattern 41 returns to the normal size and the first mode, resulting in a temporary stop display.

Also, when the read-ahead zone effect is executed and the read-ahead zone background is displayed and the ready-to-reach state is reached, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed. It is the same as the case where the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect are executed in the state where the background image is displayed and the ready-to-reach effect is executed, but the decorative pattern 41 that fails in the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is temporarily stopped. Then, a first stop suggesting effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed is executed, and when the first stop suggesting effect is completed, the normal background image ( For example, mode A (background image) is resumed, and the decorative pattern 41 returns to the normal size and the first mode, and is temporarily stopped.

Thus, in the first variation effect (normal reach variation effect) in which the blackout effect (suggestion effect) that suggests whether or not the SP reach effect is executed is executed, the reproduction of the normal reach BGM is continued during the blackout effect. After the blackout effect, the muted normal reach BGM is returned to audible output, and a blackout effect (suggestive effect) is performed to suggest whether or not the SP reach effect will be executed. In the executed second variation performance (SP/SPSP reach variation performance), reproduction of normal reach BGM is interrupted during blackout performance, and SP reach BGM is output in SP reach performance after blackout performance. . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of voice control when executing the SP ready-to-win effect, and to improve the degree of freedom of voice control.

Also, when the SP reach effect is started during the display of the first background image (for example, the mode A background image which is the normal background image) or the second background image (look-ahead zone background image) corresponding to the normal gaming state, usually The background image is changed to a third background image (SP ready-to-win background image) showing that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than the background image, and the decorative pattern 41 forming the ready-to-win state and temporarily stopped is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size. do. When the three decorative patterns 41 are lost and temporarily stopped, the background image is changed to the first background image (mode A background image instead of the normal background image), and the three decorative patterns 41 are stopped and displayed in the normal size. It has become. Therefore, the performance effect of the SP ready-to-win performance can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, even during execution of the SP ready-to-win effect in which the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 changes, the mode of the effect action of the hold icon HI and the icon TI (contents of action, period of action, etc.) does not change. ing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the SP ready-to-win effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the icon TI is displayed while the hold icon HI is hidden. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the SPSP ready-to-win effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, after the SPSP ready-to-win effect ends, the display of the pending icon HI (normal display mode pending icon, special display mode pending icon) is resumed. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the variable performance will be executed again after the variable performance in which the SPSP ready-to-win performance has been executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the display of the pending icon HI (suspended icon in the normal display mode, pending icon in the special display mode) is maintained when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is not executed after the execution of the SP ready-to-win effect, while the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. However, the display of the small pattern 56 is maintained regardless of whether or not the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed after the execution of the SP ready-to-win effect. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable display is being performed, thereby making it possible to enhance the amusement of the game.

Also, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect ends, a first stop suggesting effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to understand that the SPSP ready-to-win effect will end and that the decoration pattern 41 will be stopped and displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, a first stop suggesting effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed to restore the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 to the first mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the change in the display mode of the decorative pattern 41, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed to return from the SPSP reach background image to the mode A background image. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the change of the background image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI are displayed during the blackout effect, at least one of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI is hidden, and the display is resumed when the SP ready-to-win effect is started. may

In addition, when the effective period is generated during the blackout effect and the effect button 161 is operated or the effective period elapses, the development success effect or the development failure effect is executed, but the effect period should not be generated. may In this case, the development success production or development failure production may be executed, or the development success production or development failure production may be returned to the normal reach production or developed to the SP reach production. good.

In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are kept displayed during execution of the SP ready-to-win performance, and the pending icon HI is hidden and the icon TI is kept displayed during execution of the SP ready-to-win performance. However, the pending icon HI may be hidden while the icon TI is displayed while the SP ready-to-win performance is being executed, and the pending icon HI and the icon TI may be hidden during the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance.

(Concrete example when the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed)
97 to 99, a specific example of the case where the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is finished and the jackpot game is executed will be described.

FIG. 97 is a timing chart when the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed, and FIGS. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

Note that the timings T0 to T5 in FIG. 97 are basically the same as the timings T0 to T5 in FIG. 94, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T6 will be described.

First, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 97, when the output of the SPSP ready-to-win BGM is stopped in the final phase of the SPSP ready-to-win effect and the determined effect is started, the promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 161 and the effective period of the effect button 161 are displayed. is started. Specifically, the image display unit 114 displays an operation prompting image SSG imitating the effect button 161, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (no output), and the prompting sound “press” is emitted from the speaker 156. It is output (see FIG. 98(e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 97, when the effect button 161 is operated or the effective period elapses, a determined success effect suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed is executed. Specifically, the first movable member 115a and the second movable member 115b descend (largely descend) to the performance position, and the second movable member 115b moves in the left-right direction. In addition, the determination success image SEF is displayed on the image display unit 114, and the success sound of “Kyuin kyuin” is output from the speaker 156. FIG. In addition, by temporarily stopping the central decorative pattern 41 at the upper left corner of the screen, the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped at the big hit ("555") (Fig. 98 (f) )reference).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 97, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect has passed, the first stop suggesting effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the decorative pattern 41 is stopped is executed. Specifically, a shielding image (an eye-catching image including the model name) that shields the background image, the decorative pattern 41, and the like is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed, and the decorative pattern 41 is returned to the position before the start of the SP ready-to-win effect and the first mode, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. Become. Also, the first pending icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the pending icon HI (see FIG. 98(g)).

In addition, the second stop suggestion effect is started to suggest that the decorative symbol 41 is stop-displayed when the jackpot comes out. Specifically, the effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the decorative pattern 41 and disappears, and the light emitting display presentation is repeated twice at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.75 seconds) (see FIG. 98(g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 97, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the game control section 200 transmits a stop time command (symbol determination command) to the effect control section 300. FIG. Also, the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 99(h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 97, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control section 300 received the stop command, the first sub-variation display 81 stops the variation display. Further, along with the end of the second stop suggestion effect, disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started, and the decorative pattern 41 ("555") and the small pattern 56 ("555") are displayed. ”) is started (see FIG. 99(i)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation, the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation ends (see FIG. 99(j)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 97, when the special symbol stop time elapses, a jackpot game opening designation command is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 (see FIG. 99(k)).

Next, at the timing of T13 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control unit 300 receives the command for specifying the opening of the jackpot game, the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. Specifically, an opening effect screen including the words "big win" is displayed, and the right corner of the screen suggests that a game ball should be shot aiming at the right area (big prize winning opening) of the game area 111. A right hitting image UG is displayed.

In this way, in the variation performance of the big win, the display of the pending icon HI (suspended icon in the normal display mode, pending icon in the special display mode) is maintained when the SP ready-to-win performance is not executed after the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance. On the other hand, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, it is hidden, but the display of the small pattern 56 is maintained regardless of whether or not the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed after the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. there is Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable display is being performed, thereby making it possible to enhance the amusement of the game.
It should be noted that, in the variation effect that becomes a big hit, even if the SP reach effect does not develop after the normal reach effect, the display of the hold icon HI (normal display mode hold icon, special display mode hold icon) is maintained. there is

In addition, when the SPSP ready-to-win performance for a big hit ends, a second stop suggesting performance (light-emitting display performance in which the effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the decorative pattern 41 and disappears) is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to understand that the SPSP ready-to-win effect will end and that the jackpot decoration pattern 41 will be stop-displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect time (0.75 seconds) for one time of the light emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect and the cumulative effect time (1.5 seconds) are the period ( 2 seconds or 3 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make the light-emitting display effect in the second stop suggesting effect stand out, and to emphasize that the jackpot decorative pattern is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the production mode of the light emitting display production in the second stop suggestion production, the effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the decorative pattern 41 and disappears. The effect image EF may move from one end to the other end of the character image and disappear, or the effect image EF may move from one end to the other end of the character image and disappear.

In addition, although the cumulative effect time of the light emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is shorter than the period (2 seconds or 3 seconds) of the effect operation of the pending icon, the effect time of one light emitting display effect is, for example, By setting the duration to 2 seconds, the cumulative effect time may be longer than the period (2 seconds or 3 seconds) of the effect operation of the hold icon HI.

In addition, although the hold icon HI is redisplayed after the SPSP ready-to-win effect is finished, the hold icon HI may not be displayed again depending on the type of SPSP ready-to-win effect. Specifically, when the first SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed, or when the second SPSP ready-to-win performance that results in a loss is executed, the holding icon HI is re-displayed after the first stop suggesting performance is executed, and a big win is achieved. When the second SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed, the opening performance of the jackpot game is executed as it is without executing the first stop suggestion performance (display of the eye-catching image) or the redisplay of the holding icon HI. may

In addition, after the end of the SPSP ready-to-win performance, the pending icon HI is redisplayed. The hold icon HI may be hidden again. In this case, after the execution of the resurrection performance, the decorative patterns 41 of the big win are temporarily stopped, and the reserved icon may be displayed again, or after the execution of the resurrection performance, the decorative patterns 41 of the big win are displayed or reserved. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be executed as it is without redisplaying the icon HI.

In addition, when the stop time command can be normally received during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41, the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 in the reach-losing variation effect is longer than the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 in the big win variation effect. However, when the stop time command cannot be normally received in the big hit variation performance, the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 in the big win variation performance is longer than the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 in the reach loss variation performance. It is designed to be longer. In addition, when the stop time command and the opening designation command cannot be normally received in the big hit variation performance, the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 in the big win variation performance is longer than the temporary stop time of the decorative pattern 41 in the reach loss variation performance. It's getting longer.

(Specific example of recovering from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance)
100 to 103, a specific example of recovering from a power failure that occurred during the variable presentation will be described.

FIG. 100 is a timing chart in the case of recovering from a power failure that occurred during a variable effect, and FIGS. 101 to 103 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 100, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 and the variable display on the sub first variable display 81 ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218, the reservation number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the three decorative patterns 41 are scrolled (updated and changed), and the small patterns 56 are updated and changed (scrolled and switched). Also, in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the pending icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 101(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 100, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is interrupted, the game control section 200 performs the power interruption processing, and the first special symbol display 221 and the like. , the sub information display 80 including the sub first variable display, etc., the image display unit 114, the sub display, etc. are in a non-display state, and the game sound (variation BGM, etc.) output from the speaker 156 is also in a non-output state (see FIG. 101(b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 100, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resumed, a reading screen (initial screen) including characters "NOW LOADING" is displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sub display device, From the game control unit 200 in which the game control state has been restored to the state before the power failure occurred, the power ON command (here, the second power supply indicating that the special symbol is being displayed fluctuating) is sent to the effect control unit 300 A recovery designation command, a first special symbol memory designation command, and a second special symbol memory designation command) are transmitted. In addition, the information display on the display 130 is resumed, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 is resumed from the state before the power is cut off, and the first special symbol reservation display 218 "2" display of the first pending number of is also restarted (see FIG. 101(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 100, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control unit 300 received the power ON command, the above-described power recovery notification and various accessories (board accessories, frame accessories) are initialized. As the operation (including the return operation) is started, information display on the sub-information display 80 is started (see FIG. 101(d)).

At this time, in the image display unit 114 during the power restoration notification, the power restoration image displayed on the entire screen is set as the highest layer, and various effect images (background image according to the effect mode at the time of power restoration, The decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 that are the initial appearance of the power restoration image, the hold number at the time of power restoration and the hold icon HI according to the production mode, the hold number display 55 according to the hold number at the time of power restoration, etc.) are from the power restoration image. Image data for power recovery notification set in the lower layer is also generated and displayed. At this time, the visual recognition of various performance images is restricted by the power restoration image, but the background image and the pending icon are in the state of performance operation, and the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are stopped and displayed at the pattern stop position. Become. In addition, even if the hold icon HI is in the special display mode before the power failure occurs, it is set to the normal display mode (white icon), and the icon TI is not displayed even if it was displayed before the power failure. (see FIG. 101(d)).

In addition, in the sub information display 80 during the power restoration notification, the sub first variable display 81 and the sub second variable display 82 are in a state of stopped display without variable display, and the sub first holding display 83 and the sub The second pending display 84 displays the pending number (see FIG. 101(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 100 (during the power restoration notification), when the game ball wins the first starting port 121, the first reservation number becomes "3" and the first special symbol reservation display 218 is displayed as "3", and a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 (see FIG. 102(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 100, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control unit 300 received the winning command, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub-first pending display 83 are displayed as "3 ” is displayed. In addition, additional display of the suspension icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode on the third display portion of the first suspension icon display area 70B by animation is started, but it is visually recognized by the power restoration image set in the upper layer. is regulated (see FIG. 102(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 100, after the additional display of the pending icon HI animation is completed, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the game control unit 200 sends a stop time command (symbol) to the effect control unit 300. confirmation command) is sent. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 102(g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 100, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control unit 300 received the stop command, the power restoration notification ends, and various effect images whose visual recognition has been restricted by the power restoration image are displayed. (Background image according to the production mode at the time of power restoration, decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 that are the initial results at the time of power restoration, pending icon HI according to the current number of holds and production mode, depending on the current number of holds 103(h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 100, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reservation number becomes "2" from "3" and a big hit determination is made, and the game control unit 200 sends the effect control unit 300 In response, a start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 218 becomes "2" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 221 is started (Fig. 103 (i )reference).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 100 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control unit 300 received the command at the start, the number of pending display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub-th The 1-hold display 83 becomes "2" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the first sub-variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 103(j)).

Also, the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variable performance is started, the decorative pattern 41 starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, the small pattern 56 starts the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display), and the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is started. (See FIG. 103(j)).

Then, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 100 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the pending icons HI is completed, the first one is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). Further, the scroll display (update change) of the decorative pattern 41 is started (see FIG. 103(k)).

It should be noted that when the power supply is restored to production mode D (probability variable gaming state) and when it is controlled to production mode F, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 will be displayed in the fourth mode, but the decoration The numeral image of the symbol 41 becomes the initial decoration symbol "753" common to the case of control to the production mode A (normal game state) at the time of power restoration. In addition, when it is controlled to production mode D (probability variable gaming state) at the time of power restoration, the initial decoration pattern is set to "246" etc. so that it can be distinguished from the case where it is controlled to production mode A (normal game state) at the time of power restoration. can be

In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped during the customer waiting state and the control state of the game is restored, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. Therefore, the production control unit 300 receives the customer waiting state designation command during display of the reading screen (initial screen), and waits for the execution of the variable production without notifying the power restoration (decorative pattern 41) will be displayed.

In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped during the jackpot game and the control state of the game is restored, the time until the next round designation command or ending designation command is output from the game control unit 200 Therefore, after the loading screen (initial screen) is displayed, the power restoration notification is performed, and then the effect screen corresponding to the command is displayed.

Thus, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbols is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power restoration image displayed in the entire display area of the image display unit 114 is set to the upper layer. By generating image data in which the suspended icon displayed in the icon display area of the image display unit 114 is set as a lower layer and displayed on the image display unit 114, the suspended icon in the lower layer is restricted from being viewed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused after the power is restored. In addition, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce control data and control load related to display control.

In addition, even if the visual recognition of the pending icon is restricted by the power restoration image, when a special symbol storage designation command indicating that the number of pending has increased is received, according to the increase Image data including a pending icon is generated. Therefore, the same display control as when the power restoration image is not displayed can be performed, so it is possible to reduce control data and control load related to display control.

Further, even when the visual recognition of the pending icon is restricted by the power restoration image, the pending icon and the background image perform the effect operation. Therefore, the same display control as when the power restoration image is not displayed can be performed, so it is possible to reduce control data and control load related to display control.

Also, even if the visibility of the hold icon is restricted by the power restoration image, if the number of holds increases, the hold icon will be additionally displayed (increased display) by animation. there is Therefore, the same display control as when the power restoration image is not displayed can be performed, so it is possible to reduce control data and control load related to display control.

In addition, when the power supply is restored, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 is different between the case of being controlled to the first production mode (production mode A) and the case of being controlled to the second production mode (production modes D, F). However, the numeric image of the decorative pattern 41 is designed to be common numeric information ("753"). Therefore, even if the display mode of the decorative pattern differs depending on the presentation mode after the power supply is restored, it is possible to easily grasp that the power supply is restored.

Also, in the first reserved display area (first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219) and second reserved display area (sub first reserved display 83, sub second reserved display 84) , a third reserved display area (a reserved display area of the image display unit 114) in which the reserved display is easier to visually recognize than the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area, although the display mode of the reserved display is not changed based on the result of prefetching; , it is possible to change the display mode of the pending display (holding icon HI) based on the result of prefetching. , than the restart timing of the pending display (visible display of the pending icon HI) in the third pending display area (the pending display area of the image display unit 114), the first pending display area (first special symbol pending display 218 , second special symbol reservation display 219) and the second reservation display area (sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84). Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the number of pending games at an early timing while notifying that the power supply is being restored. Note that the timing of resuming the suspended display in the first suspended display area may be earlier than the timing of resuming the suspended display in the second suspended display area.

Further, the hold icon HI, which was displayed in the special display mode before the power failure occurred, is displayed in the normal display mode after the power is restored. Therefore, there is no need to back up and store information indicating that the pending icon was in the special display mode in the performance control unit 300, and it is possible to avoid complication of the hardware configuration of the performance control unit 300.例文帳に追加.

In addition, after the power supply is restored, the holding icon is visibly displayed after the variable display (blinking due to movement lighting of the LED) is resumed on the first special symbol display device 221 (the second special symbol display device 222). It's like Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, after the power restoration image is displayed, the initial action (including the return action) of various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub display device, effect button 161) performs the effect operation at different timing for each role. is to be executed in the same manner as Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the initial action of various accessories has been executed due to the occurrence of the power restoration, thereby avoiding the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that it is a performance action.

Note that the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82 do not perform variable display during the power restoration notification and are in a stopped display state, but during the power restoration notification ( After receiving the second power supply restoration designation command indicating that the special symbols are being variably displayed), the variable display may be performed, and the stop display may be performed when the stop command (symbol determination command) is received.

(Concrete example when the command at the start could not be received normally during the look-ahead effect)
104 to 106, a specific example of a case where the command at start cannot be normally received during the look-ahead effect will be described.

FIG. 104 is a timing chart when the command at the start cannot be normally received during the look-ahead effect, and FIGS. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 104, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 and the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 218, the reservation number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displayed as "2". In addition, three decorative patterns 41 and three small patterns 56 are updated and changed (scrolling display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling. Also, in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the pending icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 105(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 104, when the look-ahead zone effect is started, the above-described in-zone effect is executed. Specifically, instead of the mode A background image, the look-ahead zone background image is displayed in a horizontally scrolled state, and the zone image ZG including the character image "ZONE" is displayed. Also, the volume of the fluctuating BGM is lowered and the output of the zone BGM is started (see FIG. 105(b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 104, when the center decorative pattern 41 scrolled (updated and changed) is temporarily stopped, output of a temporary stop sound is started from the speaker 156, and the character of the central decorative pattern 41 is produced. An action (pre-stop action of shaking the head) is performed and all the decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 105(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 104, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound stops, and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol passes, the game control unit 200 to the production control unit 300 A stop time command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted to. In addition, a losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 105(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 104, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control unit 300 received the stop command, the first sub-variable display device 81 stops the variable display. Also, disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started, and stop display of the decorative pattern 41 ("523") and the small pattern 56 ("523") is started ( See FIG. 105(e)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 104, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation, the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation ends (see FIG. 105(f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 104, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reservation number changes from "2" to "1" and a big hit determination is performed, and the game control unit 200 transfers to the effect control unit 300. In response, a start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the first special symbol holding display 218 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 221 is started (Fig. 106 (g )reference).

However, since the effect control unit 300 could not normally receive the command at the start, the pending display should be updated at the timing of T7 in FIG. The update of the device 83, the shift display of the pending icon HI) and the variable effect should be executed, but they are not executed. Therefore, the stop display period of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 is extended, and the look-ahead effect performance which should be executed over two times of the variable performance from the current variation performance is not started. However, the horizontal scrolling of the look-ahead zone background image and the rendering operation of the pending icon HI are continued even during the extended period of the stop display period of the decorative symbols 41 and the small symbols 56 . (See FIG. 106(h)). That is, the horizontal scrolling of the look-ahead zone background image is continued, and the display of the zone image ZG is continued. In addition, the periodic shaking motion of the hold icon HI continues.

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 104, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, a stop command (symbol determination command) is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. FIG. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 106(i)).

However, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the effect control unit 300 receives the stop command, the disappearance display of the icon TI and the stop display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 should be executed. will not be executed.

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 104, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reservation number changes from "1" to "0" and a big hit determination is performed, and the game control unit 200 transfers to the effect control unit 300. In response, a start command (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the first special symbol holding display 218 becomes "0" display and the first special symbol variation display (first cycle variation) on the first special symbol display 221 is started (Fig. 106 (j )reference).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 104 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control unit 300 received the command at the start, the number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub The first holding display 83 becomes "0" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 106(k)).

Further, of the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI (white icon) corresponding to the previous variable display of the special symbol is erased without animation, and the second pending icon HI is erased. The pending icon HI (blue icon) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol this time displayed on the display section is displayed in non-animation on the first display section. Then, the hold icon HI displayed on the first display portion starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the variable effect is started and the decorative pattern 41 starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, and the small pattern 56 starts updating and changing (scrolling display, switching display) (see FIG. 106(k)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 104 (during the second cycle variation), when a predetermined period has passed since the start of floating display of the decorative pattern 41, the look-ahead effect to be executed from the previous variation performance to two times of variation performance. The effect is started with a delay of one time, and a blue effect image EF is displayed around the decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 106(l)).

After that, at the timing of T12 (during the fourth cycle change) in FIG. 104, when the shift display of the pending icon HI is completed, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). At this time, an icon change effect at the start of variation is performed, the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and scroll display (update variation) of the decorative pattern 41 is started thereafter.

In this way, when the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the command at the start, and the variable effect is not executed during the variable display of the special symbols to be executed in the predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect). Even so, a predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding the progress of the game due to non-execution of the predetermined look-ahead effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the production control unit 300 cannot normally receive the command at the start and the fluctuation production is not executed during the variable display of the special design to start the predetermined look-ahead production (read-ahead effect production), the special design is displayed. The start of a predetermined look-ahead performance is regulated during variable display, and when the variable performance is executed during the variable display of the special symbols to be executed next, the look-ahead regulated during the variable display of the special symbols. The performance is about to start. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding the progress of the game due to non-execution of the predetermined look-ahead effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, if the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the command at the start, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, but if the variable effect is not executed, the first look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed. However, the second look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect effect) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding the progress of the game due to non-execution of the predetermined look-ahead effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a variable BGM (suggestive effect sound) is output during the execution of the variable effect (suggestive effect) for suggesting the result of the big hit determination, and the target variable effect that is the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead zone effect is executed. A zone BGM (advance performance sound) suggesting the possibility of execution of a special game is output from before, and the zone BGM is output even after the target variation performance is started, and when the zone BGM is being output. , the suggestive effect is output at a volume lower than that of the zone BGM. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the look-ahead zone production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that while the look-ahead zone effect is being executed (while the zone BGM is being output), the volume of the variable BGM is reduced, but the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect. can be

In addition, even if the icon change effect or the look-ahead zone effect, which is executed over a plurality of times of the variable effect, is not executed because the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the command at the time of start, the effect will be executed next. The icon change effect or the look-ahead zone effect may be started from the variation effect to be performed.

In addition, a look-ahead effect production is executed as a look-ahead production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. A look-ahead countdown performance may be executed in which a countdown sound is output), or a look-ahead chance performance is executed in which a so-called chance number (556, 667, etc. with a certain rule) is stopped and displayed for each variable performance. Alternatively, these three look-ahead effects may be executed.

(Concrete example when a power-on designation command is received while a menu image is being displayed)
A specific example of receiving a power-on designation command while a menu image is displayed will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG.

FIG. 107 is a timing chart when a power-on designation command is received while the menu image is being displayed, and FIG. 108 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. Here, the explanation will be given for the production mode A, but since the production modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 107, the player is in a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed. At this time, the first special symbol display device 221 displays a failing special symbol, the image display unit 114 horizontally scrolls the mode A background image (effect operation), and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed. is stop-displayed with the losing roll ("537") which is the stop result of the previous variable effect. Also, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is in a state of being stopped (muted) (see FIG. 108(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 107, when the effect button 161 is operated, the effective period of the menu operation is entered, and the image display section 114 displays a plurality of selection items (pachinko) in a state overlapping in front of the decorative pattern 41. "Model description" item for displaying explanations about the gaming machine 100, "Production customization" item for customizing the production in the variable production, and "Pachi log" item for log management linked to the mobile phone) is displayed (see FIG. 108(b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 107, when the power supply to the game control unit 200 stops due to an abnormality in the wiring connecting the power supply board 160 and the game control unit 200 (disconnection, connector disconnection, etc.), the game control unit 200 Processing at the time of power-off is performed, and the display 130 including the first special symbol display 221 is put into a non-display state. At this time, the display states of the sub-information display 80, the image display section 114, and the sub-display continue (see FIG. 108(c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 107, when the power supply to the game control unit 200 is resumed, a checksum determination is made as to whether or not the data in the game RWM area is damaged. A process for initializing the control state of the game is performed. Then, a power ON command (here, power-on designation command, first special symbol memory designation command, second special symbol memory designation command) is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 . Further, information display on the display device 130 (display of a lost special symbol on the first special symbol display device 221, etc.) is started (see FIG. 108(d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 107, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the effect control unit 300 received the power-on command, the image display unit 114 and the sub display device read "NOW LOADING" including the characters. The screen (initial screen) is displayed, the information display on the sub-information display 80 is momentarily hidden, and the game sound (variable BGM, etc.) is not output from the speaker 156 (see FIG. 108(e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 107, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the reading screen (initial screen) was displayed, the above-described power-on notification and the initial operation (return) of various accessories (board accessories, frame accessories) (including operation) is started, and information display on the sub-information display 80 is started (see FIG. 108(f)).

At this time, in the image display unit 114, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are stopped and displayed in front of the mode A background image where the horizontal scrolling (effect operation) is started with the initial result ("135") when the power is turned on. is displayed, and "0" is displayed on the reservation number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the reservation number display 55 of the second start port 122. Also, a power-on notification sound is output from the speaker 156, and muted output is started at the beginning of the fluctuating BGM (see FIG. 108(f)).

It should be noted that even when the power restoration specifying command is received while the menu image MG is being displayed, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 displayed on the image display unit 114 are the initial numbers ("753") at the time of power restoration. Except for the fact that the power-on notification sound is not output, the operation is basically the same as when the power-on designation command is received.

Where to turn down the volume Also, when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is received while the volume value image OG is being displayed, It is the same as when a command is received.

Thus, the command received by the effect control unit 300 from the game control unit 200 while the menu image MG is being displayed on the image display unit 114 is the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command). In this case, the menu image is rendered invisible on the image display unit 114, and an image (reading screen, etc.) corresponding to the power-on command is displayed. Therefore, cooperation between the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 can be smoothly performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shoot the game ball by transmitting the launch permission designation command to the payout control unit 330 in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. By transmitting a launch permission designation command to the payout control unit 330 when the progress control of is started, the game ball may be launched after the game becomes ready for play.

Further, in the present embodiment, the payout control unit 330 can perform payout control even in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on the payout request from the machine, but after the game progress control is started and the game becomes playable, the game ball is issued based on the payout request from the ball lending machine. It may be possible to pay out (ball lending).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control unit 330 (payout RAM333), when the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on, the payout control unit 330 (payout RAM333) unpaid However, the payout controller 330 (payout RAM 333) may be supplied with backup power. In this case, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on At this time, if the unpaid-out ball number data remains in the payout control unit 330 (payout RAM 333), the unpaid-out ball number data remains even in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. It may be possible to put out game balls based on the data.

Also, in this embodiment, the display 130 is provided outside the game area 111 , but the display 130 may be provided inside the game area 111 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, a prize ball (award value) is given based on the satisfaction of the award conditions (winning of the game ball to the winning opening, the starting opening, and the big winning opening). Balls may be managed as data, and winning ball data may be given (added to the held ball data).

Also, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect, but a plurality of look-ahead zone effects with different degrees of expectation for big wins may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during the variable effect, the zone image of one of the look-ahead zone effects is displayed on the upper and/or lower side of the screen so as to traverse the screen, and the image of the other look-ahead zone effect is displayed. It is preferable to display the zone image on the left and/or right side of the screen so as to traverse the screen. In this way, the two look-ahead zone effects can be made compatible, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Also, in the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed as the jackpot announcement effect, but instead of the blackout effect, the image display unit 114 may execute a whiteout effect in which the image display unit 114 turns white. In this case, the basic flow of presentation should be the same as the blackout presentation.

Also, in the present embodiment, the normal game state and the specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) were basically the same execution mode of the variable production, for example, the previous stage production in the normal game state Later stage production (case of pre-reach production and reach production, case of normal reach production and SP reach production, case of SP reach production and SP reach production, case of temporary stop of reach production and decorative pattern 41, during reach production and decoration The first information that is advantageous to the player (information suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit, information on the execution of a special game, etc.) during the execution of the latter-stage performance of the variable performance consisting of a temporary stop of the pattern 41, etc. is reported. Second information different from the first information (additional information of music selectable by operating the performance key 162, achievement of mission status, etc.) may be notified. In addition, as a variable performance consisting of the front stage performance and the rear stage performance in the normal game state, the case where the common rear stage performance is executed after the first front stage performance is executed, and the case where the second front stage performance different from the first front stage performance is executed. A common post-stage effect may be executed, and information relating to the execution of the special game may be reported in the common post-stage effect executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, a first determination is made as to whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is to be made, the right of the first determination is stored, and when a predetermined condition is established, before the first determination is made Secondly, a second determination is made as to whether or not to enter the special game state, and a predetermined effect can be executed using the effect means including the image display unit 114, for example.
A reserved pattern corresponding to the stored right can be displayed on the image display unit 114, and a predetermined pattern corresponding to the right is displayed on the image display unit 114 when the first determination is made for the right. It is possible, based on the result of the second determination, when executing the first change effect to change the reserved symbol to the first display mode suggesting that the possibility of entering the special game state is high, and the first determination or Based on the result of the second judgment, there is a case where a second change performance is executed to change the predetermined symbols to a second display mode suggesting that the special game state is likely to occur, and the reserved symbols and the predetermined symbols are executed. is displayed, a predetermined suggestive effect can be executed, and then the first change effect or the second change effect can be executed, and the possibility of entering a special game state based on the result of the first determination. When the special performance suggesting that the game is high is not executed, the first change performance is more likely to be executed than the second change performance when the right determined to be in the special game state by the second determination is stored. may be configured. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect of changing predetermined symbols (the relevant symbols) and further reserved symbols that can enhance the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not a special game can be executed, and when executing the notification effect, for example, an operation valid state for validating the operation to the effect button 161, and a specific game state When it is determined not to execute the special game in the first period, the notification effect is executed at the first rate, and in the second period shorter than the first period in the specific game state, the special game is determined not to be executed, the notification effect may be executed at a second rate higher than the first rate. As a result, the player's interest can be enhanced by using the effect button 161, for example.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to carry out a special effect suggesting that a jackpot game is highly likely to be played. , and when a second performance is performed to suggest that there is a possibility that the jackpot game may not be performed, and when it is determined to perform the jackpot game after performing the second performance in the special performance. To make it possible to carry out a re-challenge performance suggesting whether or not a jackpot game will be performed even when it is not played, and to perform a re-challenge performance before performing a second performance in a special performance whether or not the re-challenge performance is performed. , a configuration may be adopted in which it is possible to perform a suggestion effect suggesting that there is a possibility that a re-challenge effect will be performed. The re-challenge performance is, for example, a performance that can be executed after a special performance (normal ready-to-win performance, SP ready-to-win performance, SPSP ready-to-win performance, etc.) suggests that there is a possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be lost. The re-challenge effect includes, for example, an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 161 . Also, as a re-challenge effect, a mini-game may be played by a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the effect image. In addition, as a re-challenge effect, a battle between characters appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be performed in the effect image. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in relation to the execution of the re-challenge effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbols are variably displayed along with the variable display of the special symbols, and the decorative symbols indicating the determination result are displayed stationary along with the stop display of the special symbols, and it is determined that the special game is to be executed. During the variable display of the decorative symbols performed in response to this, it is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying that the special game will be executed.
Then, when a determination result indicating that the special game is determined to be executed is obtained, a first variation pattern in which the special symbol variation time is the first time, and a special symbol variation time longer than the first time. Any one of the plurality of variation patterns is selected, including a second variation pattern that is longer than the second time. Furthermore, when the first variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect is executed as the notice effect with a first probability, and when the second change pattern is selected, the first probability is A second notice performance different from the first notice performance is executed as the notice performance with a different second probability, and when the second notice performance is executed, the special symbols are stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbols is started. Until the display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed when the variable display of the special pattern is started, and the decorative pattern is smaller than the decorative pattern of the first mode during the execution of the predetermined effect during the variable display of the special pattern. When displaying the decorative pattern of the second mode and executing the first notice performance, the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed while the decorative pattern of the second mode is not displayed, and the first notice performance is executed. , when the first notice effect is executed, the probability that the game is controlled in the second game state more advantageous to the player than in the first game state after the special game is executed is that the game is controlled in the first game state. It is good also as a structure higher than the probability controlled. As a result, it becomes possible to execute highly interesting performances.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed with the variable display of the special pattern, and the decorative pattern 41 indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed with the stop display of the special pattern, and it is determined that the special game is to be executed. During the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 that is performed in response to the event, it is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying that the special game will be executed.
Then, when a determination result indicating that the special game is determined to be executed is obtained, a first variation pattern in which the special symbol variation time is the first time, and a special symbol variation time longer than the first time. Any one of the plurality of variation patterns is selected, including a second variation pattern that is longer than the second time.
Then, it is possible to execute a notice effect executed at a predetermined execution timing and a notice effect executed at a plurality of execution timings, and when the first variation pattern is selected, the notice is given with a first probability. When the first notice effect is executed as the effect and the second variation pattern is selected, the second notice effect different from the first notice effect is executed as the notice effect with a second probability different from the first probability. In the case of executing the second notice effect, the first mode is used when starting the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 during the period from when the variable display of the special pattern is started until the special pattern is stopped and displayed. decoration pattern 41 is displayed, and during execution of a predetermined performance during the variable display of the special pattern, a second mode decoration pattern 41 smaller than the first mode decoration pattern 41 is displayed, and a first notice performance is executed. In this case, the first notice effect may be executed while the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed and the decorative pattern 41 of the second mode is not displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to execute highly interesting performances.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed with the variable display of the special pattern, and the decorative pattern 41 indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed with the stop display of the special pattern, and it is determined that the special game is to be executed. During the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 that is performed in response to the event, it is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying that the special game will be executed.
Then, when a determination result indicating that the special game is determined to be executed is obtained, a first variation pattern in which the special symbol variation time is the first time, and a special symbol variation time longer than the first time. Any one of the plurality of variation patterns is selected, including a second variation pattern that is longer than the second time. Also, when the first variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect is executed as the notice effect with the first probability, and when the second change pattern is selected, the first probability is A second notice performance different from the first notice performance is executed as the notice performance with a different second probability, and when the second notice performance is executed, the special symbols are stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbols is started. Until the display of the decorative pattern 41 is started, the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed, and the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed during the execution of the predetermined effect during the variable display of the special pattern. A second mode decorative pattern 41 smaller than the second mode decorative pattern 41 is displayed, and in the first notice effect, a special game is executed while the first mode decorative pattern 41 is displayed and the second mode decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which the second announcement effect is more likely to be executed when the preliminary effect is executed than when the preliminary effect is not executed. As a result, it becomes possible to execute highly interesting performances.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed with the variable display of the special pattern, and the decorative pattern 41 indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed with the stop display of the special pattern, and it is determined that the special game is to be executed. During the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 which is performed in response to the event, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect for notifying that the special game will be executed, and the specific effect can be executed during the specific period.
Then, when a determination result indicating that the special game is determined to be executed is obtained, a first variation pattern in which the special symbol variation time is the first time, and a special symbol variation time longer than the first time. Any one of the plurality of variation patterns is selected, including a second variation pattern that is longer than the second time. Furthermore, when the first variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect is executed as the notice effect with a first probability, and when the second change pattern is selected, the first probability is A second notice performance different from the first notice performance is executed as the notice performance with a different second probability, and when the second notice performance is executed, the special symbols are stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbols is started. Until the display of the decorative pattern 41 is started, the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed, and the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed during the execution of the predetermined effect during the variable display of the special pattern. When the decorative pattern 41 of the second mode smaller than is displayed and the first notice effect is executed, the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed while the decorative pattern 41 of the second mode is not displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which one notice effect is executed and a specific effect can be executed as the notice effect. As a result, it becomes possible to execute highly interesting performances.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed with the variable display of the special pattern, and the decorative pattern 41 indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed with the stop display of the special pattern, and it is determined that the special game is to be executed. During the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 that is performed in response to the event, it is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying that the special game will be executed.
Then, when a determination result indicating that the special game is determined to be executed is obtained, a first variation pattern in which the special symbol variation time is the first time, and a special symbol variation time longer than the first time. any one of a plurality of variation patterns including a second variation pattern in which the second time is the longest and a third variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is a third time longer than the second time Choose a pattern. Also, when the first variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect is executed as the notice effect with the first probability, and when the second change pattern is selected, the first probability is A second notice performance different from the first notice performance is executed as the notice performance with a different second probability, while the first notice performance is not executed, and when the third variation pattern is selected, the first probability is obtained. The second notice performance is executed with a third probability different from both the second probability and the second probability, and when the second notice performance is executed, the special symbols are stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbols is started. Until then, when starting the variable display of the decorative pattern 41, the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed, and during the execution of the predetermined effect during the variable display of the special pattern, the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed. When the decorative pattern 41 of the small second mode is displayed and the first notice performance is executed, the decorative pattern 41 of the first mode is displayed while the decorative pattern 41 of the second mode is not displayed, and the first notice is given. It is good also as composition which performs production. As a result, it becomes possible to execute highly interesting performances.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of first operation pattern data indicating an operation pattern at the start of variation of one of the plurality of performance symbols are stored, and fluctuation of one of the plurality of performance symbols is performed. A plurality of second operation pattern data indicating operation patterns at the end are stored, and performance pattern data defining combinations of performances by performance symbols using the first operation pattern data and the second operation pattern data are stored.
Then, based on the performance pattern data, the variable performance is controlled, the first operation pattern data is used to control the operation at the start of the variation of the one performance pattern, and the second operation pattern data is used to control the one performance pattern. The operation at the end of the fluctuation is controlled, and the operation at the start of the fluctuation of one of the plurality of production patterns differs according to each of the plurality of first operation pattern data, and the operation of the plurality of production patterns The operation at the end of the fluctuation of one effect symbol may be configured differently according to each of the plurality of second operation pattern data. This makes it possible to simplify the control of the presentation.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of first operation pattern data indicating an operation pattern at the start of variation of one of the plurality of performance symbols are stored, and fluctuation of one of the plurality of performance symbols is performed. A plurality of second operation pattern data indicating an operation pattern at the end are stored, and third operation pattern data indicating an operation pattern during variation of one of the plurality of performance symbols is stored. Furthermore, it stores performance pattern data defining a combination of performances by performance symbols using the first motion pattern data, the second motion pattern data, and the third motion pattern data.
Then, based on the performance pattern data, the variable performance is controlled, the first operation pattern data is used to control the operation at the start of the variation of the one performance symbol, and the third operation pattern data is used to control the one performance symbol. The operation during variation is controlled, and the operation at the end of variation of one performance symbol is controlled using the second operation pattern data. Further, the operation at the start of variation of one of the plurality of performance symbols differs depending on each of the plurality of first operation pattern data, and the operation at the end of variation of one of the plurality of performance symbols. , differs depending on each of the plurality of second motion pattern data, and the first motion pattern data includes first motion pattern data A and first motion pattern data B. FIG. Then, when starting to variate a plurality of performance symbols based on the result of the special game determination, one of the plurality of performance symbols is started to vary using the first operation pattern data A, and a plurality of performances are generated. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is possible to start the variation of another effect symbol among the symbols using the first operation pattern data B. FIG. This makes it possible to simplify the control of the presentation.

[Design variation action production of decorative pattern 41]
Next, the symbol variation action effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described.
In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a symbol variation effect (symbol variation action effect) characterized by pre-variation actions and during-variation actions.
The pattern variation action rendering includes a default action and a special action different from the default action. In the present embodiment, when winning the jackpot, the execution probability of the symbol variation effect using the special action is increased compared to the case of losing. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, by executing a special action, the player is expected to win a big win.
It should be noted that the symbol variation action effect can be executed in appropriate combination with various symbol variation effects in the present embodiment.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, by executing a special action in the symbol variation effect that is executed when the lottery result is a big win, the player can win the big win in the symbol variation effect. can be expected. Here, depending on the type of special action to be described later, the degree of expectation for the big win may be varied. Furthermore, a special action may be provided which is used only when it is determined as a big hit and is not used when it is determined as a loss.
Further, for example, when it is determined by prior determination that there is a reservation for winning a big hit, a special action may be executed in the symbol variation performance before the symbol variation is performed for the suspension as a continuous notice performance. For example, when the pattern variation effect using the same type of special action is continuously executed (for example, two or more times or three or more times), compared with the case where the special action is performed only once , you may raise the expectation of the jackpot. That is, the more symbol variations using the same type of special action are executed in succession, the higher the expectation of a big win may be.

Next, default actions and special actions will be specifically described.
In the following description, the symbol variation effect in the time saving state will be described as an example, but the symbol variation action effect may be executed in the non time saving state.

(default action)
As shown in FIG. 109(1), the decorative design 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 109(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 momentarily performs a pre-variation action of moving upward so as to float. Further, as shown in FIG. 109(3), the decorative pattern 41 starts scrolling downward in the vertical direction. In this example, the three decorative designs 41 all move together (in sync).
Further, as shown in FIG. 109(4), the decorative pattern 41 is vertically scrolled downward at high speed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109(5), the scrolling speed of the decorative pattern 41 gradually decreases. In this example, the three decorative designs 41 all move together (in sync).
Then, as shown in FIG. 109(6), the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped, and the luminous image HG that performs the effect of emitting light behind the decorative patterns 41 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Is displayed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 109(7), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped when the special symbols stop changing. In the example shown in FIG. 109(7), the three decorative symbols 41 are the odds, and the lottery result indicates the odds.
Incidentally, when the lottery result of the big hit is shown, for example, after the high-speed scrolling of FIG. Definite stop at 41.

Next, the special action will be specifically described. The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment has four types of special actions: "reverse vertical scroll", "horizontal rotation variation", "enlargement variation", and "rotational variation".

(Special action (reverse vertical scroll))
As shown in FIG. 110(1), the decoration design 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 110(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 momentarily performs a pre-variation action of moving downward so as to sink. After that, as shown in FIG. 110(3), the decorative pattern 41 starts scrolling upward in the vertical direction. In this example, the three decorative designs 41 all move together (in sync). Here, the small pattern 56 of this embodiment fluctuates so as to scroll downward in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the decorative pattern 41 is a special action and the reverse vertical scrolling is performed, the directions of change (update) of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are different.
Further, as shown in FIG. 110(4), the decorative pattern 41 is vertically scrolled upward at high speed. In this example, the three decorative designs 41 all move together (in sync).

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(5), the scroll speed of the two decorative patterns 41 gradually decreases. Then, as shown in FIG. 110(6), the double decorative pattern 41 in which the two decorative patterns 41 are aligned is temporarily stopped. It should be noted that, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, the luminescent image HG is displayed behind the doublet decorative pattern 41 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 110(7), two decorative patterns 41 are displayed in reduced size and moved to the corner of the screen. Moreover, SP reach production is performed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 110(8), when the lottery result of the big hit is shown, the double decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped as the special pattern stops fluctuating.
In addition, when the lottery result of losing is shown, after the high-speed scrolling of FIG. 110(4), the winning decorative pattern 41 is determined and stopped.

(Special action (horizontal rotation variation))
As shown in FIG. 111(1), the decorative design 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 111(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. At this time, the three decorative patterns 41 momentarily perform a pre-variation action of laterally rotating to the right at each position. In addition, behind each decorative pattern 41, a number obtained by adding "+1" to the number of the currently displayed pattern is displayed. Specifically, when the numbers "1", "2" and "3" are shown as the three decorative patterns 41, the numbers "2", "3" and "4" are displayed behind the respective decorative patterns 41. displayed respectively. The numbers on the front side of the decorative pattern 41 and the numbers on the back side change their directions according to the lateral rotation (rotation) of the decorative pattern 41 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(3), the three decorative patterns 41 each start to rotate in the opposite leftward direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 111(4), each of the three decorative designs 41 rotates horizontally at high speed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111(5), the speed of horizontal rotation of the three decorative patterns 41 gradually decreases. Then, as shown in FIG. 111(6), the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the luminous image HG with the effect of emitting light behind the decorative pattern 41 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). be.
Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (7), the decorative design 41 is fixed and stopped when the special design stops fluctuating. In the example shown in FIG. 111(7), the three decorative symbols 41 are the odds, and the lottery result indicates the odds.
It should be noted that, when the lottery result of the jackpot is shown, for example, after the high-speed horizontal rotation of FIG. The determination stops at the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁

(Special action (extended change))
As shown in FIG. 112(1), the decorative design 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 112(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. At this time, each of the three decorative symbols 41 performs a pre-variation operation in which the display size is enlarged compared to before the start of variation.
Further, as shown in FIG. 112(3), the three decorative patterns 41 start scrolling downward while being enlarged. Further, as shown in FIG. 112(4), the three decorative patterns 41 are scrolled downward at high speed in the vertical direction while being displayed in an enlarged manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(5), the scrolling speed gradually decreases while the decorative pattern 41 remains enlarged. Then, as shown in FIG. 112(6), the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the luminous image HG with the effect of emitting light behind the decorative pattern 41 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). be.
Then, as shown in FIG. 112(7), the decorative design 41 is fixed and stopped as the special design stops fluctuating. In the example shown in FIG. 112(7), the three decorative symbols 41 are the odds, and the lottery result indicates the odds. Note that the three decorative patterns 41 are reduced from the enlarged state and returned to the original size (for example, the size before the start of variation) when the determination is stopped.
Incidentally, when the lottery result of the big hit is shown, for example, after the high-speed scrolling of FIG. Definite stop at 41.

(Special action (pachislot variation))
As shown in FIG. 113(1), the decorative design 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 113(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. At this time, the display size of the three decorative patterns 41 displayed on the screen is reduced, and the numbers "+1" are added to the upper and lower sides of the three decorative patterns 41 displayed on the screen. A number and a number obtained by subtracting "-1" from the number are displayed. That is, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed like a slot reel.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 113(3), scrolling is started in the vertical direction. This makes the reels of the slot appear to spin.
Then, as shown in FIG. 113(4), the three decorative patterns 41 scroll downward at high speed in the vertical direction.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113(5), the speed of scrolling the three decorative patterns 41 gradually decreases.
Then, as shown in FIG. 113(6), the double decorative pattern 41 in which the two decorative patterns 41 are aligned is temporarily stopped. It should be noted that, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, the luminescent image HG is displayed behind the doublet decorative pattern 41 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 113(7), two decorative patterns 41 are displayed in reduced size and moved to the corner of the screen. Moreover, SP reach production is performed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 113(8), when the lottery result of the big hit is shown, the decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as the special symbols stop fluctuating.
In addition, when the lottery result of losing is shown, after the high-speed scrolling of FIG.

Next, an example of the pattern variation action effect in the no time saving state will be described.
In this example, the decorative pattern 41 used from the start of the variable display in the non-time saving state is different from the decorative pattern 41 used from the start of the variable display in the time saving state. Specifically, as the decoration pattern 41 used in the time-saving gaming state, a number image SG surrounded by a circle image (see, for example, FIG. 109(1)) is used. On the other hand, a character image CG and a number image SG surrounded by a circle image are used as the decoration pattern 41 in the non-working time saving state.

Then, in the example of the symbol variation effect without time saving, the default action is the same as the series of operations described with reference to FIG. 109, except that the mode of the decorative symbol 41 is different. On the other hand, the symbol variation action effect in the symbol variation effect without time saving is as follows.

(Special action (reverse vertical scroll))
As shown in FIG. 114(1), the decorative design 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 114(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 momentarily performs a pre-variation action of moving downward so as to sink.
After that, as shown in FIG. 114(3), the decorative pattern 41 starts scrolling upward in the vertical direction. In this example, the three decorative designs 41 all move together (in sync). Here, the small pattern 56 of this embodiment fluctuates so as to scroll downward in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the decorative pattern 41 is a special action and the reverse vertical scrolling is performed, the directions of change (update) of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are different.
Further, as shown in FIG. 114(4), the decorative pattern 41 is vertically scrolled upward at high speed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 114(5), the speed of scrolling the two decorative patterns 41 is gradually reduced, and the scroll temporarily stops when the two decorative patterns 41 are aligned. That is, the normal reach effect is executed.
After that, as shown in FIG. 114(6), the scroll speed of the central decorative pattern 41 gradually decreases.
Then, as shown in FIG. 114(7), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped when the special symbols stop changing. In this example, the three decorative symbols 41 are the wins, and the wins are shown as the result of the lottery.

Incidentally, when the lottery result of the jackpot is shown, for example, after the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. The determination stops at the symbol 41 . Further, when the SP ready-to-win effect or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a reduced size, or the character image CG may not be used, and only the number image SG surrounded by the circle image may be used. There is

Also, in the symbol variation effect without time saving, in addition to the above-described "reverse vertical scroll", "horizontal rotation variation" (see FIG. 111), "enlargement variation" (see FIG. 112), and "rotational variation" (see FIG. 113) can perform special actions.

[Event 1 when a command cannot be received]
FIGS. 115(a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the event when no command is received and the chance eye light effect. Specifically, FIG. 115(a) is a timing chart when a command is received, and FIG. 115(b) is a timing chart when no command is received.

Here, the eye-of-chance light-emitting effect is an effect of executing the eye-of-chance display effect and displaying the light-emitting image of the eye-of-chance.
Further, the chance eye display effect is an effect of displaying the chance eye. Here, the chance eye is three decorative patterns 41 combined with different patterns of the same color. The chance eye display effect informs or suggests, for example, that there is a high possibility of winning a big hit in the next and subsequent special symbol variable displays. The chance eye display effect is one aspect of the advance notice effect. Any color may be used as the predetermined same color. As a chance eye, at least a part of each of the three decorative patterns 41 should be displayed in the same color. For example, as a chance eye display effect, the entire three decorative patterns 41 may be changed to green. Incidentally, the chance eye display effect is regarded as a same color effect in which a plurality of effect symbols are displayed in a predetermined same color pattern in a mode of notifying that the special game will not be played. Further, the execution timing of the chance eye display effect is not limited to when the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. For example, the chance display effect may be performed when the decorative pattern 41 starts to fluctuate, or the chance display effect may be performed while the decorative pattern 41 is fluctuating. Further, for example, the variation of the decorative symbols 41 may be started after the chance display effect is performed, or the chance symbol display effect may be performed immediately after the start of the variation of the decorative symbols 41 . Also, for example, the ready-to-win state may be established after the chance eye display effect is executed after the decorative pattern 41 starts to fluctuate. Moreover, even when any of the chance eye display effects is performed, a chance eye emission image, which will be described later, may be displayed.

Also, the chance eye light-emitting image is an image for making the player see as if the three decorative symbols 41, which are the chance eye, are emitting light. The chance-eye emission image is, for example, an image imitating light. The chance eye emission image may be displayed in any color. In the illustrated example, when a chance eye is displayed, when the decorative symbol 41 constituting the chance eye is temporarily stopped, the chance eye emission image is displayed around the area where the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 41 is displayed. to be displayed. Also, the chance eye light-emitting image may not be displayed around the area where the decorative design 41 is displayed, but may be displayed near the area where the decorative design 41 is displayed. Also, the chance eye light-emitting image may be displayed on the whole or part of the area where the decorative pattern 41 constituting the chance eye is displayed. Further, the chance eye luminescence image is not displayed in a state where the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped but the middle decorative symbol 41 is not temporarily stopped, and the three decorative symbols 41 which are the chance eyes are temporarily stopped. may be displayed by

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, commands are transmitted from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300 as the game progresses. Here, for example, the command transmitted by the game control unit 200 may not be received by the effect control unit 300 when an event such as a communication abnormality occurs between the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300. In other words, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect control section 300 may not be able to receive commands from the game control section 200 normally.

Below, processing of game control part 200 and production control part 300 when production control part 300 cannot receive a command is explained, referring to Drawing 115 (a) and (b). Specifically, first, the process for receiving a command will be described with reference to FIG. 115(a). Then, referring to FIG. 115(b), the processing when the command cannot be received will be described.

In the following description, it is assumed that the fluctuation start command and the pre-determination result command include a command specifying the number of reservations, that is, a command specifying the number of reservations.
Also, the chance eye light emitting effect in the following description is executed according to the scenario of the look-ahead effect, that is, the schedule data of the look-ahead effect. Here, the schedule data of the look-ahead effect specifically designates the contents of the effect to be executed in each of the plurality of consecutive symbol variations.

The schedule data of the look-ahead effect in the illustrated example designates that the chance eye light emitting effect is executed in each of the three consecutive symbol variations including the symbol variation (the variation) that is executed at the time of winning (Fig. See t13, t15, t17). In addition, the schedule data for the look-ahead effect designates the color of the chance eye light-emitting image to be displayed for each symbol variation. For example, the schedule data for the look-ahead effect is to display a blue chance light emission image in the first and second chance light emission effects, and display a green chance light emission image in the third chance light emission effect. and so on.

In addition, the production|presentation control part 300 has several schedule data previously, and selects and sets one schedule data according to a prior determination result command. Also, here, the schedule data will be described as an example of designating an effect for three consecutive symbol variations including the variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the schedule data may designate an effect in a plurality of symbol variations that do not include the variation.

Now, as shown in FIG. 115(a), when a command is received, the game control section 200 starts the variation of the special symbol (see t11 in the figure). At this time, the game control section 200 transmits a variation start command to the effect control section 300 . Then, the effect control section 300 starts the variation of the decorative symbols in response to receiving the variation start command.

Also, here, the number of reservations is "2" when the special symbols start to fluctuate. That is, in the game control unit 200, the number of reservations recognized is "2". Further, the variation start command transmitted by the game control unit 200 includes a pending number designation command, and the pending number is designated as "2" in this pending number designation command. Therefore, the production control unit 300 that has received the fluctuation start command recognizes the number of reservations as "2". In addition, in this case, the number of reservations recognized by both the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 will be in a state of matching each other.

Then, the game control unit 200 transmits a pre-determination result command along with the entry (winning) to the first start port 121 (see t12 in the figure). The effect control unit 300, which has received this pre-determination result command, performs processing for executing a chance eye light emitting effect, which is one aspect of the advance notice effect. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 sets schedule data for the prefetch effect.

Also, with the winning of the first starting port 121 (see t12 in the figure), the number of reservations recognized in the game control unit 200 becomes "3". In addition, the production control unit 300 recognizes the number of reservations as "3" by receiving the prior determination result command including the number of reservations designation command.

Then, the effect control unit 300 executes the chance light emission effect at the timing of temporarily stopping the decorative symbols (see t13 in the figure). Then, although illustration is omitted, the game control unit 200 transmits a change stop command to the effect control unit 300 at the timing when the change in the special symbol stops. Along with this, the production control unit 300 stops the decorative symbols.

Then, when the game control unit 200 transmits the next variation start command to the effect control unit 300, the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative symbols (see t14 in the figure). In addition, the effect control unit 300 executes the chance light emission effect at the timing of temporarily stopping the decorative symbols (see t15 in the figure). Then, although not shown, the game control unit 200 transmits a variation stop command to the effect control unit 300, and the effect control unit 300 determines and stops the decorative symbols. Further, when the next variation start command is transmitted, the effect control section 300 starts the variation of the decoration pattern (see t16 in the figure), and then executes the chance eye light emitting effect (see t17 in the figure).

Next, referring to FIG. 115(b), the processing when the command cannot be received will be described. The processing of the game control unit 200 shown in FIG. 115(b) is the same as the processing of the game control unit 200 shown in FIG. 115(a).

In addition, in the example of FIG. 115 (b), from the entrance ball to the first start port 121, until the timing of receiving the next variation start command (see t12 to t14 in the figure), the effect control unit 300 is the game Assume that an event occurs in which a command from control unit 200 cannot be received. As a result, the effect control unit 300 does not receive the variation start command (see t14 in the drawing). In addition, after the timing of receiving the next fluctuation start command (see t14 in the figure), and the timing of receiving the next fluctuation start command (see t16 in the figure), the effect control unit 300 is the game control unit The event that commands from 200 cannot be received shall be resolved. As a result, the effect control unit 300 further receives the next variation start command (see t16 in the figure).

Now, as shown in FIG. 115(b), even if the command cannot be received, as in FIG. The game control unit 200 transmits a pre-determination result command to the effect control unit 300 (see t12 in the figure). Then, the effect control unit 300 executes the chance light emission effect (see t13 in the figure).

Then, the game control unit 200 stops the variation of the special symbol and starts the variation of the next special symbol (see t14 in the figure). Originally, the production control unit 300 receives the fluctuation stop command and the fluctuation start command at this timing, stops the temporarily stopped (swinging) decorative pattern, and starts the next fluctuation. However, in this example, the production control unit 300 does not receive the command due to the occurrence of an event that the production control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 (see the cross mark in the figure). Therefore, the effect control unit 300 continues the swinging state of the decorative pattern without fixing and stopping the swinging decorative pattern after executing the chance eye light emitting effect.

Further, since the variation of the next special symbol has started (see t14 in the figure), the number of reservations recognized by the game control unit 200 is "2". On the other hand, since the production control unit 300 does not receive the variation start command including the number of reservations designation command, the number of reservations does not recognize that it will be "2", the state that recognizes the number of reservations as "3" continue. That is, the number of reservations recognized by the effect control unit 300 is different from the number of reservations that should be recognized. In other words, the number of reservations recognized by both the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 do not match each other. In such a state, the effect control unit 300 does not execute the chance light emission effect (see the cross mark in the figure) even when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see t15 in the figure).

Then, when the game control unit 200 transmits the next variation start command to the production control unit 300, since the event that the production control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 is resolved, the production control unit 300 receives the variation start command and starts variation of the decorative design (see t16 in the figure). Moreover, the production|presentation control part 300 recognizes the number of reservations as "1" by receiving a fluctuation start command. To explain further, the effect control unit 300 receives the pending number designation command included in the variation start command, and changes the recognized pending number from "3" to "1".

Here, in the case of receiving the command, if the number of reservations specified command included in the variation start command is received, the number of reservations recognized by the effect control unit 300 is reduced by one. However, in the example in FIG. 115(b), a change in the pending number is recognized, which is different from the case of receiving the command, that is, the pending number changes from "3" to "1", that is, the pending number is decreased by 2. be. In this way, when a situation different from the original change in the number of reservations is recognized, the effect control unit 300 does not execute the chance light emission effect. That is, when the effect control unit 300 detects an abnormality regarding the number of reservations to be recognized, it prohibits the chance-eye light-emitting effect. To explain further, when a difference occurs in the number of reservations recognized by the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300, the effect control unit 300 performs a process of resetting all the schedule data of the prefetch effect. In the illustrated example, by performing this reset process, even at the timing when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (see t17 in the figure), the effect control unit 300 is set in the schedule data of the prefetch effect. Do not execute the lighting effect (see the cross mark in the figure). In other words, the chance eye light emitting effect, which is the planned light emitting effect, is not performed. Also, as described above, if an event occurs in which the variation start command cannot be received, the effect control unit 300 receives the next variation start command and starts the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41. 82(e)) may not be executed. That is, when an event in which the fluctuation start command cannot be received occurs, the effect control section 300 may omit the extinction effect that is performed when an event in which the fluctuation start command cannot be received does not occur. In addition, when an event in which the variation start command cannot be received occurs, the effect control unit 300 receives the next variation start command and changes the decorative pattern 41 compared to when the event in which the variation start command cannot be received does not occur. You may shorten the execution time of the shift production|presentation (refer FIG. 46 (3)) performed when starting a variable production|presentation. Moreover, when the event which cannot receive a fluctuation start command occurs, the production|presentation control part 300 may abbreviate|omit a shift production|presentation.

It should be noted that, if an event occurs in which a command cannot be received normally as described above, and if the process of resetting the schedule data of the look-ahead effect is not performed, the chance light is emitted in a variation other than the variation that originally executes the chance light emission effect. Problems such as the performance being executed may occur. In these cases, there are situations where unintended fluctuations provoke the player, and situations where intended fluctuations do not provoke the player. Therefore, in the illustrated example, in order to avoid these situations, a process of resetting the schedule data of the look-ahead effect is performed. To explain further, in the illustrated example, execution of the chance eye light emitting effect is prevented in spite of not being the so-called look-ahead change targeted by the schedule data of the look-ahead effect.

FIGS. 116(a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the event and the ready-to-reach light effect when the command cannot be received. Specifically, FIG. 116(a) is a timing chart when a command is received, and FIG. 116(b) is a timing chart when a command cannot be received. Here, the ready-to-win light emission effect is an effect to display the right and left decorative symbols 41 and the ready-to-win light emitting image.

Here, the ready-to-win luminous image is an image for making the player see as if the right and left decorative symbols 41, which are the ready-to-win eyes, are emitting light. The reach eye emission image is, for example, an image imitating light. The reach eye emission image may be displayed in any color. Further, the reach eye emission image is displayed, for example, in the image display area of the image display section 114, near the area where each of the left and right decorative patterns 41, which are the reach eye, is displayed. More specifically, the reach eye luminous image is displayed in the vicinity of the area where the left decorative design 41 is displayed and in the vicinity of the area where the right decorative design 41 is displayed. The reach eye luminescence image is displayed around the area where each of the left and right decorative patterns 41, which are the reach eye, is displayed. Further, the reach eye emission image may be displayed in the whole or part of the area where each of the left and right decorative patterns 41, which are the reach eye, is displayed. The reach eye emission image of the present embodiment is displayed when the reach is established.

Other processes by the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 when the effect control unit 300 cannot receive commands will be described below with reference to FIGS. 116(a) and 116(b). Specifically, first, with reference to FIG. 116(a), the processing when a command is received will be described, and then with reference to FIG. 116(b), the processing when the command cannot be received will be described. do.

The processing of the game control unit 200 shown in FIGS. 116(a) and 116(b) is the same as the processing of the game control unit 200 shown in FIGS. 115(a) and 115(b). Also, the effect control section 300 shown in FIGS. 116(a) and 116(b) executes the ready-to-win effect in each variation.

First, as shown in FIG. 116(a), the game control unit 200 starts the variation of the special symbol (see t21 in the drawing), and the game control unit 200 transmits a variation start command to the effect control unit 300. Then, the effect control unit 300 starts varying the decorative symbols. At this time, the number of reservations recognized by the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 is "2".

Then, the game control unit 200 transmits a pre-determination result command along with the ball entering the first starting port 121 (see t22 in the drawing). Note that unlike the example shown in FIG. 115, in the example shown in FIG. 116, the effect control unit 300 does not set the schedule data for the prefetch effect.

And the production|presentation control part 300 performs reach light emission production|presentation in predetermined timing (refer t23 in a figure). Then, although illustration is omitted, the game control unit 200 transmits a change stop command to the effect control unit 300 at the timing when the change in the special symbol stops. Along with this, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbols.

Then, when the game control unit 200 transmits the next variation start command to the effect control unit 300, the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative symbols (see t24 in the drawing). In addition, the effect control section 300 executes the ready-to-win light effect at a predetermined timing (see t25 in the drawing). Then, although not shown, the game control unit 200 transmits a variation stop command to the effect control unit 300, and the effect control unit 300 determines and stops the decorative symbols. Then, along with the transmission of the next variation start command, the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative pattern (see t26 in the figure), and then executes the reach light emission effect at a predetermined timing (t27 in the figure). reference).

Next, referring to FIG. 116(b), the processing when the command cannot be received will be described. In the illustrated example, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 115, during the period from the ball entering the first starting hole 121 to the timing of receiving the next variation start command (see t22 to t24 in the figure), It is assumed that an event occurs in which the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200 . As a result, the effect control unit 300 cannot receive the fluctuation start command (see t24 in the figure). Also, in the illustrated example, after the timing of receiving the next variation start command (see t24 in the figure), and the timing of receiving the next variation start command (see t26 in the figure), effect control It is assumed that the event that the unit 300 cannot receive commands from the game control unit 200 is resolved. As a result, the effect control unit 300 further receives the next variation start command (see t26 in the drawing).

First, as in FIG. 116 (a) above, also in FIG. 116 (b), after starting the variation of the special symbol (see t21 in the figure), the game control unit 200 transmits a pre-determination result command to the effect control unit 300 (see t22 in the figure). And the production|presentation control part 300 performs reach light emission production|presentation (t23 reference in the figure) in predetermined timing.

Then, the game control unit 200 stops the variation of the special symbol and starts the variation of the next special symbol (see t24 in the figure). Originally, the production control unit 300 receives the fluctuation stop command and the fluctuation start command at this timing, fixes and stops the temporarily stopped decorative symbol, and starts the next fluctuation. However, in this example, the production control unit 300 cannot receive the command due to the occurrence of an event that the production control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 (see the cross mark in the figure). Therefore, the effect control unit 300 continues the swinging state without fixing and stopping the decorative symbols. In addition, the number of reservations recognized by both the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 does not match each other. And, in such a state, the effect control unit 300 does not execute the reach light emission effect (see the cross mark in the figure) even when the timing for executing the reach light effect next time comes (see t25 in the figure).

Then, when the game control unit 200 transmits the next variation start command to the performance control unit 300, since the event that the performance control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 is resolved, the performance control The unit 300 receives the variation start command and starts variation of the decorative design (see t26 in the figure). In addition, the production control unit 300 recognizes the number of reservations as "1" by receiving the variation start command including the number of reservations designation command. Here, the effect control unit 300 receives the number-of-holds specifying command, and recognizes the change of the number of reservations, which is different from the case of receiving the command, that the number of reservations changes from "3" to "1". However, unlike the case shown in FIG. 115(b), the effect control unit 300 performs processing without prohibiting the ready-to-win effect. That is, the production control unit 300 executes the ready-to-win lighting production (see t27) at a predetermined timing.

As described above, unlike the case shown in FIG. 115(b), even if the command could not be received, after the command could not be received, the ready-to-reach light emission effect was executed according to the next received variation start command. be. By this, for example, when the command can not be received as shown in FIG. is simplified.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 115(b), the control for resetting the schedule data of the look-ahead effect is performed when the schedule data of the look-ahead effect sets the chance-eye light effect, that is, the light effect using the decoration pattern. is not limited to For example, in the schedule data of the look-ahead effect, a pending change effect, that is, a look-ahead effect using the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 may be set.

In addition, the decorative pattern is an image that the player more easily pays attention to than the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 . Therefore, as in the example shown in FIG. 115(b), by imposing a prohibition that the look-ahead effect using decorative symbols is not executed, misrecognition of the player is more effectively suppressed. To explain further, the player tends to pay attention to the decorative pattern, and the special game is performed by performing the light emitting effect using the decorative pattern even though it is not the prefetch variation targeted by the schedule data of the prefetch effect. This prevents the player from erroneously expecting to be beaten.

Also, in the above description, the effect control unit 300 described the control of resetting the schedule data of the prefetch effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if control is not applied, that is, even if the command cannot be received, the effect control unit 300 does not reset the schedule data of the prefetch effect and controls to execute the prefetch effect according to the schedule data of the prefetch effect. good. Such control simplifies the processing of the effect control unit 300 as compared with the case where the effect control unit 300 performs control for resetting the schedule data of the prefetch effect.

Also, in the above description, it has been described that the fluctuation start command and the pre-determination result command include the pending number designation command, but the present invention is not limited to this. At another timing, or with another command, the mode may be such that the number-of-holds designation command is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 . Further, instead of the number-of-holds specifying command, a command indicating an increase or decrease of the number of reservations may be transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 .

Also, in the above explanation, even if the command could not be received, after the command could not be received, the ready-to-reach lighting effect was executed according to the next received variation start command. is not limited to reach production. For example, even if the command could not be received, after the command could not be received, according to the next received variation start command, the jackpot light emission effect may be executed. Here, the jackpot light emitting effect is a effect of displaying the double eyes decorative pattern 41 and the double eyes light emitting image 68 .

[Event 2 when a command cannot be received]
FIGS. 117(a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the timing relationship between an event when a command cannot be received and a lighting effect using decorative symbols. Specifically, FIG. 117(a) is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the decorative design effect when the command is received, and FIG. 117(b) is the execution of the decorative design effect when the command is not received. 4 is a timing chart showing timing;

Next, with reference to FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b), the change in the swing time of the decorative symbols when the effect control section 300 cannot receive the command will be described. Specifically, the process for receiving a command will be described with reference to FIG. 117(a). Further, the processing when the command cannot be received will be described with reference to FIG. 117(b).

It should be noted that in each of Figure 117 (a) and (b), the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost, and a variation example of executing the reach light emitting effect (see "reach lost" in the figure) and the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and the ready-to-win lighting effect and the jackpot lighting effect are executed (see "jackpot" in the figure).

First, a variation example of "reach out" when receiving the command shown in FIG. 117(a) will be described. In this variation example, the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative design as the effect control unit 300 receives the variation start command (see t31 in the figure). And the production|presentation control part 300 performs reach light emission production|presentation at predetermined timing (refer t32 in a figure). Then, the effect control unit 300 determines and stops the decorative symbols in response to receiving the change stop command (see t34 in the figure). Here, the time from the timing (see t32 in the figure) of executing the ready-to-win effect to the timing (see t34 in the figure) of fixing and stopping the decorative symbols is defined as time T1.

Next, a variation example of the "jackpot" when the command shown in FIG. 117(a) is received will be described. In this variation example, the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative design as the effect control unit 300 receives the variation start command (see t31 in the figure). Then, the effect control unit 300 executes the ready-to-win light-emitting effect at a predetermined timing (see t32 in the figure), and then executes the jackpot light-emitting effect (see t33 in the figure). Then, the effect control unit 300 determines and stops the decorative symbols in response to receiving the change stop command (see t34 in the figure). Although illustration is omitted, a jackpot game is executed after the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped.

Here, time T2 is the time from the timing (see t33 in the figure) of executing the jackpot light emitting effect to the timing (see t34 in the figure) of fixing and stopping the decorative symbols. This time T2 is shorter than time T1 (T2<T1).

Next, a variation example of "reach out" when the command shown in FIG. 117(b) cannot be received will be described. In this example, the effect control unit 300 can not receive the command from the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300 is assumed to be unable to normally receive the next fluctuation fluctuation stop command (see t34 in the figure). . Also, in the next fluctuation, until the timing of receiving the next fluctuation stop command (see t35 in the figure), the event that the production control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 is resolved, and the production control unit 300 Shall receive the following fluctuation stop command:

In the example shown in FIG. 117(b), the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative design as the effect control unit 300 receives the variation start command (see t31 in the figure). And the production|presentation control part 300 performs reach light emission production|presentation at predetermined timing (refer t32 in a figure).

And, originally, the production control unit 300 receives a fluctuation stop command, and temporarily stops (swings) the decorative symbols that are fixed and stopped, but in this example, the production control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 command cannot be received due to the occurrence of an event that cannot receive the command (see the cross mark in the figure). Along with this, the effect control unit 300 continues the state in which the decorative pattern is swinging without fixing and stopping the swinging decorative pattern.

And the production|presentation control part 300 fixes and stops a decorative design with receiving the next fluctuation|variation stop command (refer t35 in a figure). Here, time T3 is the time from the timing (see t32 in the drawing) of executing the ready-to-win effect to the timing (see t35 in the drawing) of fixing and stopping the decorative symbols.

Next, a variation example of the "jackpot" when the command shown in FIG. 117(b) cannot be received will be described. In this example, it is assumed that the effect control unit 300 misses the fluctuation stop command (see t34 in the figure) due to an event that the effect control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200. In addition, the event that the production control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 is resolved until the next fluctuation stop command is received (see t36 in the figure), and the production control unit 300 stops the next fluctuation. shall receive commands.

Also, although illustration is omitted, the jackpot game is executed after the timing at which the production control unit 300 originally receives the fluctuation stop command and stops the decorative symbols. Then, the timing of receiving the next variation stop command (see t36 in the drawing) is the timing of receiving the variation stop command in the pattern variation that is first started after the jackpot game.

In the example shown in FIG. 117(b), the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative design as the effect control unit 300 receives the variation start command (see t31 in the figure). Then, the effect control unit 300 executes the ready-to-win light-emitting effect at a predetermined timing (see t32 in the figure), and then executes the jackpot light-emitting effect (see t33 in the figure).

And, originally, the production control unit 300 receives a fluctuation stop command, and temporarily stops (swings) the decorative symbols that are fixed and stopped, but in this example, the production control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 command cannot be received due to the occurrence of an event that cannot receive the command (see the cross mark in the figure). Therefore, the effect control unit 300 continues the swinging state of the decorative symbols without fixing and stopping the swinging decorative symbols. Then, the effect control unit 300 determines and stops the decorative symbols upon receiving the next variation stop command (see t36 in the figure).

Here, time T4 is the time from the timing (see t33 in the figure) of executing the jackpot light emitting effect to the timing (see t36 in the figure) of fixing and stopping the decorative symbols. This time T4 is longer than time T3 (T4>T3) because it includes time for executing a jackpot game, for example. On the other hand, when a command is received as shown in FIG. 117(a), time T2 is shorter than time T1. That is, depending on whether or not an event in which the command cannot be received normally occurs, the length relation of each time is reversed.

Now, the production of FIG. 117 executed by the production control unit 300 described above can be understood as follows. That is, the time T1 from when the ready-to-win light-emitting effect is executed to when the effect control unit 300 receives the variation stop command of the variation in which the ready-to-win light-emitting effect is executed is the time T1 from when the big win light-emitting effect is executed to when the big win light-emitting effect is performed. A performance control unit issues a variation stop command for a variation that is longer than the time T2 until the performance control unit 300 receives the variation stop command of the executed variation, and the light emission performance at the time of reach is executed after the light performance at the time of reach is executed. The time T3 until the effect control unit 300 receives the variation stop command next to the variation stop command without being received by the 300 is the variation stop command of the variation in which the big win light effect is executed after the big win light effect is executed. is shorter than the time T4 until the production control unit 300 receives the fluctuation stop command next to the fluctuation stop command without the production control unit 300 receiving the fluctuation stop command.

It should be noted that, unlike the illustrated example, when the production control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 due to an event that the command cannot be received, for example, the temporarily stopped (swinging) decoration pattern is hidden. In addition, a mode of displaying an image notifying an error may also be adopted. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 117(b), when the command cannot be received, the swinging decorative pattern is not fixed and stopped, and the swinging decorative pattern is continued. Continuity with the production that has been executed so far is guaranteed by executing the production that causes it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, by continuing the state in which the decorative pattern is swinging, when the phenomenon that the performance control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 is resolved and the fluctuation stop command is received, it swings. It is possible to execute a continuous production that does not give the player a sense of incongruity, such as fixing and stopping the decorative symbols that are displayed.

Also, in the variation of the "jackpot" when the command shown in FIG. 117(b) cannot be received, the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are displayed for a long time. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 100 can prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, as compared with a mode in which, for example, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is hidden and an error notification image is displayed. It is possible to suggest to a store clerk or the like of a game parlor (pachinko hall) where is installed that an event has occurred in which the performance control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200.例文帳に追加

In each of FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b), as "big win", the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, and the ready-to-win light emitting effect and the big win light emitting effect are executed. It is not limited to this. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be a big hit, and a variation example in which the ready-to-win lighting effect and the chance eye lighting effect are executed. This example of variation can be understood as follows. That is, the time T1 from when the ready-to-win effect is executed to when the effect control unit 300 receives the variation stop command for the variation in which the ready-to-win light-emitting effect is executed is the time from when the chance-eye light-emitting effect is performed to when the chance-eye light-emitting effect is performed. A performance control unit 300 receives a variation stop command of a variation in which the ready-to-win light emission performance is executed after the ready-to-win light-emission performance is executed for a longer time than the time until the performance control unit 300 receives the variation stop command of the executed variation. The time T3 until the effect control unit 300 receives the variation stop command next to the variation stop command without executing the variation stop command of the variation in which the chance eye light emission effect is executed after the chance eye light effect is executed. It becomes shorter than the time until the production control unit 300 receives the next fluctuation stop command of the fluctuation stop command without the production control unit 300 receiving it.

In addition, in each of FIGS. 117(a) and (b), an example of variation of "reach out" and an example of variation of "jackpot" have been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, over the variation of a plurality of special symbols, the production as described above may be executed. To explain further, for example, as a variation example, the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss and the chance light emission effect is executed, and the lottery result of the next special symbol lottery is a big hit and the big win light emission effect is executed. good too. The relationship between this variation example and the variation example of "reach out" described with reference to FIGS. 117(a) and (b) is understood as follows. That is, the time T1 from when the ready-to-win effect is executed to when the effect control unit 300 receives the variation stop command for the variation in which the ready-to-win light-emitting effect is executed is the time from when the chance-eye light-emitting effect is performed to when the chance-eye light-emitting effect is performed. A performance control unit 300 receives a variation stop command of a variation in which the ready-to-win light emission performance is executed after the ready-to-win light-emission performance is executed for a longer time than the time until the performance control unit 300 receives the variation stop command of the executed variation. The time T3 until the effect control unit 300 receives the variation stop command next to the variation stop command is the variation stop command of the variation in which the chance eye light emission effect is executed after the chance eye light effect is executed. is shorter than the time until the performance control unit 300 receives the variation stop command of the variation in which the next big win light emission performance is executed without the performance control unit 300 receiving the variation stop command.

Moreover, in the above description, it was explained that the effect control unit 300 could not normally receive the fluctuation stop command, but the present invention is not limited to this. The above processing may be performed when the effect control unit 300 fails to receive a predetermined command (specific command) normally. Here, the specific command includes, for example, a change start command and an ending command.

In addition, as described above, during the cycle fluctuation of the special symbols, the start operation production using the decorative pattern 41, the variation production using the decorative pattern 41, the stop operation production using the decorative pattern 41, the increase display production, and the shift production , action effect, disappearance effect, change icon TI or Although the disappearance effect of the pending icon HI, the effect using the small symbol 56, and other various effects during the variation of the special symbol have been described, the time of each effect may be as follows. For example, the time of the start action effect using the decorative pattern 41 may be longer or shorter than the time of the stop action effect using the decorative pattern 41, and the special game is performed during these times. may vary depending on the expectations set. For example, when the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variation of the special symbol is relatively low, the motion effect at the start of the variation may be longer (or shorter) than the motion effect at the stop, or may be the same. Further, when the degree of expectation is relatively high, the motion presentation at stop may be longer (or shorter) than the motion presentation at start, or may be the same. In addition, regardless of the degree of expectation, the time of the variable effect using the decorative pattern 41 may be longer than the respective times of the start time action effect and the stop time action effect (and the sum of these times). Also, the time of the action effect at the start may be longer than or shorter than the execution time of the shift effect, or may be the same. In addition, the time of the motion effect at stop may be longer than or shorter than the execution time of the shift effect, or may be the same. Also, the time period of the action presentation at the start may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the action in the action presentation. In addition, the duration of the motion effect at stop may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the motion in the motion effect. Also, the duration of the action effect at stop may be longer, shorter, or the same as the duration of the extinction effect. Also, the duration of the action effect at the start may be longer, shorter, or the same as the duration of the extinction effect. In addition, the duration of the action presentation at the time of start is the icon TI or the suspended icon TI when the extra icon TI (fluctuation image 51) or the suspended icon HI (suspended image 52) when the command is not received normally disappears. It may be longer, shorter, or the same as the HI disappearance presentation time.

Also, the time of the variation effect using the small pattern 56 (or the sub-first variation display 81) may be longer than the time of each of the start action effect and the stop action effect using the decorative pattern 41. Also, the time of the variation effect using the small pattern 56 (or the first sub-variation display 81) may be longer than the sum of the time of the action effect at the start and the time of the action effect at the stop. In addition, the time of the variable effect using the small pattern 56 (or the first sub-variation display 81) may be longer than the sum of the time of the action effect at the start and the time of the variable effect using the decorative pattern 41. . In addition, the time of the variation effect using the small pattern 56 (or the first sub-variation display 81) may be longer than the sum of the time of the variation effect using the decorative pattern 41 and the time of the motion effect at stop. .

In addition, when an effect using the movable accessory 115 is performed during the variation of the special symbol, the time from when the movable accessory 115 starts to move to when it returns to the initial position is the time of the motion effect at the start of the variation. may be longer than It should be noted that the time from when the movable accessory 115 starts to move until it returns to the initial position may be shorter than or equal to the time of the action presentation at the start. In addition, when the performance using the movable accessory 115 is performed during the variation of the special symbol, the time from when the movable accessory 115 starts to move to when it returns to the initial position is determined by using the decorative pattern 41 in that variation. It may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the action effect at the time of stop. When the performance using the movable accessory 115 is performed during the variation of the special symbol, the time from when the movable accessory 115 starts to move until it returns to the initial position is the variation performance using the decorative pattern 41 in that variation. It may be shorter, longer, or the same as the time of . In addition, when an effect using the movable accessory 115 is performed during the variation of the special symbol, the time from the start of the action of the movable accessory 115 to the return to the initial position is longer than the execution time of the shift effect in the variation. may be longer, shorter, or the same. Also, the time from when the movable accessory 115 starts to move until it returns to the initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the motion in the motion presentation. Also, the time from when the movable accessory 115 starts to move to when it returns to the initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the disappearance presentation time. In addition, the time from when the movable accessory 115 starts to move until it returns to the initial position is the extra icon TI (fluctuation image 51) or the pending icon HI (suspended image 52) when the command is not received normally. ) may be longer, shorter, or the same as the disappearing rendering time of the icon TI or the pending icon HI when the icon TI disappears.

Further, when the operation promotion image SSG (button operation image 67) prompting the operation of the production button 161 is displayed while the special symbols are changing, the effective period suggestion image suggesting the operation effective period of the production button 161 is displayed. may be longer than each time (and the sum of these times) of the start time action effect and the stop time action effect using the decorative pattern 41 in the variation. Also, the maximum time for which the effective period suggesting image is displayed may be shorter than the time for the variation effect using the decorative pattern 41 in that variation.

Also, when the operation prompting image SSG (the button operation image 67) is displayed while the special symbols are changing, the maximum time for which the effective period suggesting image is displayed may be longer than the execution time of the shift effect. Also, when the operation prompting image SSG is displayed while the special symbol is changing, the maximum time for which the valid period suggesting image is displayed is the disappearance effect (disappearance effect at normal time, It may be longer than the disappearance effect of the icon TI (fluctuation image 51) or the reserved icon HI (the reserved image 52) when the extra icon TI or the reserved icon HI is erased.

Further, when the display of the operation prompting image SSG (the button operation image 67) and the effect using the movable role 115 are executed while the special symbols are changing, the maximum time during which the effective period suggestion image is displayed is the movable role. It may be shorter, longer, or the same as the time from when the object 115 starts to move until it returns to its initial position. In addition, when the effect image is displayed at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the display time of the effect image may be shorter or longer than the start operation production using the decorative symbol 41 in the variation, can be the same. Also, the display time of the effect image may be shorter, longer, or the same as the respective times of the stop-time action production and the variation production using the decorative pattern 41 in the variation. Further, when the look-ahead chance eye effect is executed and an effect image showing the chance eye is displayed, the display time of the effect image may be shorter than the stop time motion effect using the decorative pattern 41 in the variation. It can be good, it can be long, it can be the same. Further, when the look-ahead chance performance is executed, the display time of the effect image may be shorter, longer, or the same as the start time performance using the decorative pattern 41 in the variation. . Also, when the look-ahead chance performance is executed, the display time of the effect image may be shorter, longer, or the same as the variable display performance using the decorative pattern 41 in the variation.

In addition, the time of the action presentation at the start using the decorative pattern 41 is longer than the time of one cycle variation of the special pattern. Moreover, the time of the variation performance using the decorative pattern 41 is longer than the time of one cycle variation of the special pattern. In addition, the time of stop operation presentation using the decorative pattern 41 is longer than the time of one cycle variation of the special pattern.

Also, the execution time of the shift effect may be longer than the time of one cycle variation of the special symbols. Also, the execution time of the increased display effect may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of one cycle variation of the special symbols. In addition, the execution time of the disappearance presentation at the normal time may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of one cycle variation of the special symbols. In addition, when the command is not received normally, the execution time of the disappearing effect of the icon TI (fluctuation image 51) or the pending icon HI (holding image 52) is eliminated. , It may be shorter than, longer than, or the same as the time of one cycle variation of the special symbol. In addition, when the command is not received normally, the execution time of the disappearing effect of the icon TI (fluctuation image 51) or the pending icon HI (holding image 52) is eliminated. , It may be longer than the time of one unit change in the cycle variation of the special symbol.

Also, the fluctuation cycle of the first sub-variation indicator 81 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle fluctuation of the first special symbol. In addition, the fluctuation cycle of the first sub-variation indicator 81 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the unit change in the cycle fluctuation of the first special symbol. good. In addition, the fluctuation cycle of the second sub-variation indicator 82 during the fluctuation of the second special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle fluctuation of the second special symbol. In addition, the fluctuation period of the second sub-variation indicator 82 during the fluctuation of the second special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the unit change in the cycle fluctuation of the second special symbol. good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine has been described in which, when it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination, a jackpot game is performed and the game state is changed via the jackpot game. In another embodiment, even if it is not determined to be a big hit, it may be shifted from the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state to the time-saving gaming state. For example, the number of fluctuations of special symbols in the low-probability time-saving non-playing state (continuous number of times determined to be lost in the jackpot determination) reaches a predetermined upper limit number (eg, 300 times), It is determined that the variation is a jackpot. Even if not, it may be shifted to the time-saving game state for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times. It may be 100 times or more). In this case, if the special symbol does not come to a big hit before it fluctuates a predetermined number of times, the time-saving game state ends and returns to the low-probability time-saving no-game state. Alternatively, even if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (that is, even if the random number value for the special symbol lottery acquired at the time of winning the starting gate is a value indicating a loss), the special symbol acquired at the time of winning When the random number for the lottery (random number for the jackpot pattern) is a predetermined value, it may be shifted to a time-saving gaming state for a predetermined number of times. Further, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols, the predetermined upper limit number of times may be variable or fixed. For example, when the predetermined upper limit number of times is variable, when the time-saving gaming state is given when the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols becomes the first number, and when the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols becomes the second number In some cases, there may be times when the time-saving gaming state is provided. In this case, the number of times of time saving given may be varied according to the number of times of variation of the special symbol, and the number of times of time saving may be set more as the number of times of variation increases. In addition, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the jackpot design random number value, the number of times of time saving given by the acquired jackpot design random number value may differ. For example, when the acquired jackpot pattern random number value is the first value, the first number of time reductions is given, and when the acquired jackpot pattern random number value is the second value, the second time reduction number is given. may be In addition, there may be a case of shifting to the time-saving game state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols, or a case of shifting to the time-saving game state based on the jackpot symbol random number value. In this case, the number of times of reduced working hours to be provided may be different between the case of shifting to the reduced working hours game state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols and the case of shifting to the reduced working hours game state based on the random number of the jackpot symbols. For example, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols, it is shifted to the time-saving gaming state of 50 times, and in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the jackpot symbol random number, it is more than that. You may shift to the time-saving game state of less 30 times. Conversely, the number of times of time saving may be increased in the case of shifting to the time saving game state based on the jackpot symbol random number value than in the case of shifting to the time saving game state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols. In addition, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state without going through the big hit in this way, if the time-saving gaming state is given without going through the big hit during the time-saving gaming state that has been transferred, a new The time saving game state may continue for the number of time saving times given to. For example, when the time-saving game state is given 50 times without going through the big hit, and when the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is given 50 times without going through the big hit, You may be made to shift to the time-saving game state of 50 times. Alternatively, in this case, the number of working hours may be added. For example, when the time-saving game state is given 50 times without going through the big hit, and when the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is given 50 times without going through the big hit, 50 times newly given are added to the remaining 20 times, and the time saving game state of 70 times may be given. In addition, during the time-saving game state that does not go through such a big win, the time-saving game state that does not go through the big win may not be given. In addition, in the constitution of shifting to the time-saving game state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols or the big-hit pattern random number without going through the big win, the time-saving suggesting performance suggesting the shift to the time-saving game state may be performed. For example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is close to the predetermined upper limit number of times, it may be configured that the time-saving suggesting effect is easily executed. Conversely, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is close to the predetermined upper limit number of times, it may be configured such that the time-saving suggestion effect is difficult to be performed. In addition, in the action presentation at the start using the decorative pattern 41, a time saving suggestion presentation may be performed. For example, when the decorative pattern 41 operates in a specific mode at the start of fluctuation, it may suggest the possibility of shifting to a time-saving gaming state. Further, in the variable display effect using the decorative pattern 41, a time-saving suggesting effect may be performed. In addition, in the motion effect at the time of stop using the decorative pattern 41, a time-saving suggesting effect may be performed.

Various effects of the pachinko gaming machine 100 have been described above, but it is possible to apply or combine all or part of the described contents to other effects, controls, etc., even if there is no particular mention. In addition, although various embodiments and modifications have been mentioned, it is possible to apply or combine the contents of these embodiments and modifications to other effects, etc., even if they are not mentioned in this document. . In addition, it is possible to combine various embodiments and modifications with each other, and to replace some of them, even if there is no mention in this document.

41... Decoration pattern 100... Pachinko game machine 114... Image display unit 200... Game control unit 231... Random number acquisition unit 234... Special symbol determination unit 300... Effect control unit

Claims (1)

a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A production control means for controlling production according to the command transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means is
Determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of the starting condition;
storage means for storing determination information based on the determination as pending storage;
a variable display means for performing a cycle variation in a first period as a variable display of the special symbols, and then stopping and displaying the special symbols for a predetermined period of time;
The production control means is
Along with the variable display and stop display of the special symbols, it is possible to execute a variable effect in which the effect symbols are variably displayed and then stopped,
capable of displaying a pending indication corresponding to the pending memory;
It is possible to display the pending display in a second cycle,
The first cycle and the second cycle are different times,
The game machine stop-displays the performance symbols at a timing after the end of the last cycle variation in the variable display of the special symbols and before the predetermined time elapses.

Images